all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 |
|
Compliance Insert | Users Manual | 1.01 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Manual | Users Manual | 3.02 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Radio Info | Users Manual | 68.56 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 804.37 KiB | December 03 2008 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual 1 of 6 | Users Manual | 2.45 MiB | May 09 2007 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual 2 of 6 | Users Manual | 1.73 MiB | May 09 2007 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual 3 of 6 | Users Manual | 2.00 MiB | May 09 2007 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual 4 of 6 | Users Manual | 669.70 KiB | May 09 2007 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual 5 of 6 | Users Manual | 2.67 MiB | May 09 2007 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual 6 of 6 | Users Manual | 846.70 KiB | May 09 2007 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual Compliance Insert | Users Manual | 1003.86 KiB | May 09 2007 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual part 1 | Users Manual | 2.26 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual part 2 | Users Manual | 2.47 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual part 3 | Users Manual | 1.34 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual part 4 | Users Manual | 1.07 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Operational Description | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Operational Description | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Internal Photos | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Internal Photos | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | May 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | May 09 2007 |
1 2 3 4 | Compliance Insert | Users Manual | 1.01 MiB |
6820 Compliance Insert For Users in the United States and Canada Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. Attention: Ce marquage indique que lusager doit, avant lutilisation, lire toute la documentation incluse. Users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Utilisateurs de ce produit sont aviss dutiliser des accessoires et des priphriques approuvs par Intermec Technologies Corporation. Lutilisation daccessoires autres que ceux recommands ou des changements ce produit qui ne sont pas approuvs par Intermec Technologies Corporation peuvent annuler la conformit de ce produit et mettre fin au droit qua lusager dutiliser l'quipement. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance These Class B digital products meet all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Conformit aux normes canadiennes sur les appareils numriques Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Battery Information Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Caution: The battery pack used in this device may ignite, create a chemical burn hazard, explode, or release toxic materials if mistreated. Do not incinerate, disassemble, or heat above 100C (212F). Do not short circuit; may cause burns. Keep away from children. Attention: Le bloc-piles utilis dans cet appareil peut prendre feu, constituer un risque de brlure chimique, exploser ou dgager des substances toxiques sil est manipul de faon inapproprie. Ne pas jeter au feu, dmonter ou chauffer plus de 100 C (212 F). Ne pas court-circuiter; cela pourrait causer des brlures. Garder hors de la porte des enfants. Battery Recycling Information This product contains or uses a lead acid battery. When the battery reaches the end of its useful life, the spent battery should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler. Do not mix this battery with the solid waste stream. Contact your Intermec Technologies Service Center for recycling or disposal information. Ce produit contient ou utilise une pile au plomb. Lorsque la batterie atteint la fin de sa dure de vie utile, la batterie uses doivent tre mises aux rebuts par un agent de recyclage ou un manipulateur de matriaux dangereux agr. Il ne faut pas mlanger la batterie aux autres dchets solides. Pour plus dinformations sur le recyclage ou la mise aux rebuts, contacter votre centre de services Intermec Technologies. Pb Pb Note: In the U.S.A., the EPA does not consider spent lead-acid batteries as hazardous waste. Power Supply Connections Caution: Use Intermec Model AE2 or AE27 for the power supply. No user-serviceable parts. Connexions du bloc dalimentation Attention: Employez le model dIntermec AE2 ou AE27 pour lalimentation dnergie. Il ne contient aucune pice parable par lutilisateur. Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE) Radio Wave or Radio Frequency Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE) for Model 6820 with Intermec mobile computers. When installing and using the Intermec 6820, a 20 cm (8 in) passing distance must be maintained from the body or head of the user or nearby persons and the device. This product meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. For Users Outside of the United States or Canada Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. The users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Battery Information Caution: The battery pack used in this device may ignite, create a chemical burn hazard, explode, or release toxic materials if mistreated. Do not incinerate, disassemble, or heat above 100C (212F). Do not short circuit; may cause burns. Keep away from children. Battery Recycling Information This product contains or uses a lead acid battery. When the battery reaches the end of its useful life, the spent battery should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler. Do not mix this battery with the solid waste stream. Contact your Intermec Technologies Service Center for recycling or disposal information. Pb Pb Power Supply Connections Caution: Use Intermec Model AE2 or AE27 for the power supply. No user-serviceable parts.
Intermec Technologies Corporation Intermec Technologies Corporation 100 C (212 F) Intermec Pb Pb Intermec AE2 AE27 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada oder den Vereinigten Staaten Vorsicht: Diese Kennzeichnung weist darauf hin, dass der Benutzer vor dem Gebrauch alle mitgelieferten Unterlagen lesen soll. Die Benutzer dieses Produkts werden darauf hingewiesen, nur Zubehrteile und Peripheriegerte zu verwenden, die von Intermec Technologies Corporation genehmigt sind. Falls nicht empfohlene Zubehrteile verwendet oder an diesem Produkt nderungen vorgenommen werden, die nicht von Intermec Technologies Corporation genehmigt sind, kann dadurch die behrdliche Konformitt des Produkts verletzt werden und der Benutzer die Berechtigung zur Verwendung des Gerts verlieren. Akku-Informationen Vorsicht: Der in diesem Gert verwendete Akkusatz kann sich bei Missbrauch entznden, chemische Vertzungen verursachen, expoldieren oder toxische Substanzen freisetzen. Nicht verbrennen, zerlegen oder ber 100 C (212 F) erwrmen. Keinen Kurzschluss verursachen; Verbrennungsgefahr. Von Kindern fern halten. Informationen zum Recycling von Batterien Dieses Produkt enthlt oder verwendet einen Bleisureakku. Wenn die Batterie ausgedient hat, sollte sie durch einen qualifizierten Recycler oder durch den Sondermll entsorgt werden. Werfen Sie die Batterie nicht in den Abfall. Setzen Sie sich mit Ihrem Intermec Technologies Service-Zentrum in Verbindung, um weitere Informationen zum Recycling oder Entsorgen zu erhalten. Pb Pb Stromanschlsse Vorsicht: Als Netzteil Intermec Modell AE2 oder AE27 verwenden. Enthlt keine Teile, die vom Benutzer gewartet werden knnen.
: . Intermec Technologies Corporation . Intermec Technologies Corporation ,
. 100C (212 F) . . . ,
. . Intermec . Pb Pb
: Intermec AE2 AE27 . . Para usurios fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos Cuidado: Esta identificao indica que o usurio deve ler toda a documentao fornecida antes do uso. Se advierte a los usuarios de este producto que usen accesorios y perifricos aprobados por Intermec Technologies Corporation. El uso de accesorios aparte de los recomendados, o los cambios a este producto que no estn aprobados por Intermec Technologies Corporation, pueden anular el cumplimiento de este producto y ocasionar la prdida de la autorizacin del usuario para operar el equipo. Informaes sobre a bateria Cuidado: A bateria utilizada neste dispositivo pode pegar fogo, criar risco de queimadura qumica, explodir ou exalar materiais txicos se abusada. No incinerar, desmontar nem aquecer a bateria a mais de 100C (212F). No provocar curto-circuito, pois pode causar queimaduras. Manter afastada de crianas. Infomaes de Reciclagem de Bateria Este produto contm ou usa bateria chumbo-cido. Quando a bateria chega ao fim da sua vida til, deve ser descartada por um profissional de reciclagem qualificado ou por um especialista no manuseio de materiais perigosos. No misture a bateria com fluxo de lixo slido. Entre em contato com seu Centro de Servios de Tecnologia Intermec para informaes de reciclagem ou descarte. Pb Pb Conexes da fonte de alimentao Ciudado: Usar fontes de alimentao Intermec Modelo AE2 ou AE27. No h nenhuma pea que possa ser substituda ou consertada pelo usurio.
, , Intermec Technologies Corporation. , ,
, Intermec Technologies Corporation,
. , , 100C (212 F). .
. - Intermec Technologies. Pb Pb
: Intermec AE2 AE27. ,
, . Para usuarios fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos Precaucin: Esta marca indica que el usuario debe leer toda la documentacin incluida antes del uso. Os usurios deste produto devem usar acessrios e perifricos aprovados pela Intermec Technologies Corporation. Usar acessrios no recomendados, ou fazer alteraes neste produto no aprovadas pela Intermec Technologies Corporation, poder anular a conformidade deste produto e resultar na perda da permisso do usurio de utilizar o equipamento. Informacin de la batera Precaucin: La batera que se usa en este dispositivo puede encenderse, crear un peligro de quemadura qumica, explotar o expedir materiales txicos si se trata indebidamente. No la incinere, desarme ni caliente sobre 100C (212F). No haga cortocircuitos porque pueden causar quemaduras. Mantngala alejada de los nios. Informacin acerca del reciclaje de la batera Este producto contiene o usa una batera de cido de plomo. Cuando la batera llega al final de su vida til, debe ser desechada por personal especializado en reciclaje de materiales o manejo de materiales peligrosos. No mezcle la batera con otros residuos slidos. Pnganse en contacto con su Centro de servicio de Intermec Technologies para obtener informacin sobre reciclaje o desecho de materiales. Pb Pb Conexiones de la fuente de alimentacin Precaucin: Para la fuente de alimentacin use el Modelo AE2 o AE27 de Intermec. No hay piezas a las cuales pueda dar servicio el usuario. Worldwide Headquarters Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com www.intermec.com 2008 Intermec Technologies 2006 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. Corporation. All rights reserved. 6820 Compliance Insert
*933-059-004*
P/N 933-059-004
1 2 3 4 | Manual | Users Manual | 3.02 MiB |
PW50 Workboard Printer Placeholder for PW50 illustration Users Guide Intermec Technologies Corporation Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Ave.W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2007 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), Intellitag, Intellitag Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower, Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan, Smart Mobile Computing, SmartSystems, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Vista Powered are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. There are U.S. and foreign patents as well as U.S. and foreign patents pending. ii PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Contents Contents Before You Begin. v Safety Information . v Global Services and Support . v Warranty Information. v Web Support . vi Telephone Support . vi Service Location Support . vi Who Should Read This Manual . vii Related Documents . vii 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer. 1 Learning About the PW50 Workboard Printer . 2 Identifying the Parts of the Printer . 2 Understanding the Control Panel . 3 Understanding the Printer Sounds . 5 Using the Batteries . 5 Installing the Battery . 6 Charging the Batteries. 6 Understanding the Battery LED . 7 Extending Battery Life. 8 Loading Media. 8 Printing a Testprint . 10 Inserting a Handheld Computer. 11 Using the Card Reader Option . 12 2 Configuring the PW50. 13 Configuring the PW50 . 14 Understanding the Printer Modes . 14 Understanding Ready Mode . 14 Understanding Pause Mode. 14 Understanding Error Mode . 14 Understanding Test Mode . 14 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide iii Contents Changing Configuration Settings . 16 Changing Configuration Settings From PrintSet . 17 Changing Configuration Settings Using the Command Line . 17 Changing Configuration Settings From SmartSystems Console. 17 Establishing Communications With a Host . 18 Setting Up Bluetooth Communications. 18 Setting Up USB Communications . 19 Setting Up Serial Communications . 20 Upgrading the Firmware. 21 Downloading Fonts and Graphics . 22 3 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50 . 23 Troubleshooting the PW50 . 24 Contacting Product Support. 24 Understanding Error Messages . 25 Troubleshooting Printer Problems and Finding Solutions . 25 Troubleshooting Communication Problems . 27 Cold Booting the PW50 . 28 Cleaning the PW50. 28 A Specifications . 31 Specifications. 32 Accessories for the PW50 . 36 iv PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Before You Begin Before You Begin This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information. Safety Information Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions. This section explains how to identify and understand warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this document. A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. Global Services and Support Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Support >
Returns and Repairs > Warranty. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide v Before You Begin Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided as is with all faults. All warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals (in PDF). To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at www.intermec.com and click Support > Knowledge Central to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product. Telephone Support In the U.S.A. and Canada, call 1-800-755-5505. Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click About Us > Contact Us. Service Location Support For the most current listing of service locations, click Support
>Returns and Repairs > Repair Locations. For technical support in South Korea, use the after service locations listed below:
AWOO Systems 102-1304 SK Ventium 522 Dangjung-dong Gunpo-si, Gyeonggi-do Korea, South 435-776 Contact: Mr. Sinbum Kang Telephone: +82-31-436-1191 Email: mjyun@awoo.co.kr vi PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Before You Begin IN Information System PTD LTD 6th Floor Daegu Venture Center Bldg 95 Shinchun 3 Dong Donggu, Daegu City, Korea E-mail: jmyou@idif.co.kr or korlim@gw.idif.co.kr Who Should Read This Manual This users guide is for the person who is responsible for installing, configuring, and maintaining the PW50 Workboard Printer. This users guide provides you with information about the features of the PW50, and how to configure, operate, maintain, and troubleshoot it. Before you work with the PW50, you should be familiar with your network and general networking terms, such as IP address. Related Documents The Intermec web site at www.intermec.com contains our documents (as PDF files) that you can download for free. To download documents 1 Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 2 Click Support > Manuals. 3 In the Select a Product field, choose the product whose documentation you want to download. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide vii Before You Begin viii PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer Use this chapter to familiarize yourself with the PW50 Workboard Printer. This chapter contains these sections:
Learning About the PW50 Workboard Printer Using the Batteries Loading Media Printing a Testprint Using the Card Reader Option Inserting a Handheld Computer 1 Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer Learning About the PW50 Workboard Printer The PW50 is a rugged direct thermal label and receipt printer that is designed for use with the CN3, CN3e, and CK61 mobile computers. The PW50 provides:
print resolution of 203 dpi. print speeds of up to 100 mm per second (4 ips). a Bluetooth radio. Identifying the Parts of the Printer Use this illustration to familiarize yourself with some of the features of the PW50. Feed button Standby button Battery Intermec Ready-to-Work indicator Error Media cover release button Communications PW50 Printer: This illustration shows the important features of the PW50 printer. A weather-resistant flap protects the communcations ports and the external power connector. 2 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Understanding the Control Panel Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer The PW50 control panel contains two buttons and four LED indicators. Use the two buttons to perform functions on the PW50 printer. See the following tables to understand the buttons and LED indicators. Standby button Communications Error Feed button Battery Intermec Ready-to-Work indicator PW50 Control Panel: Use this illustration to familiarize yourself with the buttons and LEDs on the PW50. Understanding How to Use the PW50 Buttons Button Name Standby
(Power) Feed Functions Press to put the printer in Standby mode. In Standby mode, power to the radio is turned off. Press to turn the printer back on and put the printer in Ready mode. Press to advance label or receipt paper. The amount of media that feeds depends on the type of media you are using. Media advances by 5 mm (0.2 inch), feeds out an entire label, or feeds a configured length of media based on your media and settings. If the printer is printing, pressing this button causes pauses printing. Press the button again to resume printing. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 3 Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer Understanding the Communications, Error, and Battery Indicators Indicator Name State Communications Off Description The Bluetooth radio is off. The Bluetooth radio turns off when you connect a serial cable. Steady green The Bluetooth radio is on and the printer is not connected to a serial cable. The PW50 is off. Error Off Battery Steady green Ready/Data Steady red Off Error The battery is installed and working properly. There is no battery installed. Steady green Battery is fully charged in the PW50 with an external power supply connected. Battery is charging in the PW50 with an external power supply connected. Steady red Blinking red Battery is low. Understanding the Intermec Ready-to-Work Indicator State Off On Blinking A blinking light can mean one of several conditions:
Description The PW50 is in Standby mode. The PW50 is powered on and operating. The printer is out of paper. The media cover is open. There is a printer error that requires you to perform an action. For a list of possible problems, see Chapter 3, Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50. 4 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer Understanding the Printer Sounds The PW50 plays sounds in response to several actions that you can take with the printer. Use the following table to understand when the sounds occur and what they mean. Understanding the Printer Sounds Sound Power Occurs When:
You insert a battery in the printer. The PW50 starts charging the battery. You plug in the AC adapter. Hardware You open the media door, close the media door, or insert a cable. Button Error You press one of the PW50 buttons. The printer cannot feed paper or print a job because of a hardware issue such as the media door open, a paper jam, or there is no media. An error occurs such as a paper jam, a print error, or the printer is out of range. Using the Batteries The PW50 uses a rechargeable 2200 mAh lithium-ion battery (Model AB13) for power. You must fully charge the battery before you can use the PW50. A fully charged battery can last up to one week without needing to be recharged when the printer is in Standby mode. Use Intermec Model AB13 battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The Model AB13 battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not disassemble, heat above 100C
(212F), or incinerate. Dispose of used batteries promptly. Keep away from children. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 5 Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer Installing the Battery Make sure you fully charge the battery before you use your PW50. You can charge the battery before or after you install them into the PW50. To install the battery 1 Lay the PW50 upside down on a flat surface. 2 Insert the battery with the tab facing away from the front control panel. 3 Insert the edge of the battery under the lip of the PW50 and then push down until you hear the battery latch click. Charging the Batteries There are two ways to charge the PW50 battery:
Connect AC power to the printer and charge the battery while it is in the PW50. Charge the battery in the AC18 4-bay battery charger. 6 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer For information on charging your battery in the 4-bay battery charger, see the AC18 4-Bay Battery Charger Instructions
(P/N 943-128-xxx). It takes approximately 6 hours to charge the battery while it is installed in the PW50 printer. To charge the battery inside the PW50, you need:
an Intermec 12 VDC power supply (Model 073573 or Model AE19). an AC power cord. To charge the battery inside the PW50 1 Install the battery in the PW50. For help, see the previous section, Installing the Battery on page 6. 2 Connect the power supply to the DC power connector on the printer. 3 Connect one end of the power cord to the power supply, and then plug the other end into an AC outlet. Understanding the Battery LED The easiest way to tell the status of your battery is to look at the battery LED on the control panel of the PW50. Battery LED Status LED State Steady green Steady red Blinking red Off Status Battery is fully charged in the PW50 with an external power supply connected. Battery is charging in the PW50 with an external power supply connected. Battery is low. The battery is installed and working properly. There is no battery installed. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 7 Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer Extending Battery Life Here are some tips for extending the overall life of your battery:
Never expose the battery to direct sunlight or temperatures over 40C (104F). Only charge the battery inside the PW50 using a power supply or in the 4-bay battery charger (Model AC18). Here are some tips for extending the life of your battery between charges:
Press the Standby button to put the printer in Standby mode. Remove the battery from the printer if you are not going to use it for three or more days. Do not operate the PW50 in extremely cold temperatures. Using the PW50 in temperatures below freezing reduces the overall battery life. Remember that any rechargeable battery loses its ability to maintain a charge over time. You can only recharge it a finite number of times before you must replace it. Loading Media You can use roll or fanfold receipt media with the PW50 printer. The PW50 ships with a small amount of media loaded and a test page printed to verify that the printer works. For information on media specifications, see Specifications on page 32. 8 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer To load media 1 Press down on the blue media cover release button until the cover releases. 2 Insert a roll of media. Make sure you load the media clockwise so that it pulls off the core from the bottom of the printer. 3 Pull out approximately 8 cm (3 inches) of the media. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 9 Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer 4 Close the media cover and press down on the cover until it latches. The printer emits the hardware sound to tell you that the media door closed correctly. 5 Press the Feed button to advance the media. Printing a Testprint After you load media in the printer, you are ready to print a testprint. If you cannot get the testprint information to print, see Chapter 3, Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50. To print a testprint 1 Press and hold the Standby and Feed buttons until the PW50 beeps. 2 Release the buttons. 3 The PW50 prints a testprint. 10 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Inserting a Handheld Computer Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer The PW50 is designed for use with the CN3, CN3e, and CK61 mobile computers. To insert a handheld computer Slide the computer into the slot on the PW50 until the computer snaps into place. This illustration shows inserting a CN3. However, the PW50 is also designed for use with the CN3e and CK61 mobile computers. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 11 Chapter 1 Using the PW50 Workboard Printer Using the Card Reader Option You can order the PW50 with a card reader option. I need information about the card reader option. 12 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 2 Configuring the PW50 This chapter describes how to configure the PW50 and contains these sections:
Configuring the PW50 Establishing Communications With a Host Upgrading the Firmware Downloading Fonts and Graphics 13 Chapter 2 Configuring the PW50 Configuring the PW50 You can change the configuration settings of the PW50 printer by sending commands from your PC or remotely from the SmartSystems console. Understanding the Printer Modes The PW50 has seven modes to help you effectively interact with the printer: Ready, Paused, Error, Test, and Upgrade. Use the following sections to understand the different printer modes Understanding Ready Mode The printer is in Ready mode when the printer is on and ready to print. Understanding Pause Mode Use Pause mode to momentarily stop printing or to cancel a current print job. Use the Feed button to both pause and resume printing. To enter Pause mode Press the Feed button while the printer is printing. To resume printing Press the Feed button while the printer is paused. To cancel a print job 1 Press the Feed button to pause printing. 2 Press the Feed button again to cancel the print job. Understanding Error Mode The printer enters Error mode when it detects an error condition such as a low battery or a paper fault. Understanding Test Mode Use Test mode to verify printer settings, print test labels, restore factory default settings, or enter Dump mode for troubleshooting purposes. Two test modes are available: Test mode and Extended Test mode. 14 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Chapter 2 Configuring the PW50 Using Test Mode Test mode is a simple sequence of events which requires little user interaction. Extended Test mode requires more user interaction and lets you choose which actions you want the printer to perform. To enter Test mode 1 Make sure the printer is in Ready mode and is loaded with media. 2 Press and hold the Standby and Feed buttons until the PW50 beeps. 3 Release the buttons. The printer performs a test feed (sensor calibration), prints a series of test labels, and then enters Dump mode. While the printer is in Dump mode, it scans the communication ports. Any characters received on the communication ports are printed. 4 Press Feed to exit Dump mode. After you exit Dump mode, the printer returns to Ready mode. For more information on Dump mode, see Troubleshooting Communication Problems on page 27. Using Extended Test Mode Use Extended Test mode to run additional diagnostic tests, including printing specific test labels, entering Dump mode, and resetting to factory defaults. To enter Extended Test mode 1 Make sure that the printer is loaded with media. 2 Press the media cover release button to open the media cover. 3 Press the Standby button to turn the printer off. 4 Press and hold the Standby and Feed buttons until the PW50 beeps. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 15 Chapter 2 Configuring the PW50 5 Close the media cover. You are now in Extended Test mode. Press and hold the Feed button for at least 2 seconds to cycle through the Extended Test mode option. Press and release the Feed button select an Extended Test mode option. Options in Extended Test Mode Option Select Media Test Labels Dump Mode Description This option is similar to the process in Test mode, except that the printer performs a slow test feed in Extended Test mode. The slow test feed enables the printer to perform a slow sensor calibration, which can help resolve gap or mark detection problems. This option allows you to print test labels one at a time. Press the Feed button to print the next label. This option enters Dump mode. For more information on Dump mode, see Troubleshooting Communication Problems on page 27. Factory Default This option restores the factory default settings. Press the Setup and Exit Exit Feed button to select this option. This option exits Extended Test mode and puts the printer in Setup mode. This option exits Extended Test mode. Changing Configuration Settings There are several ways you can change the configuration settings of the printer. You can change the configuration settings:
from the host PC using PrintSet. from the host PC using the command line. from the SmartSystems Console. 16 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Chapter 2 Configuring the PW50 Changing Configuration Settings From PrintSet PrintSet Version 4.2 (or later) is a printer configuration tool that you can download from the Intermec web site. PrintSet can communicate with your printer through a serial cable or a network connection. It works on all PCs running Windows 98 (or later). PrintSet allows you to easily change all of the setup parameters. It also includes setup wizards to guide you through some common configuration tasks. Does PrintSet version 4.2 support the PW50? When will it be released?
Changing Configuration Settings Using the Command Line You can change configuration parameters by sending commands directly to the printer using your terminal program (HyperTerminal) and a serial or network connection. What ESC-P command do you send? Does ESC-P automatically send feedback to HyperTerminal?
For more information on how to change configuration settings, see the ESC-P Programmers Reference Manual (P/N 937-005-xxx), available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Changing Configuration Settings From SmartSystems Console You can use the SmartSystems Console to change configuration settings on your printer. The PW50 ships with the SmartSystems client loaded on it. The console is part of SmartSystems Foundation and is available from the Intermec web site. To download SmartSystems Foundation, go to www.intermec.com/products/
smrtsysfoundation/index.aspx. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 17 Chapter 2 Configuring the PW50 Establishing Communications With a Host The PW50 must establish communications with a host that will send the data for the printer to print. The PW50 provides four ways to communicate with a host:
Bluetooth radio communications USB communications Serial communications through a serial cable or directly to an Intermec computer inserted in the PW50 Setting Up Bluetooth Communications The PW50 contains a Bluetooth radio that allows wireless communications with a remote device from distances up to 100 meters (approximately 328 feet) depending on the Bluetooth range capabilities of the remote device, environmental conditions, and obstructions. For the Bluetooth-enabled devices to exchange data, both devices must establish a connection. Bluetooth software is always running in the background. The PW50 cannot initiate a Bluetooth connection. One of the devices, such as a CN3 mobile computer, must request a connection with the printer. The PW50 then accepts or rejects the connection. Use Intermec Settings on the mobile computer to enable the Bluetooth settings on the PW50. The PW50 can also connect to Bluetooth scanners such as the SF51 and the SR61. You can create the bar code labels you need to connect the printer to a Bluetooth scanner using EasySet software. If you are going to create the bar code labels using EasySet, you will need to know the Bluetooth Device Address and the PIN of the PW50. You can download EasySet at no charge from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Each PW50 equipped with a Bluetooth radio has a unique Bluetooth Device Address (BDA) loaded into its module when manufactured. You can find the BDA on the certification label located on the bottom of the printer. 18 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Chapter 2 Configuring the PW50 To set up Bluetooth communications with a mobile computer Follow the procedure to discover and connect to Bluetooth devices in your mobile computer users manual. Note: For maximum security, you need to configure a Bluetooth passcode for the PW50. The default passcode for the PW50 is 1234. To set up Bluetooth communications with a scanner 1 Download and install EasySet. 2 Create the following bar code labels using EasySet:
Administrator reset factory defaults Bluetooth parameters - security - not active Bluetooth parameters - connect/disconnect - compose BT address Bluetooth parameters - security - compose PIN:
3 Scan the bar code labels with the Bluetooth scanner. Understanding the Communications Indicator State Off Description The Bluetooth radio is off. The Bluetooth radio turns off when you connect a serial cable. Steady green The Bluetooth radio is on and the printer is not connected to a serial cable. Setting Up USB Communications a USB cable. Intermec InterDriver software. To set up USB communications with your PC, you need:
You can download the InterDriver software from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 19 Chapter 2 Configuring the PW50 Setting Up Serial Communications Use a serial cable (P/N 075497-001) to connect the PW50 to a PC, or insert a CN3, CN3e, or CK61 mobile computer. Before you can establish a serial connection, you need to make sure that the settings on the PC or mobile computer match the settings on the PW50. Serial Port Default Settings on the PW50 Parameter Baud rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Default Setting 115200 8 None 1 Hardware To connect the PW50 to a PC 1 Connect the 8-pin circular DIN connector to the serial port on the PW50. 2 Connect the other end of the serial cable to a serial port on the back of your PC or to a serial adapter on your mobile computer. Serial cable Serial port 20 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Upgrading the Firmware Chapter 2 Configuring the PW50 The latest firmware and software is always available for download from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. To download firmware updates 1 Go to the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 2 Click Support > Downloads. 3 In the Select a Product field, choose PW50 mobile printer. The latest available software displays on the page. 4 Download the latest firmware version to your computer. Make sure you choose the correct firmware upgrade for your printer. 5 Extract the .zip file to a folder on your computer. You use PrintSet to upgrade the printer firmware. Your printer should reboot after you finish upgrading the firmware. If it does not reboot, you need to cold boot the printer. For help, see Cold Booting the PW50 on page 28. To upgrade your printer firmware 1 Download the latest version of PrintSet from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 2 Select File > Add Printer to start the Add Printer Wizard which guides you through the process of adding your printer. 3 Select your printer under My Printers and then go to Printer >
Firmware Wizard. The Firmware Wizard guides you through the necessary steps to upgrade your firmware. To upgrade your printer using a serial connection 1 Make sure you have established a serial communications between your PC and the PW50. For help, see Setting Up Serial Communications on page 20. 2 Use ESC-P commands to send the upgrade file to the printer. For help with ESC-P commands, see the ESC-P Programmers Reference Manual (P/N 937-005-xxx) available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 21 Chapter 2 Configuring the PW50 Downloading Fonts and Graphics The easiest way to download fonts and graphics is to use the free Intermec printer application called PrintSet. You can download PrintSet from the downloads page for the PW50 printer on the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Follow the procedures in the PrintSet online help to download fonts and graphics. You can also use ESC/P commands to send fonts and graphics to the printer. For help with commands and information, see the ESC-P Programmers Reference Manual (P/N 937-005-xxx) available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 22 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 3 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50 This chapter contains information to help you solve problems you may encounter while using the PW50 and contains these sections:
Troubleshooting the PW50 Cold Booting the PW50 Cleaning the PW50 23 Chapter 3 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50 Troubleshooting the PW50 You may have printer operation, print quality, or printer communication problems at some time during the life of the PW50 printer. It is easy to fix most of the problems and you will find solutions in Troubleshooting Printer Problems and Finding Solutions on page 25. If you cannot find the answer to your problem, you may need to contact Product Support. Contacting Product Support Before you call Intermec Product Support, you may want to visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support. If you still need help after visiting Knowledge Central, you may need to call Product Support. To talk to an Intermec Product Support representative in the U.S.A. or Canada, call:
1-800-755-5505 Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, go to www.intermec.com and click Contact to find your local Intermec representative. Before you call Intermec Product Support, make sure you have the following information ready:
Printer serial number Firmware type and version Bluetooth, wireless, or serial port settings You can find all of the information listed above in the printer menu system or on a test print page. 24 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Understanding Error Messages Chapter 3 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50 Use the following tables to troubleshoot common errors. To receive error messages, you need to tunrn on the Allow Messages From Printer command. For help, see the ESC-P Programmers Reference Manual (P/N 937-005-xxx). PW50 Error Message Descriptions Error Message Lid_Open Paper_Out Voltage Description The media cover is open. Close the media cover and press down until it latches. If Lid_Open=Y, the printer detected an error condition and canceled any pending print jobs. The printer is out of media. Load a new roll of media. If Lid_Open=Y, the printer detected an error condition and canceled any pending print jobs. This message indicates the power status of the printer:
If Voltage=H, the printer is fully powered by either an external power supply or a fully charged battery. If Voltage=L, the printer has detected a low voltage condition. Connect the printer to external power, or insert a fully charged charged battery. Troubleshooting Printer Problems and Finding Solutions Use the following tables to troubleshoot some common problems you may encounter with the PW50 printer. Printer Problems and Possible Solutions Problem The printer does not turn on when you press Standby. The blue light
(Intermec Ready-to-
Work indicator) is blinking. Possible Solution Replace the battery with a charged battery. Connect external power to make sure the printer works correctly and to charge the battery. Make sure media is loaded and the media cover is closed. For help, see Loading Media on page 8. There is a printing error. The printer is paused. The printer is canceling a print job. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 25 Chapter 3 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50 Printer Problems and Possible Solutions (continued) Problem Printer keeps printing or feeding when it should stop. The printout is not in the desired position. The printer is not printing with a Bluetooth connection. When printing, the printer is skipping labels. Printout is faded or weak. The battery charge is not lasting as long as it should. The test pages do not print. Possible Solution Check media settings. Make sure the label gap sensor is clean. For help, see Cleaning the PW50 on page 28. Check for errors in the software application. Make sure the label gap sensor and platen roller are clean. For help, see Cleaning the PW50 on page 28. Re-establish a Bluetooth connection with the mobile computer or scanner. For help, see Setting Up Bluetooth Communications on page 18, or see your mobile computer users manual. Make sure the mobile computer can print to a known good printer. Print a Bluetooth test print page to make sure that the mobile printer discovered your printer. For help, see Printing a Testprint on page 10. Make sure the printer is in Ready mode. Perform a testfeed by pressing and hold the Standby and Feed buttons until the PW50 beeps. Make sure the label gap sensor is clean. For help, see Cleaning the PW50 on page 28. Modify the Set Media Sensitivity command or the Set Dark Adjust command. For help, see the ESC-P Programmers Reference Manual (P/N 937-005-xxx). Check to see if the printhead needs cleaning. For help, see Cleaning the PW50 on page 28. Check the battery date. If the battery is a few years old, the shortened life may be due to normal aging. Replace the battery. Make sure that the blue light is not blinking. If it is, make sure your printer has media and that the media cover is closed. Make sure that you can advance media by pressing the Feed button. 26 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Chapter 3 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50 Printer Problems and Possible Solutions (continued) Problem Print quality is poor. Possible Solution Clean the printhead. For help, see Cleaning the PW50 on page 28. Check the battery and charge or replace as necessary. For help, see Charging the Batteries on page 6. Check the quality of the media. Use only Intermec media to ensure superior print quality and product performance. Check that the printer is configured to the appropritae Set Media Sensitivity value for the media you are using. Troubleshooting Communication Problems Use Dump mode to verify that the printer is receiving data from the host correctly. Is this true for the PW50?
PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 27 Chapter 3 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50 Cold Booting the PW50 You rarely need to cold boot the PW50 printer, unless you are upgrading the firmware. If your printer occasionally locks up, you should cold boot it. A cold boot clears the working memory. Note: The Setup menu is not affected by a cold boot. Your printer retains all of your configuration settings after the printer powers back up. To reset the PW50 1 Disconnect the PW50 from power if externally powered. 2 Remove the battery from the PW50 for at least one second. 3 Insert the battery back into the PW50. 4 Reconnect external power if your PW50 is externally powered. Cleaning the PW50 To properly maintain your PW50, you should clean it at the recommended intervals. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to the printer, never insert any pointed or sharp objects into the printer. Use only the cleaning agents specified in this section. Intermec is not responsible for damage caused by any other cleaning materials used on this printer. Clean the printer with a cotton swab saturated with alcohol. 28 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Chapter 3 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50 Placeholder for illustration of PW50 parts to clean. PW50 Workboard Printer: Identifying the parts of the PW50 to clean regularly. Cleaning the PW50 Printer Printer Part Printhead Platen roller Paper sensors Tear bar Exterior Interior Cleaning Method Use 70% isopropyl alcohol on a cotton swab to clean the print elements from end to end. Rotate the platen roller and clean it thoroughly with 70%
isopropyl alcohol on a cotton swab. Clean thoroughly with 70%
isopropyl alcohol and a cotton swab. Clean thoroughly with 70%
isopropyl alcohol and a cotton swab. Clean with a water-dampened cloth. Brush or air blow. Make sure the paper sensor is free of dust. Cleaning Interval After every five rolls of media or more often if necessary. After every five rolls of media or more often if necessary. After every five rolls of media or more often if necessary. As needed. As needed. After every five rolls of media or more often if necessary. PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 29 Chapter 3 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the PW50 30 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide A Specifications 31 Appendix A Specifications Specifications Physical Dimensions Dimension Depth Height Width Weight Value Need this information. Need this information. Need this information. Need this information. Power Specifications Value Specification AC power adapter voltage 100 to 240V Printer voltage Operating power 100V to 240V and 50 Hz to 60 Hz Rechargeable 16.8 V 2200 mAh lithium-ion battery Temperature and Humidity Specifications Specification Operating temperature Storage temperature Charging temperature Relative humidity Sealing Value
-15C to 50C (5F to 122F)
-22C to 70C (-30F to 158F) 0C to 45C (32F to 113F) 0 to 95% non-condensing IP54 Memory Memory RAM Flash Value 16 MB 64 MB 32 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Appendix A Specifications Print Speed and Resolution Specification Print speed Resolution Print Technology Value 4 ips (100 mm/s) 203 dpi (8 dots/mm) Technology Printhead Maximum print width Description Direct thermal 108 mm (4.25 in) Media Specifications Media Core inside diameter, standard Core inside diameter, with adapter Maximum roll outside diameter Media width, label with liner/receipt Media length, label Media length, receipt Media caliper, label with liner/receipt Media caliper, tag (maximum) Gap length (centered on perforation) Value 19 mm (0.75 in) 10.2 mm (0.4 in) 67.3 mm (2.65 in) 111.5 mm (4.4 in) 25.4 mm (1.0 in) to 609.6 mm (24 in) Continuous 0.05 mm (0.002 in) to 0.165 mm (0.0065 in) 0.15 mm (0.006 in) 3.17 mm (0.125 in) to 12.7 mm (0.50 in) 6.35 mm (0.25 in) 12.7 mm (0.50 in) 12.7 mm (0.50 in) Notch length (centered on perforation) Notch width (centered on perforation) Black mark length (centered on perforation) 3.17 mm (0.125 in) to PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 33 Appendix A Specifications Receipt roll stock media is supplied as a continuous roll. Label, tag, and fanfold media use repeat indicators for non-continuous media. Gap, notch, and black marks are used as repeat indicators:
Gap: Label and fanfold media Notch: Tag media Black mark: Label, tag, and fanfold media Here are a few things to keep in mind when ordering media for the PW50 printer:
Black marks can only be sensed on the back side of the media. You can use higher caliper media in the printer, but print quality will be reduced. Receipt roll stock media has an end of roll indicator. The end of roll indicator is a red marking (on last 3 feet of roll) on the thermally sensitive side of the paper. External Fanfold Media Specifications Specification Stack height:
Page length:
Value 70 mm (2.75 in) 152 mm (6 in) to 305 mm (12 in) Note: A 6-inch page length is supplied in 12-inch long stacks (two 6-
inch stacks of equal height with the bottom page linked). Specialty media is required for unique customer environments, including printer operating temperature extremes. Intermec recommends that you test the media in your application. Supported Media The PW50 printer supports direct thermal label, tag, and receipt media. Both North American and European label media are supported in multiple label lengths. Receipt media is supported in both a top coated and an uncoated paper in continuous roll stock only. The default media sensitivity number is: 180. 34 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide Appendix A Specifications Use the following table as a guide when setting sensitivity numbers. Recommended Media Sensitivity, Constant, Factor, and Print Speed Max Print Speed Duratherm Lightning Plus 4 ips 4 ips Duratherm Lightning 2 ips Duratherm Lightning Duratherm Synthetic 4 ips 4 ips Duratherm II Label 4 ips Duratherm III Label 4 ips Duratherm Near IR Duratherm 5 mil Tag 2 ips 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 60 52 48 100 80 80 80 50 Sensitivity Constant Factor Description North American Label Media 720 470 450 430 180 180 180 150 North America Receipt Media 401 102 101 European Label Media 440 140 40 40 40 45 32 30 30 40 47 70 Thermal Eco Thermal Top Duratherm TC Duratherm NTC - 2 Duratherm NTC 2 ips 2 ips 2 ips 2 ips 4 ips PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide 35 Appendix A Specifications Accessories for the PW50 You can use these accessories (sold and ordered separately) with the PW50 printer. To order accessories, contact your local Intermec sales representative. AB13 Battery Use the lithium-ion 2200 mAh battery to provide power to the printer. AC18 4-Bay Battery Charger Use the AC18 to charge up to four batteries at a time. The battery charger is designed to sense when a battery is fully charged and not overcharge it, ensuring long and consistent battery life. PW50 Vehicle Dock (Model AV11) Use the vehicle dock to attach the PW50 to a truck. Power Supply (Model AE19) Provides power to the PW50 and the 4-bay battery charger (Model AC18). Power Supply (Model 073573) Provides power to the PW50 and the 4-bay battery charger (Model AC18). Serial Cable The serial adapter is an 8-pin DIN to DB9 connector that connects from the PW50 printer to your desktop PC. Handstrap Handstrap to conveniently carry your PW50 printer. Shoulder Strap Use the shoulder strap to easily carry the PW50 printer. The wide padded strap makes it comfortable to wear the printer for long periods of time. 36 PW50 Workboard Printer Users Guide IMPORTANT NOTE:
Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, please follow operation instruction as documented in this manual.
1 2 3 4 | Radio Info | Users Manual | 68.56 KiB |
Part No. 074821-001 Important BTS080 Information!
Contents For Users in the United States and Canada....................................................................... 2 For Users Outside of the United States and Canada............................................................. 3 Pour les utilisateurs en dehors du Canada et des Etat-unis.................................................... 5 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada und den Vereinigten Staaten................................................ 6 Per gli utenti al di fuori del Canada o degli Stati Uniti ......................................................... 6 Para Usuarios Fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos ...................................................... 7 Para Usurios Fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos ......................................................... 8 For Users in the United States and Canada Place this supplement in your manual. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that can cause undesired operation. Federal Communications Commission Compliance FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Operation Warning To comply with the FCCs RF exposure requirements and minimize health hazards:
The user shall not touch the antenna of this device when the device is in use. Caution Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Intermec could void the users authority to operate this equipment. Industry Canada Compliance This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. This device requires a radio license unless it is used totally inside a building. (The user must obtain this license.) Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Cet appareil exige une license radio moins dtre entirement install dans un btiment. (Lutilisateur doit obtenir cette license.) 2 For Users Outside of the United States and Canada The Intermec product you purchased transmits and receives data using a 2.4 GHz Spread Spectrum system. Programming and configuration information for the transceivers is also provided in the host device documentation. Please check the Intermec Web site for additional documentation at www.intermec.com. Hereby, Intermec Technologies Corporation declares that this Model BTS080 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC). This product has been assessed to the following standards:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) The original Declaration of Conformity is available on the Intermec Technologies Corporation Web site at www.intermec.com. This product transmits electromagnetic waves at 2.4 GHz frequency range. It has been tested and found compliant with CENELEC EN50360 and EN50361, 1999/519/EC, ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, U.S. (OET Guide 65), and Canadian (RSS 102) RF exposure regulations. The transmitter modules output power is 11.9 mW. The products using this module are intended for business and industrial environments. They should not be used in residential environments and by children. 0981 This product is marked with this logo and uses radio frequency bands that are not harmonized throughout the European Community. The following table indicates the areas of intended use of the equipment and any known restrictions. 3 Country of Intended Use Yes Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Malta The Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Other non-EU:
Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X License No Required Restrictions Details X Indoor use only Additional EMI/RFI Compliance This device meets the Class B limit requirements of CISPR 22. 4 Pour les utilisateurs en dehors du Canada et des Etat-unis Le produit Intermec que vous avez achet peut transmettre et recevoir des donnes laide dun systme dtalement du spectre de 2,4 GHz. Les informations de programmation et de configuration pour les metteurs-rcepteurs sont galement fournies dans la documentation de lappareil hte. Pour obtenir toute documentation supplmentaire, veuillez consulter le site Web dIntermec, ladresse www.intermec.com. Par la prsente, Intermec Technologies Corporation dclare que ce modle BTS080 est conforme aux exigences de base et autres exigences pertinentes de la Directive R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Ce produit a t valu par rapport aux normes suivantes :
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (comprenant lamendement 1-4, 11) La Dclaration de conformit originale est disponible sur le site Web dIntermec Technologies Corporation, ladresse www.intermec.com. Ce produit met des ondes lectromagntiques une plage de frquences de 2,4 GHz. Il a t valu et reconnu conforme aux rglements concernant lexposition la radiofrquence de CENELEC EN50360 et EN50361, de 1999/519/EC, de ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, des tats-Unis (OET Guide 65), et du Canada (RSS 102). La puissance de sortie du module metteur-rcepteur est de 11.9 mW. Les produits utilisant ce module sont destins des environnements commerciaux et industriels. Ils ne doivent pas tre utiliss dans des environnements rsidentiels et par des enfants. 0981 Ce produit est marqu de ce logo et il utilise des bandes de frquence radio qui ne sont pas harmonises sur le territoire de la Communaut europenne. Le tableau suivant rpertorie les zones dutilisation prvues pour lquipement et les restrictions connues. Pays dutilisation prvu Oui Licence requise Non Restrictions Dtails France X X Pour l'usage d'intrieur seulement. Conformit additionelle la norme EMI/RFI Cet appareil respecte les limites imposes pour la Classe B par le CISPR 22. 5 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada und den Vereinigten Staaten Das Intermec-Produkt, das Sie gekauft haben sendet und empfngt Daten mit Hilfe eines 2,4-GHz-
Spreizspektrumsystems. In der Dokumentation des Hostgertes finden Sie auerdem Informationen zum Programmieren und Konfiguriern der Sende-Empfangs-Gerte. Weitere Hinweise erhalten Sie auf der Intermec-Website unter www.intermec.com. Hiermit erklrt Intermec Technologies Corporation, dass das Modell BTS080 mit den wesentlichen Anforderungen und anderen sachdienlichen Vorschriften der R&TTE-Richtlinie (1999/5/EC) bereinstimmt. Dieses Produkt wurde gem der folgenden Normen bewertet:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (einschl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) Die Originalkonformittserklrung steht auf der Website der Intermec Technologies Corporation unter www.intermec.com zur Verfgung. Dieses Produkt bermittelt elektromagnetische Wellen in einem Frequenzbereich von 2,4 GHz. Es wurde getestet und in bereinstimmung mit CENELEC EN50360 und EN50361, 1999/519/EC, ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, U.S. (OET Anleitung 65), und kanadischen (RSS 102) RF-
Bestrahlungsvorschriften befunden. Die Ausgangsleistung des Sende-Empfangs-Moduls betrgt 11.9 mW. Die Produkte, die dieses Modul verwenden, sind fr geschftliche und industrielle Umgebungen gedacht. Sie sollten nicht in Wohngegenden und in der Nhe von Kindern verwendet werden. 0981 Das Produkt ist mit diesem Markenzeichen versehen und verwendet Radiofrequenzbreiten, die in der Europischen Gemeinschaft nicht berall aufeinander abgestimmt sind. Zustzliche Elektromagnetische Strung-bereinstimmung Dieses Gert entspricht den Grenzbestimmungen der Klasse B von CISPR 22. Per gli utenti al di fuori del Canada o degli Stati Uniti Il prodotto Intermec che avete acquistato trasmette e riceve i dati tramite un sistema a 2,4 GHz che utilizza la tecnologia DSSS (spettro esteso). La documentazione del dispositivo host fornisce inoltre le informazioni sulla programmazione e la configurazione dei transceiver. Per altre informazioni, consultate il sito Web Intermec allindirizzo www.intermec.com. Con la presente Intermec Technologies Corporation dichiara che questo Modello BTS080 conforme ai requisiti essenziali e alle altre clausole importanti della direttiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Questo prodotto stato valutato in base ai seguenti standard:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (incluso Amdt. 1-4, 11) 6 La dichiarazione di conformit originale disponibile presso il sito Web di Intermec Technologies Corporation a www.intermec.com. Questo prodotto trasmette onde elettromagnetiche con una frequenza intorno ai 2,4 GHz. Dai collaudi ai quali stato sottoposto risultato conforme alle norme CENELEC EN50360 e EN50361, 1999/519/EC, ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, statunitensi (OET Guide 65), e a quelle canadesi (RSS 102) relative allesposizione alle radiofrequenze. La potenza di uscita del modulo trasmittente di 11.9 mW. I prodotti che utilizzano questo modulo sono destinati ad ambienti industriali e commerciali e non debbono essere utilizzati in ambienti residenziali e dai bambini. 0981 Questo prodotto reca questo marchio ed utilizza bande di radiofrequnza che non sono armonizzate nellambito della Comunit Europea. Ulteriore conformit con EMI/RFI Questo dispositivo conforme ai limiti stabiliti in CISPR 22 per la Classe B. Para Usuarios Fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos Este producto de Intermec transmite y recibe datos por medio de un sistema de espectro ensanchado de 2,4 GHz. Para obtener informacin sobre la configuracin y programacin del transceptor, consulte la documentacin provista con el dispositivo host. Para obtener documentacin adicional, visite el sitio web de Intermec: www.intermec.com. Por la presente, Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que el Modelo BTS080 cumple con los requisitos esenciales de acuerdo con la directiva (1999/5/EC) de R&TTE. Este producto ha sido evaluado de acuerdo con los siguientes estndares o normas:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (incl. Enmienda 1-4, 11) La Declaracin de Conformidad original est disponible en el sitio web de Intermec Technologies Corporation: www.intermec.com. Este producto transmite ondas electromagnticas de radio en la gama de frecuencias de 2,4 GHz. Ha sido probado y se ha determinado que cumple con las reglamentaciones del CENELEC EN50360 y EN50361, del 1999/519/EC, del ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, de los EE.UU. (OET Guide 65), y del Canad (RSS 102), referentes a la exposicin de RF. La potencia de salida del mdulo transmisor es de 11.9 mW. Los productos que usan este mdulo estn destinados para uso en ambientes comerciales e industriales. No deben ser usados en ambientes residenciales o en la proximidad de nios. 0981 Este producto est marcado con este logotipo y usa bandas de frecuencia de radio que no han sido armonizadas a lo largo de la Unin Europea. Conformidad adicional con EMI/RFI Este dispositivo cumple con los lmites requeridos para la Clase B de CISPR 22. 7 Para Usurios Fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos O produto Intermec que voc comprou transmite e recebe dados usando um sistema Espectro de Difuso de 2,4 GHz. As informaes sobre programao e configurao dos transceptores tambm so fornecidas na documentao do dispositivo hospedeiro. Consulte tambm o site da Intermec na web, no endereo www.intermec.com, para documentao complementar. Por este documento, a Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que o Modelo BTS080 atende aos requisitos essenciais e outras condies relevantes da Diretiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Esse produto foi avaliado em relao aos seguintes padres:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (includa Amdt. 1-4, 11) A Declarao de Conformidade original est disponvel no site da web da Intermec Technologies Corporation no endereo www.intermec.com. Este produto transmite ondas eletromagnticas na faixa de freqncia de 2,4 GHz. Ele foi testado e aprovado quanto sua conformidade com os regulamentos de exposio RF do CENELEC EN50360 e EN50361, do 1999/519/EC, do ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, dos EUA (OET Guide 65), e do Canad (RSS 102). A potncia de sada do mdulo transmissor de 11.9 mW. Os produtos que usam este mdulo so destinados aos ambientes comerciais e industriais. Eles no devem ser utilizados em ambientes residenciais e por crianas. 0981 Este produto identificado por esta logomarca e utiliza bandas de freqncia de rdio que no esto harmonizadas na Comunidade Europia. Conformidades EMI/RFI Adicionais Este produto atende aos requisitos de limite Classe B do CISPR22. 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com 2004 Intermec Technologies Corp. All Rights Reserved Important BTS080 Information!
*074821-001*
P/N 074821-001
1 2 3 4 | User Manual | Users Manual | 804.37 KiB | December 03 2008 |
Instructions IP4 Portable RFID Reader Contents Introducing the IP4 Portable RFID Reader . 3 What You Get . 3 Using the IP4 . 3 Charging and Installing the Battery . 3 Attaching Your IP4 to a 700 Color. 5
(Optional) Configuring Your IP4 as a Keyboard Wedge . 6 Reading an RFID Tag . 8 Understanding the IP4 LEDs . 9 Specifications . 10 ii IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions IP4 Portable RFID Reader Introducing the IP4 Portable RFID Reader The IP4 Portable RFID Reader is an accessory handle for the 700 Series Color mobile computers. Together, the IP4 and 700 Color provide a high-performance mobile RFID solution that allows you to bring the read/write device to the tagged product rather than moving tagged products past a fixed reader. What You Get Battery (Model AB12) Product documentation Using the IP4 To use the IP4, you need to perform these steps:
1 Charge and install the battery. 2 Attach your IP4 to a 700 Color. 3 (Optional) Configure your IP4 as a keyboard wedge. 4 Read an RFID tag. These instructions describe each step. Charging and Installing the Battery To charge the IP4 battery, you need the Dual Pack Battery Charger (Model AC12). To charge the IP4 battery Insert the battery into a slot on the AC12 battery charger. A fully discharged battery charges in less than 4 hours. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 3 To install the battery 1 Insert the battery tab on the top of the battery into the IP4. Battery tab 2 Firmly press the bottom of the battery onto the IP4 until the battery snaps into place. To remove the battery Push the battery release latch on the bottom of the IP4. Battery release latch 4 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions Attaching Your IP4 to a 700 Color Your IP4 uses Infrared Data Association (IrDA) to communicate with the 700 Color. The lightpipe in the IP4 helps communicate the IrDA signal between the 700 Color and your IP4. Lightpipe Note: Do not remove the lightpipe from the IP4. To attach your IP4 to a 700 Color 1 Slide the 700 Color into the IP4 until it clicks into place. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 5 2 Secure the retaining screws, making sure that they are inserted straight into the 700 Color. To remove your IP4 from a 700 Color 1 Remove the two retaining screws. 2 Hold the 700 Color at the display. 3 While lifting the 700 Color up (away from the IP4), pull the 700 Color forward and out of the IP4.
(Optional) Configuring Your IP4 as a Keyboard Wedge You can configure your IP4 as a keyboard wedge to allow the 700 Color to receive data from your IP4 as it would from a keyboard. To use your IP4 as a keyboard wedge, the 700 Color and your IP4 must meet these requirements:
The 700 Color must have at least 64MB of flash ROM. The fifth character in the configuration number (CN) found on the back of the 700 Color must not be a 4 or 5. For example:
751B6xxxx meets this requirement. 760A4xxxx does not meet this requirement. 6 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions The 700 Color must be running one of these operating systems (OS):
4.95.1 or later Prem (Premium) 4.96.4 or later GSM Phone If the fourth character in the configuration number (CN) of your IP4 is an A:
The 700 Color must be running IVA 4.03.35.1043 or later. Your IP4 must be running firmware version 5.19 or later. If the fourth character in the configuration number (CN) of your IP4 is an B:
The 700 Color must be running IVA 4.03.35.1050 or later. Your IP4 must be running firmware version 7.16 or later. Note: Use Intermec Settings to find the OS and IVA versions of the 700 Color. For help, see the users manual for the 700 Color. To configure your IP4 as a keyboard wedge 1 Fully charge your IP4 battery and attach your IP4 to a 700 Color. 2 On the 700 Color, start Intermec Settings. 3 Select RFID > Reader 1, and select Enable Reader. 4 Under Reader 1, select Reader Module > Tag Type, and select the type of RFID tag you are using. 5 From the main Intermec Settings menu, select Device Settings > Keypad > Scan Button Remapping > Handle Trigger, and select RFID. 6 Save your settings. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 7 To test the keyboard wedge 1 Start Microsoft Pocket Word. 2 Read an RFID tag. For help, see the next section. The RFID tag information appears in Pocket Word. Reading an RFID Tag You can scan at least six RFID tags per second with the IP4. Note: Continuously reading tags with the IP4 may cause the IP4 to overheat. If the IP4 temperature rises above the maximum operating temperature, the IP4 will stop reading tags. If this occurs, let the IP4 cool down until its temperature is within the operating temperature range. RF Exposure regulations limit exposure to radio frequency (RF) radiation. To comply with these regulations, operators of this device must maintain a distance of at least 20 cm (8 in) from the cover on the antenna assembly. (The cover on the antenna is the dome-shaped surface.) While the device is on, the operators body and parts of the body such as eyes, hands, or head, must be 20 cm (8 in) or farther from the cover of the antenna assembly. Avertissement: Les rglementations sur les expositions RF limitent l'exposition aux rayonnements RF. Pour se conformer ces rglementations, les oprateurs de ce dispositif doivent maintenir une distance minimale de 20 cm du couvercle de l'antenne. (Le couvercle de l'antenne est la surface bombe.) Lorsque l'appareil est sous tension, le corps et les parties du corps
(yeux, mains, tte) de l'oprateur doivent tre au moins 20 cm du couvercle de l'antenne. To read an RFID tag 1 Position the front of the IP4 within 91 cm (3 ft) of an RFID tag. 2 Pull the trigger. 8 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions Understanding the IP4 LEDs Your IP4 uses LEDs to indicate the status of certain operations. LEDs IP4 LEDs: The IP4 LEDs are located on the back of the IP4. IP4 LED Descriptions Icon LED Description Power (PWR) This LED is green when +5 power is on and the IP4 is ready to read tags. This LED is green when data Host Communications
(HOST COMM) communication with the host is active. RF Power On (RF ON) This LED is green when RF power is Tag Communications
(TAG COMM) Battery
(BATT) on. This LED turns green after the IP4 successfully reads an RFID tag. This LED indicates the status of the battery:
Red: The battery is low (less than 20% capacity). Green: The battery is fully charged
(more than 80% capacity). Orange: The battery is charged
(from 20% to 80% capacity). IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 9 Specifications This section contains specifications for the IP4. Environmental Specifications Specification Value Operating temperature 0C to 50C (32F to 122F) Storage temperature Relative humidity
-30C to 70C (-22F to 158F) 5 to 95% non-condensing 869 MHz Frequency Specification Value Source type Frequency band EIRP/ERP Output power 1 W maximum Modulation Data Rate Single Channel 869.525 MHz 0.5 watt ERP Minimum = 26.0 dBm Typical = 26.5 dBm Maximum = 27.0 dBm 80%
N/A 915 MHz Frequency Specification Value Source type Frequency band EIRP/ERP Output power 1 W maximum Modulation Data Rate Frequency hopper 902-928 MHz 1 watt EIRP Minimum = 28.5 dBm Typical = 29.5 dBm Maximum = 30.0 dBm 90%
38 to 44 Kbps 10 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions Performance Specification Value RFID tag identification rate At least six tags per second with one to ten tags in the RF field, located at half the maximum reading distances from the IP4 front panel. RFID tag read distance 91 cm (3 ft) RFID tag data exchange rates Read a tag containing 8 bytes of data within 50 ms. Perform a verified write to tag at an average rate of 75 ms per byte per tag. Firmware Architecture Specification Description Firmware Communicates in Basic Reader Interface
(BRI) mode. Protocol/Compatibility ANSI NCITS 256.2000 for API, part 2, part 3-1 Reader Configuration Access Summary Control Mechanism Responsible Party Factory or Intermec Field Technician Remote or on-site field technician Customer System Administrator Hardware key or configuration tag Intermec-only password Configuration file Function Change Country Code Download updated firmware Setup, system configuration not secured at higher level, such as change battery or wake up default IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 11 Patent Information Product is covered by one or more of the following patents:
5,673,037; 5,729,697; 5,777,561; 5,828,318; 5,850,187;
5,912,632; 5,942,987; 5,995,019; 6,032,127; 6,121,878;
6,172,596; 6,286,762; 6,288,629; 6,422,476; 6,429,775;
6,525,648; 6,529,880; 6,608,551; 6,639,509; 6,812,841;
6,812,852; 6,919,793. Patent Application 2002-0046173. There may be other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2007 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions
*943-002-004*
P/N 943-002-004
1 2 3 4 | User Manual 1 of 6 | Users Manual | 2.45 MiB | May 09 2007 |
User's Manual CN3 Mobile Computer User's Manual CN3 Mobile Computer Intermec Technologies Corporation Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Ave.W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and ser-
vice Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2006-2007 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar, dcBrowser, Durath-
erm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), Intellitag, Intellitag Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower, Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan, Smart Mobile Computing, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Vista Powered are either trademarks or registered trade-
marks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. There are U.S. and foreign patents as well as U.S. and foreign patent applications pending. Wi-Fi is a registered certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(www.openssl.org). This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (EAY@cryptsoft.com). Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. miniSD is a trademark of the SD Card Association. The SD logo is a trademark. SiRF and the SiRF logo are registered trademarks of SiRF Technology, Inc. SiRFstarIII is a trademark of SiRF Technology, Inc. ii CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Document Change Record This page records changes to this document. The document was originally released as Version -001. Version Number 002 003 Date 01/2007 04/2007 Description of Change Added information about the InstallSelect application, the clean boot method, the color camera, and CDMA radios. Added information about GPS on the CN3. Added information about using the FTP server. Created an appendix for specifications and accessories information. launaM sresU retupmoC eliboM 3NC iii iv CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Contents Before You Begin . xi Safety Information . xi Global Services and Support . xi Who Should Read This Manual . xii Related Documents . xii Patent Information . xiii 1 Using the Computer. 1 Introducing the CN3 Mobile Computer . 2 Front View Rear View
. 2
. 3 Features . 4 Learning Software Build Versions . 4 Resetting Your Computer . 5 Preferred Reset Method . 5 Secondary Reset Method . 5 Clean Boot Process . 5 Scanning Bar Codes. 6 Scanning with the Area Imager . 6 Improving the Performance of the Area Imager . 7 Reading Distances . 8 Using the Batteries. 9 Charging the Battery . 9 Maximizing Battery Life . 10 Removing and Installing the Battery. 10 Checking the Battery Status . 11 Understanding the Low Battery Warnings . 12 Adjusting the Beeper . 12 Using the Color Camera . 14 Using the Intermec Settings Applet . 15 Using the Keypad . 16 QWERTY Keypad . 16 Numeric Keypad . 16 Using the Color-Coded Keys . 17 Capitalizing Characters. 17 Entering Characters on the QWERTY Keypad. 17 Entering Characters on the Numeric Keypad . 18 Using the Power Switch . 19 Coming Out of the Idle Mode . 19 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual v Contents Resuming Activity after an Unattended Mode. 19 Using the Screen . 20 Software Tools. 21 SmartSystems Foundation Console (www.intermec.com/SmartSystems) . 21 SmartSystems Platform Bundles (SSPB) . 21 Intermec Resource Kits (www.intermec.com/IDL) . 21 Using the Speakers. 21 Front Speaker . 22 Rear Speaker. 22 Adjusting the Volume. 22 Using the Status LEDs. 23 Using the Storage Card . 24 Setting Vibrate Mode . 25 Setting Up GPS on Your CN3 . 27 Using the GPSID Installed on the CN3 . 27 Learning About Additional GPS Options for the CN3. 28 2 Windows Mobile. 29 Software Builds . 30 Where to Find Information . 30 Basic Usage . 30 Today Screen . 30 Programs . 31 Navigation Bar and Command Bar. 32 Pop-up Menus . 32 Notifications. 32 Entering Information . 33 Typing With the Onscreen Keyboard . 34 Using Block Recognizer. 35 Using Letter Recognizer . 35 Using Transcriber . 35 Selecting Typed Text. 36 Writing on the Screen. 36 Selecting the Writing. 36 Converting Writing to Text. 37 Drawing on the Screen . 38 Creating a Drawing . 38 Selecting a Drawing. 38 Recording a Message. 39 Using My Text . 40 Finding and Organizing Information . 40 Customizing Your Computer . 41 Adjusting Settings . 41 vi CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Adding or Removing Programs . 41 Microsoft ActiveSync. 44 Microsoft Outlook Mobile . 45 Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings. 46 Synchronizing Calendar. 46 Why Use Categories in the Calendar? . 46 What Is an All Day Event?. 47 What Is a Recurrence Pattern?. 48 Viewing Appointments . 48 Creating or Changing an Appointment . 48 Creating an All-Day Event . 49 Setting a Reminder for an Appointment . 50 Adding a Note to an Appointment . 50 Making an Appointment Recurring. 51 Assigning an Appointment to a Category. 51 Sending a Meeting Request . 52 Finding an Appointment . 53 Deleting an Appointment . 53 Changing Calendar Options . 54 Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues . 54 Creating a Contact . 55 Synchronizing Contacts. 55 Viewing Contacts . 56 Changing a Contact . 57 Adding a Note to a Contact. 57 Assigning a Contact to a Category . 57 Copying a Contact . 58 Sending a Message to a Contact. 58 Finding a Contact . 58 Deleting a Contact . 59 Changing Contacts Options . 59 Tasks: Keeping a To Do List . 59 Creating a Task . 60 Synchronizing Tasks . 60 Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas . 61 Creating a Note. 61 Synchronizing Notes . 62 Messaging: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages. 62 Synchronizing E-mail Messages . 63 Managing E-mail Messages and Folders. 63 Connecting to a Mail Server . 64 Composing and Sending Messages . 65 Companion Programs . 66 Word Mobile . 66 Creating a Document . 66 Typing Mode . 67 Writing Mode . 68 Synchronizing Word Mobile Documents . 68 Excel Mobile. 69 Creating a Workbook . 69 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual vii Contents Tips for Working in Excel Mobile. 69 PowerPoint Mobile. 70 Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile . 71 Internet Explorer Mobile . 72 Favorite Links. 72 Mobile Favorites. 72 Using Internet Explorer Mobile . 74 Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels . 74 Browsing the Internet . 74 3 Configuring the Computer. 75 Developing Applications for the Computer . 76 Packaging Applications for the Computer . 76 Installing Applications on the Computer . 77 Using Microsoft ActiveSync . 77 Using the FTP Server . 78 Using a Storage Card . 78 Using the SmartSystems Console . 79 Using Wavelink Avalanche . 79 Using InstallSelect . 80 Using the InstallSelect Application . 80 Understanding Software Feature Descriptions . 81 Launching Your Application Automatically . 83 RunAutoRun . 83 AutoExec . 84 AutoRun. 85 AutoCopy. 86 AutoReg . 86 AutoCab. 87 Customizing How Applications Load on the Computer . 88 Configuring Parameters . 89 Configuring the Computer With Intermec Settings . 89 Synchronizing the Computer System Time with a Time Server . 89 Configuring the Computer through the Network. 90 Configuring the Computer in a TCP/IP Direct Connect Network . 90 Configuring the Computer in a UDP Plus Network . 91 Reprogramming the CN3 Keypad . 92 Configuring the Color Camera . 92 Configuring the SF51 Cordless Scanner . 94 Setting the Imager . 94 Enabling Bluetooth. 95 Creating an SF51 Connection Label. 95 Viewing SF51 Scanner Information from Your Computer . 96 viii CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Using Configuration Parameters . 97 4 Maintaining the Computer . 99 Upgrading the Operating System on your Computer . 100 Using a Storage Card to Upgrade the Computer . 101 Upgrading Both Operating System and SSPB Files . 101 Upgrading the SSPB Files . 102 Using the SmartSystems Console to Upgrade the Computer . 102 Troubleshooting Your Computer . 103 Cleaning the Scanner and Camera Windows and Screen . 106 5 Network Support . 109 Wireless Network Support. 110 Personal Area Networks. 110 Configuring with the Wireless Manager . 110 Enabling Bluetooth After a Clean Boot. 111 Using the Wireless Printing Applet. 116 Connecting to Bluetooth Audio Devices. 119 Searching for Bluetooth Headsets . 119 Audio Device Icons . 120 Connecting to a Bluetooth Headset. 121 Configuring Bluetooth Using Intermec Settings . 122 Connecting with Bluetooth . 122 Local Area Networks (LANs). 126 Using the CDMA Radio Phone Application . 127 Using the Wireless Manager to Turn on the Phone . 127 Activating the Phone . 128 Using the CDMA Phone . 130 Using the GSM/EDGE Radio Phone Application . 135 Using the Wireless Manager to Turn on the Phone . 135 Activating the Phone . 136 Using the GSM/EDGE Phone . 136 Remote Access (Modems) . 139 Connecting to an Internet Service Provider . 140 Connecting to Work. 143 Creating a VPN Server Connection to Work . 145 Ending a Connection . 147 iConnect . 147 FTP Server . 147 Network Interfaces . 148 No Networking . 148 Wireless Communications. 148 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual ix Contents Ping Test . 149 ISpyWiFi . 150 Starting the Utility . 150 Pinging . 154 Logging Supplicants . 155 Configuring Security . 156 Choosing Between Microsoft and Funk Security . 156 Configuring Funk Security . 156 Configuring Microsoft Security . 175 Configuring Preferred Networks . 177 Loading Certificates . 182 Wireless Network . 182 SmartSystems Foundation . 185 A Specifications . 187 Physical and Environmental Specifications . 188 Accessories for the Computer. 190 I Index . 191 x CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Before You Begin Before You Begin Safety Information This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information. Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions. This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this manual.. A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. Global Services and Support Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Service & Support. The Intermec Global Sales & Service page appears. From the Service & Support menu, move your pointer over Support, and then click Warranty. Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided as is with all faults. All warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals (in PDF). To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual xi Before You Begin Telephone Support These services are available from Intermec Technologies Corporation. In the U.S.A. and Canada, call 1-800-755-5505 and choose this option 1 and then choose 2 Description Place an order. Ask about an existing order. Service Order Intermec products Order Intermec media Order printer labels and ribbons. 1 and then choose 1 Order spare parts Technical Support 1 or 2 and then choose 4 2 and then choose 2 Order spare parts Talk to technical support about your Intermec product. Get a return authorization number for authorized service center repair. Request an on-site repair technician. Ask about an existing contract. Renew a contract. Inquire about repair billing or other service invoicing questions. 2 and then choose 1 1 or 2 and then choose 3 Service Service contracts Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. Click Contact from the Intermec web site to search for your representative. Who Should Read This Manual Related Documents This manual is written for the person who is responsible for installing, configuring, and maintaining the CN3 Mobile Computer. This document provides you with information about the features of the CN3, and how to install, configure, operate, maintain, and troubleshoot it. Before you work with the CN3, you should be familiar with your network and general networking terms, such as IP address. This table contains a list of related Intermec documents and part numbers. Document Title CN3 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual TE 2000 Terminal Emulation Programmers Guide Part Number 962-054-115 073529 977-055-008 The Intermec web site at www.intermec.com contains our documents (as PDF files) that you can download for free. xii CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Patent Information Before You Begin To download documents 1 Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 2 Click Service & Support > Manuals. 3 In the Select a Product field, choose the product whose documentation you want to download. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. 4882476; 4894523; 4953113; 4961043; 4970379; 4988852; 5019699;
5021642; 5038024; 5081343; 5095197; 5144119; 5144121; 5182441;
5187355; 5187356; 5195183; 5216233; 5216550; 5195183; 5195183;
5218191; 5227614; 5233172; 5241488; 5243602; 5258606; 5278487;
5288985; 5308966; 5322991; 5331136; 5331580; 5342210; 5349678;
5359185; 5371858; 5373478; 5389770; 5397885; 5410141; 5414251;
5416463; 5442167; 5464972; 5468947; 5468950; 5477044; 5486689;
5488575; 5500516; 5502297; 5504367; 5508599; 5514858; 5530619;
5534684; 5536924; 5539191; 5541419; 5548108; 5550362; 5550364;
5565669; 5567925; 5568645; 5572007; 5576529; 5592512; 5594230;
5598007; 5608578; 5616909; 5619027; 5627360; 5640001; 5657317;
5659431; 5671436; 5672860; 5684290; 5719678; 5729003; 5742041;
5761219; 5764798; 5777308; 5777309; 5777310; 5786583; 5793604;
5798509; 5798513; 5804805; 5805807; 5811776; 5811777; 5818027;
5821523; 5828052; 5831819; 5834753; 5834749; 5837987; 5841121;
5842070; 5844222; 5854478; 5862267; 5869840; 5873070; 5877486;
5878395; 5883492; 5883493; 5886338; 5889386; 5892971; 5895906;
5898162; 5902987; 5902988; 5912452; 5923022; 5936224; 5949056;
5969321; 5969326; 5969328; 5979768; 5986435; 5987192; 5987499;
5992750; 6003775; 6012640; 6016960; 6018597; 6024289; 6034379;
6036093; 6039252; 6064763; 6075340; 6095422; 6097839; 6102289;
6102295; 6109528; 6119941; 6128414; 6138915; 6149061; 6149063;
6152370; 6155490; 6158661; 6164542; 6164545; 6173893; 6195053;
6234393; 6234395; 6244512; 6249008; 6328214; 6330975; 6345765;
6356949; 6367699; 6375075; 6375076; 6375344; 6431451; 6435411;
6484944; 6488209; 6497368; 6532152; 6538413; 6539422; 6621942;
6641046; 6681994; 6687403; 6688523; 6732930 Docking Station/Device 5052943; 5195183; 5317691; 5331580; 5544010; 5644471 There may be other U.S. and foreign patents pending. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual xiii Before You Begin xiv CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual
1 2 3 4 | User Manual 2 of 6 | Users Manual | 1.73 MiB | May 09 2007 |
1Using the Computer This chapter introduces the CN3 Mobile Computer, developed by Intermec to enhance wireless connectivity needs and contains hardware and software configuration information to assist you in making the most out of your CN3. Note: Desktop icons and applet icons are shown to the left. Any place that Start is mentioned, tap the following Windows icon in the top, left corner of your CN3 desktop. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 1 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Introducing the CN3 Mobile Computer The Intermec CN3 Mobile Computer is a small, ergonomically designed mobile computer built on the Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0 operating system. It is lightweight, easy-to-use, and runs most software developed for the Windows Mobile platform, including stand-alone, client-server, and browser-based applications. Front View Notification LED Front Speaker Scan LED and Intermec Ready-to-Work Indicator Battery Status LED 2 remappable buttons 2 remappable buttons Power switch Note that the QWERTY keypad is on the left and the numeric keypad is on the right. 2 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer Rear View Rear Speaker Color camera and flash Scanner Remappable scan buttons Stylus in holder Connector Microphone Battery Note that the scanner and the color camera cannot be on the same CN3. With miniSD/SIM card door open CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 3 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Features The CN3 is available with the following:
802.11b/g or WLAN radio Bluetooth 128MB RAM QWERTY or numeric keypad Imaging Options:
EA11 Standard Area Imager EA11 High-Density (HD) Area Imager Color Camera Wireless Wide Area Network Options:
GSM/GPRS/EDGE CDMA/1xRTT/EV-DO Use this manual to understand how to use the features and options available on the CN3. CN3s with an IEEE 802.11b/g radio installed are Wi-Fi certified for interoperability with other 802.11b/g wireless LAN devices. Learning Software Build Versions To check to see if your CN3 has the latest SSPB or operating system build, select Start > Internet Explorer > the Intermec logo, then note the information beneath the CN3 Version Information title. 4 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer Resetting Your Computer When the CN3 completely stops responding, an application is locked up and does not respond, when you upgrade the firmware, or when you reflash the CN3, it may be necessary to perform a reset. Preferred Reset Method The recommended method for recovering the CN3 is to press and hold the power switch on the front of the CN3 for about 10 seconds. This performs a graceful system shutdown and no data is lost in the process. Secondary Reset Method If performing the preferred reset method does not restore system operation, it may be necessary to press the reset button inside the battery compartment of the CN3. This method does not guarantee that cached disk data will be saved, so transactional data may be lost during the reset. All other data is preserved. To press the reset button 1 Press the power switch to suspend the CN3. 2 Remove the battery pack from the back of the CN3. 3 With a stylus, press the reset button in the battery cavity in the back. 4 Press and hold the power switch as you put the battery back in the CN3. Reset button Clean Boot Process Do not use force or a sharp object when pressing the reset button. You may damage the reset button. If performing either reset method fails to restore system operation, it may be necessary to perform a clean-boot. This is a boot method which formats the object store to clean data and registry information from the CN3 system and restores them to their factory-default state. Note: This will erase the memory in the CN3, including all applications and data files found in the object store (user store). See Packaging Applications for the Computer on page 76 for more information. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 5 Chapter 1 Using the Computer To perform a clean-boot 1 Press the power switch to suspend the CN3. 2 Remove the battery pack from the back of the CN3. 3 With a stylus, press the reset button in the battery cavity in the back. 4 Press and hold the power switch as you put the battery back in the CN3. 5 Continue to hold the power switch until a Warning message appears on the display, release the power switch, then read the message. 6 To continue with the clean-boot, press either right side button. To cancel the clean-boot, press either left side button. Scanning Bar Codes Use the area imager to scan and enter bar code data. The CN3 supports reading 1D and 2D images. These bar code symbologies are enabled by default on the CN3: Code 39, Code 128, UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-8, EAN-13, and Datamatrix. If you are using bar code labels that are encoded in a different symbology, you need to enable the symbology on the computer. Use the Intermec Settings applet to enable and disable symbologies. See the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual (P/N 073529) available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Scanning with the Area Imager The CN3 has an area imager that can scan 1D and 2D bar code symbologies. It also supports omni-directional (360) scanning where you can position the CN3 in any orientation to scan a bar code label. Using the 2D imager is like taking a picture with a digital camera. Scan button To use the area imager 1 Press the power switch to turn on the CN3, point the scanner window a few inches from the bar code label, and hold steady. 2 Press the Scan button and center the red aiming beam over the bar code label. The aiming beam is smaller when the imager is closer to the bar code and larger when it is further away. 6 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer When a bar code label is successfully read, a high beep is emitted and the Good Scan LED lights briefly. Release the Scan button. Good Scan LED Improving the Performance of the Area Imager If you have problems scanning a bar code with the 2D imager, try following some of these tips to improve the performance of your imager:
Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon to access the applet. Tap (+) to expand Data Collection > Internal Scanner > Imager Settings > Predefined Modes, then select one of the following:
Select this option:
1D 1D and 2D Standard 1D and 2D Bright Environment 1D and 2D Reflective Surface Select Custom to access all standard imager settings such as Lighting Goal or Lighting Mode. More information about these settings, commands, and parameters are found in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. If you are scanning:
only 1D labels all other cases in high ambient light (like outdoors in sunshine) glossy labels Keep your hand as steady as possible while scanning a label. Position the imager as close to the bar code as possible while still being able to capture the entire bar code. Enable only the bar codes that you need to use every day. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 7 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Reading Distances Typical reading distances are done in an office environment using office lights (4 lux). Minimum distances are measured in the dark (0 lux). Both reading distances are provided in respective scan engine integration guides. Contact your Intermec representative for more information. The minimum standard reading distances for CN3s built with integrated scan engines are shown below. When correctly mounted, an exit window
(like the one the CN3 has) reduces reading distances by about 4%. EA11 Standard Minimum Reading Distances Symbology Code 39 UPC/EAN Datamatrix PDF417 Density 0.125 mm/ 5 mil 0.20 mm/ 8 mil 0.25 mm/ 10 mil 0.50 mm/ 20 mil 0.33 mm/ 13 mil 0.191 mm/ 7.5mil 0.254 mm/ 10 mil 0.381 mm/ 15 mil 0.168 mm/ 6.6 mil 0.254 mm/ 10 mil 0.381 mm/ 15 mil Minimum Distance 7.26 cm/ 2.86"
3.96 cm/ 1.56"
3.45 cm/ 1.36"
4.98 cm/ 1.96"
4.98 cm/ 1.96"
3.71 cm/ 2.46"
5.98 cm/ 1.96"
6.25 cm/ 2.46"
4.47 cm/ 1.76"
4.98 cm/ 1.96"
Maximum Distance 12.09 cm/ 4.76"
20.98 cm/ 8.26"
25.04 cm/ 9.86"
40.28 cm/ 15.86"
29.92 cm/ 11.66"
16.41 cm/ 6.46"
20.73 cm/ 8.16"
27.58 cm/ 10.86"
13.87 cm/ 5.46"
21.74 cm/ 8.56"
33.43 cm/ 13.16"
* Minimum distance depends on symbology length and scan angle. 0"
4"
8"
12"
16"
in 10"
8"
6"
4"
2"
0"
2"
4"
6"
8"
10"
Data Matrix 7.5 mils PDF417 6.6 mils 0.125mm / 5mils 0.25 mm / 10 mils 100% contrast UPC EAN 0.5 mm / 20 mils 25 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 cm 0 10 20 30 40 50 EA11 Standard Minimum Reading Distances 8 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Using the Batteries Chapter 1 Using the Computer The CN3 uses replaceable Lithium-Ion (Li-ion) batteries. Standard packs have 8.1 Watt hours capacity and extended packs have 14.8 Watt hours capacity. You must fully charge the battery before you can use the CN3. When you change the battery, a super capacitor maintains your status, memory, and real-time clock for at least five minutes. The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if it is mistreated. Do not disassemble it, heat it above 100C
(212F) or incinerate it. If you fail to replace the battery immediately, you may lose important state or applications. Note: If the CN3 is not on external power and the battery pack is removed, it will suspend when the battery pack is removed. When the battery reaches the end of its useful life, the spent battery should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler. Do not mix this battery with the solid waste stream. Contact your Intermec Technologies Service Center for recycling or disposal information. Note: In the U.S.A., the EPA does not consider spent Li-ion batteries as hazardous waste. Keep away from children. Contact your Intermec representative for replacement batteries. Several factors determine the life of your battery such as extreme temperatures, input devices, and your usage. The CN3 contains an internal super capacitor, a temporary power storage device, that protects state for up to five minutes. This is to give you time to replace the battery pack before state is lost. To maximize the time allowed to replace the main battery pack Put the CN3 in a suspend mode before removing the battery pack. Charging the Battery The battery pack should be fully charged before you use the CN3 for the first time. If temperatures are within the battery charging range of 0 to 45C (32 to 113F), the standard battery pack takes up to four hours to charge; the extended battery pack takes up to five hours. The battery is fully charged when its battery status LED shows a steady green. You can charge the battery pack using a quad battery pack charger, a single dock spare battery pack charge slot, or a CN3 with external power applied. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 9 Chapter 1 Using the Computer The charge/operating power can be applied to the CN3 using an AC wall adapter, a magnetic card reader snap-on, a single dock with ac adapter or auto-lighter adapter attached, a multidock, either charge-only or Ethernet, or an auto lighter adapter. For information on these accessories, see Accessories for the Computer on page 190. Maximizing Battery Life Note that batteries are chemical devices. If these are left setting on a shelf for long periods of time outside the CN3, the batteries slowly discharge, eventually to zero if left unchecked. The battery chemistry resists normal degradation if you store the battery in a charger as opposed to leaving the battery in a discharged state. Below are things that you can do to maximize the life of your battery. Battery Conservation Tips When You Want To:
Operate the CN3 and the Low Battery status icon appears or the Battery light comes on. Stop using the CN3 for five minutes or longer. Store CN3s for more than a day. Store the battery outside the CN3. Do This to Save Battery Power:
Press the power switch to turn off the CN3. Remove the battery and insert another fully charged battery within five minutes or you may lose state. Or, you can connect the CN3 to an external power source. Make sure the low battery icon is not on the screen and that the Battery light is not turned on. Press the power switch to turn off the CN3. If you are storing the CN3 for a few days, like over the weekend, install the charged battery or attach the CN3 to a power source. If you are storing the CN3 for longer, remove and charge the battery, then store both the battery and the CN3 in a cool location. If the battery in storage is not used in several months, you should recharge the battery to keep it at its performance peak, Store the batteries in a charger. Removing and Installing the Battery To remove the battery, press the battery release tab to the left until the battery is released from the CN3, then lift it away. Battery Release Tab 10 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer To install the battery, insert the tabs on the charged battery into the CN3 and snap the battery into place. Checking the Battery Status The Battery Status LED above your CN3 display, as shown in the following illustration, indicates the status of your battery. See the following table to understand the meanings of the lights emitted from the LED. Battery Status LED Steady Green Blinking Red Steady Red Steady Amber Battery is more than 95% charged and CN3 is on a charger. Battery is low. CN3 goes into suspend mode. Battery is on charge. Either the CN3 is in a dock but is missing its battery; or the temperature of the battery pack is too hot or too cold for it to charge. You can check the battery status by using the Power applet to check the status of the battery as indicated by the percentage of battery charge left in the battery. To check the Power settings Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Power icon, then tap the Battery tab. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 11 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Note: The Backup battery option shown in the Battery tab refers to the super capacitor used by the CN3 to store energy. Understanding the Low Battery Warnings When the battery charge is getting low (approximately 6.4 to 6.5V), you will receive an audible alert and an initial pop-up Main Battery Low warning message. If the warning is not dismissed, it is followed by another audible alert and a second pop-up Main Battery Very Low warning message. If the battery charge continues to drop, the red battery status LED will blink and the CN3 will enter suspend mode. Adjusting the Beeper For information about setting volume levels for screen taps, ActiveSync alert noises, etc., tap Start > Help. To enable the beeper 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > the Sounds & Notifications icon, then tap the Sounds tab. 2 Check for which features the CN3 should enable sounds, then tap ok to close. 12 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer 3 Tap the Volume icon at the top of the screen, tap On, then move the slider bar to your desired level. If your CN3 comes with a phone, then be sure to use the left slider bar for the volume for the rear speaker and the right slider bar for the phone via the front speaker. Volume slider bar Phone slider bar To disable the beeper Tap the Volume icon, then drag the slider to the bottom, or tap Off. Note the change in the Volume icon. If your CN3 has a built-in phone, tapping Off will disable both the beeper and the phone. To disable just the beeper, drag the left slider bar to its bottom position, like in the following illustration. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 13 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Using the Color Camera The 1.3 megapixel color camera with flash is an optional feature that is factory-installed into the upper back of the CN3, as shown in the following illustration. You can take photos in either high-resolution or a compressed formats, with resolutions up to 1200x1024 pixels. Color Camera Flash Images are saved as .jpg files and stored in the /My Documents/My Pictures folder. Select Start > Programs > the Pictures & Videos icon, then tap the Camera option in the grid or tap Camera in the taskbar. 14 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer Using the screen display as a viewfinder, tap move the camera until you get the image you want, then press Enter or tap the screen to save the image, similar to the following:
Go to Configuring the Color Camera on page 92 for information on configuring the color camera. Using the Intermec Settings Applet Use the Intermec Settings applet to gather, view, and update device configuration settings. Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings applet is in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual available online at www.intermec.com. To access the Intermec Settings applet 1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon to access the applet. 2 Tap (+) to expand any of the settings, then select any of the subsequent settings to make changes via drop-down lists or fields. 3 When you are done making changes, select File > Save Settings to have your change take effect, then select File > Exit to close the applet. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 15 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Using the Keypad The CN3 can have a QWERTY keypad, a numeric keypad, or a 10-key keypad. The available keypads are dependent on your model of CN3. QWERTY Keypad Numeric Keypad CN3e 10-Key Keypad CN3e Numeric Keypad The full alphabetic QWERTY keypad is for applications that require input of both alphabetic and numeric data. This keypad also provides special characters, symbols, and functions by pressing color-coded key sequences. The large numeric keypad is for applications that require mainly numeric data. This keypad also lets you enter special characters by pressing color-
coded key sequences. The 10-key keypad is also for applications that require mainly entering numeric data, but it is intended for customers who also use a 10-key keypad. 16 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Using the Color-Coded Keys Chapter 1 Using the Computer Each keypad available for the CN3 provides color-coded keys to let you access additional characters, symbols, and functions printed on the keypad overlay. Once you understand how to use the color-coded keys and key sequences, you can access all of the additional features printed on the keypad overlay. There are two color-coded modifier keys on the numeric keypad: the orange B key and the green C key. The alphanumeric keypad just has the orange B color-coded modifier key. To enter a single character from the orange plane, press the B (orange LED illuminates) then press the desired key (orange LED turns off). To enter multiple characters from the orange plane, press B twice (orange LED on) then enter the desired characters. Pressing B again turns the LED off and returns to the unshifted plane. Capitalizing Characters To capitalize a single character on QWERTY keypads, press the shift key, then the character. To type all alphanumeric characters as uppercase letters, you can enable the Caps Lock feature on the CN3 keypad. To enable Caps Lock On the QWERTY keypad, press B, then the Shift key. Press the same key sequence to disable the Caps Lock. On the numeric keypad, press C, then the [1] key. The Caps Lock LED lights up green to show that the CN3 is in the Caps Lock mode. The keypad stays in this mode until you press a color key again. Entering Characters on the QWERTY Keypad On the QWERTY keypad, to type the number 2, press B [U]. Press B twice to enter characters until you press B again. QWERTY Characters Press the Keys To Enter
B [Q]
B [A]
CapsLock B [Shift]
smiley B [W]
B [S]
(left quote) B [Z]
(right quote) B [X]
B [R]
B [F]
B [C]
To Enter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Press the Keys B [Y]
B [U]
B [I]
B [H]
B [J]
B [K]
B [B]
B [N]
B [M]
B [backlight]
CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 17 Chapter 1 Using the Computer QWERTY Characters (continued) To Enter
Press the Keys B [T]
B [G]
B [V]
To Enter frown
ok Press the Keys B [O]
B [L]
B [P]
Entering Characters on the Numeric Keypad On the numeric keypad, to type a lowercase c, press C [2] [2] [2]. To type a letter on the same key as the last letter entered, wait two seconds, then enter the correct series of keystrokes to create the next letter. While in the Alpha mode and you press [1] to initiate the CAPS mode, you will render a Caps Lock until you press [1] again. Once you are in CAPS mode, you stay in CAPS until it is pressed again. Press [0] to enter a space. Numeric Characters To Enter a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z Press the Keys C [2]
C [2] [2]
C [2] [2] [2]
C [3]
C [3] [3]
C [3] [3] [3]
C [4]
C [4] [4]
C [4] [4] [4]
C [5]
C [5] [5]
C [5] [5] [5]
C [6]
C [6] [6]
C [6] [6] [6]
C [7]
C [7] [7]
C [7] [7] [7]
C [7] [7] [7] [7]
C [8]
C [8] [8]
C [8] [8] [8]
C [9]
C [9] [9]
C [9] [9] [9]
C [9] [9] [9] [9]
To Enter A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Press the Keys C [1] [2]
C [1] [2] [2]
C [1] [2] [2] [2]
C [1] [3]
C [1] [3] [3]
C [1] [3] [3] [3]
C [1] [4]
C [1] [4] [4]
C [1] [4] [4] [4]
C [1] [5]
C [1] [5] [5]
C [1] [5] [5] [5]
C [1] [6]
C [1] [6] [6]
C [1] [6] [6] [6]
C [1] [7]
C [1] [7] [7]
C [1] [7] [7] [7]
C [1] [7] [7] [7] [7]
C [1] [8]
C [1] [8] [8]
C [1] [8] [8] [8]
C [1] [9]
C [1] [9] [9]
C [1] [9] [9] [9]
C [1] [9] [9] [9] [9]
18 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Using the Power Switch Chapter 1 Using the Computer When you press the power switch, you actually suspend the CN3 and turn off the display and backlight. This helps to prolong battery life. Note:
Coming Out of the Idle Mode When there is no activity, the CN3 goes into idle mode or turns off the backlight after one minute. Press a key or tap the screen to resume activity. To change the time when to turn off the backlight 1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Backlight icon > the Battery Power tab. 2 With Turn off backlight if device is not used for checked, select the timeout value (10 seconds, 30 seconds, or 1-5 minutes). Resuming Activity after an Unattended Mode CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 19 Chapter 1 Using the Computer After two minutes of no activity, the CN3 goes into an unattended mode or turns off. Press the power switch to resume activity. To change the time when to turn off the CN3 1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Power icon > the Advanced tab. 2 With Turn off device if not used for checked, select the timeout value
(1-5 minutes). Using the Screen The CN3 has a 3.5" diagonal, 240x320 pixel (QVGA) transflective TFT-LCD 64K color display. The toolbar displays the Start flag, the connectivity icon, the volume icon, and the time and next appointment. The desktop displays shortcuts to some of the applications installed on the CN3. The taskbar displays the onscreen keyboard icon, Pocket PC links, and icons to any applications that are running, yet are hidden. Note: Information about using the Windows Mobile operating system is in Chapter 2, Windows Mobile. Toolbar Desktop Taskbar 20 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer The CN3 has a stylus you can use to select items and enter information. Tap Touch the screen once with the stylus to select options, close applications, launch applications, or launch menus from the taskbar. Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select text and images. Tap and hold the stylus on an icon to see a list of actions available for the item. On the menu that appears, tap the action to perform. Drag Tap and hold Software Tools SmartSystems Foundation Console (www.intermec.com/SmartSystems) This free download tool includes a management console that provides a default method to configure and manage Intermec devices out-of-the-
box, without the purchase of additional software licenses. This is for configuring and deploying multiple devices or managing multiple licenses. You can access the SmartSystems Foundation from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/SmartSystems. SmartSystems Platform Bundles (SSPB) SmartSystems Platform Bundles (SSPB) contains the Data Collection Engine (DCE), SmartSystems, Funk Supplicant, Intermec Settings, Intermec Developer Library (IDL) runtime, and other software. The SSPB is stored in the \Flash File Store folder off the root of your CN3 and automatically installed on the device when it is initially started up. Updated bundles are available as software downloads from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/SmartSystems. Click Downloads on the left to access the latest. Intermec Resource Kits (www.intermec.com/IDL) Resource Kits provide tools that build applications using the features of Intermec devices. Resource kits include: Bluetooth, Communications, Data Collection, Device Settings, Mobile Gadgets, Printing, and RFID. You can use resource kits, software development information, and other programming support in the Intermec Developer Library available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/IDL. Using the Speakers The CN3 features two integrated speakers. You can use the smaller front speaker as a mobile phone and the larger rear speaker like a speakerphone. Do not place the speaker next to your ear when the speaker volume is set to Loud (maximum), or you may damage your hearing. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 21 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Front Speaker The front speaker is a full-voice range speaker of cell-phone quality with a separate volume control. Front Speaker Rear Speaker The rear speaker also plays system sounds. Rear speaker Volume up Volume down Adjusting the Volume The volume is enabled when you adjust the volume. You can control the volume by pressing the two scan buttons on the right side of the CN3 as shown above, using the Volume drop-down in the toolbar, or the Intermec Settings applet. In either situation, tap Off to disable the volume. To adjust the volume for the rear speaker 1 Tap the Volume icon at the top of the screen. 2 Tap On, then move the system volume slider to the desired volume level. Up is louder, down is quieter. If your CN3 comes with a phone, be sure to use the left slider bar for the volume for the rear speaker, and to use the right slider bar for the phone
(front speaker). Volume slider bar Phone slider bar 22 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer To use the Intermec Settings applet to adjust the volume 1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. 2 Tap (+) to expand Device Settings > Beeper > Volume. 3 Tap any of the options other than Off to enable and adjust. Using the Status LEDs The status LEDs above the display show the following information:
Good Scan LED and Intermec Ready-to-Work Indicator Notification Battery Status LED The Battery Status LED on the right alerts you to the status of your battery using any of the following codes:
Battery Status LED Descriptions LED Blinking Red Steady Red and CN3 is on external power Battery is charging Steady Red and CN3 is not on charge Yellow Description Battery is low, needs charging Software is not working properly Battery is missing or is unable to charge because its temperature is outside the 0 to 45C (32 to 115F) degree charging range Green and the CN3 is on external power Battery is charged Off CN3 is not on external power, battery operating normally The center LED shows green (Good Scan) when the CN3 successfully decodes a bar code scan. When the CN3 is turned on or off, a steady blue light (Ready-to-Work Indicator) may illuminate for a short time while the CN3 is suspending or CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 23 Chapter 1 Using the Computer resuming with the display turned off. The blue light may stay on for up to 30 seconds, but will usually turn off after less than 10 seconds. During this time, do not toggle the CN3 on or off and do not remove the battery, or you may corrupt the CN3. Selected application software programs may also use the blue light, either steady or flashing, for other purposes. The previous paragraph applies only in situations where you turn the CN3 on or off while the display is off. The center LED may show a steady blue when the CN3 has successfully loaded and activated the TE 2000 application, a blinking blue if the TE 2000 application is loaded but inactive, or be off when the TE 2000 application is disabled or is missing. This feature is for the SmartSystems Foundation application that is part of a wireless network using all Intermec devices. See SmartSystems Foundation Console (www.intermec.com/SmartSystems) on page 21 for more information or contact your Intermec representative. The left Notification LED lights up with orange to notify you of a pending alarm or message, such as when you receive an e-mail or set a calendar reminder. Using the Storage Card The CN3 uses a miniSD card to increase file storage and install software. The miniSD card slot is located under a door that is beneath the battery pack. Remove the two screws holding the door to reach the miniSD card. You can corrupt your miniSD card if you do not follow these installation and removal procedures exactly. Before installing a miniSD card, inspect the gasket on the door for any damage or wear, and contact your Intermec representative if any damage or wear is found Note: The CN3 will reset if the miniSD/SIM door is opened. The screws to this door must be in place and torqued to 1.5 in-lbs to ensure normal operation. To insert the miniSD card 1 Press the power switch to suspend the CN3, then remove the battery pack from the back of the CN3. 2 Remove the two screws on the miniSD/SIM card slot door. 3 Gently lift the door to the card slot, then with the metal contacts facing down, insert the miniSD card into the card slot connector until the card lifts up from the floor of the card slot. 4 Press the miniSD/SIM card slot door down, insert the two screws, reinsert the battery pack, then press the power switch. 24 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer Once the door to the miniSD is opened (for changing, installing, or removing the SIM or miniSD card); a cold-boot is performed. miniSD/SIM door SIM card slot miniSD card slot To remove the miniSD card 1 Press the power switch to suspend the CN3. 2 Remove the battery pack. 3 Remove the two screws on the miniSD/SIM card slot door. 4 Remove the miniSD card from the CN3. Setting Vibrate Mode To set your CN3 to vibrate Tap the Volume icon at the top of the screen, then tap Vibrate. If your CN3 has a built-in phone, this sets both the volume and the phone to vibrate. Note the icon change. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 25 Chapter 1 Using the Computer To set your CN3 to vibrate using the Intermec Settings applet 1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. 2 Tap (+) to expand Device Settings > Beeper > Vibrate, then tap Vibrate. 3 To disable the vibrate, tap the Beeper option. To set the CN3 to vibrate using the Sounds & Notifications applet 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > the Sounds &
Notifications icon. 2 Tap the Notifications tab, then select from the Event list. 3 Check Vibrate, then tap ok to close. 26 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Setting Up GPS on Your CN3 Chapter 1 Using the Computer If your CN3 comes equipped with an integrated Global Positioning System
(GPS) receiver, it can deliver standards-based National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) data strings to GPS applications. However, Intermec recommends that you use the GPS Intermediate Driver (GPSID) instead of directly accessing the GPS hardware. The GPSID is a Microsoft software component that interacts between applications and the GPS hardware. Using the GPSID allows Intermec support for Extended Ephemeris, which enhances GPS performance by:
reducing the amount of time it takes your GPS receiver to acquire a fix. eliminating the need to obtain precise satellite data information from the GPS satellites. And, as a Microsoft software component, the GPSID also provides these benefits:
Allows multiple applications to simultaneously access the GPS data stream. Provides access to GPS data without requiring applications to recognize and parse NMEA syntax. Using the GPSID Installed on the CN3 To use the GPSID installed on your CN3, you need to configure the GPSID settings. To configure your GPSID settings 1 Tap Start, and select Settings. 2 Tap the System tab. 3 Tap GPS. The GPS Settings screen appears. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 27
1 2 3 4 | User Manual 3 of 6 | Users Manual | 2.00 MiB | May 09 2007 |
2Windows Mobile This chapter introduces Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0 for Pocket PC. While using the CN3 Mobile Computer, keep these key points in mind:
Tap Start on the navigation bar, located at the top of the screen, to quickly move to programs, files, and settings. Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs. The command bar includes menus, icons, and the onscreen keyboard. Tap and hold an item to see a pop-up menu containing a list of actions you can perform. Pop-up menus give you quick and easy access to the most common actions. Below is a list of Windows Mobile components described in this chapter. Tap Start > Help, then select a topic on your CN3 to find additional information on Windows Mobile components. Windows Mobile 5.0 Components Microsoft ActiveSync (page 44) Microsoft Outlook Mobile (page 45) Word Mobile (page 66) Excel Mobile (page 69) PowerPoint Mobile (page 70) Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile (page 71) Using Internet Explorer Mobile (page 74) CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 29 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Software Builds See Learning Software Build Versions on page 4 to determine which Intermec build of Windows Mobile 5.0 is on your CN3. Where to Find Information This chapter describes your CN3 hardware, provides an overview of the programs on your CN3, and explains how to connect your CN3 to a desktop, a network, or the Internet. For instructions on setting up your CN3 and installing ActiveSync, see the Quick Start Guide. The following is a guide to more information to assist you use your CN3. For information on:
Programs on your mobile computer. Additional programs that can be installed on the mobile computer. Connecting to and synchronizing with a desktop. Last-minute updates and detailed technical information. Up-to-date information on your Windows Mobile. See this source:
This chapter and mobile computer Help. To view Help, tap Start > Help, then select a topic. The Windows Mobile Companion CD. The Quick Start Guide or ActiveSync Help on your desktop. To view Help, click Help > Microsoft ActiveSync Help. The Read Me files, located in the Microsoft ActiveSync folder on the desktop and on the Windows Mobile Companion CD. www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/communi-
ties/default.mspx Use these URLs for additional information about Microsoft Windows Mobile (Pocket PC):
msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/support/default.aspx support.microsoft.com/
http://msdn.microsoft.com/newsgroups/ (a free support option) And, most importantly, the Intermec front-line support personnel can help assist you work with many of the Windows Mobile and technologies that you find on the CN3. See Global Services and Support on page xi for more information. Learning to use your CN3 is easy. This section describes the basic concepts of using and customizing your CN3. When you turn on your CN3 for the first time each day (or after four hours of inactivity), you see the Today screen. You can also display it by tapping the Start flag at the top left of your display and then Today. On the Today screen, you can see important information for the day. Basic Usage Today Screen 30 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Programs Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Tap to start a program Tap and hold to change time format Tap to change date and time Tap to change owner information Tap to review your email Your day at a glance. Tap to open an associated program To customize what is displayed on the Today screen including the background 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > the Today icon. 2 Status icons display information such as low batteries or when the CN3 is connected to a desktop or to the Internet. You can tap an icon to open the associated setting or program. You can switch from one program to another by selecting it from the Start menu. (You can customize which programs you see on this menu. For information, see Adjusting Settings on page 41.) To access some programs, tap Start > Programs, and then the program name. You can also switch to some programs by pressing a program icon. Your CN3 has one or more program icons located on the front or side of the computer. The icons identify the programs to which they switch. Note: Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop-
down menus. To see the full spelling of an abbreviated label, tap and hold the stylus on the label. Drag the stylus off the label so that the command is not carried out. The following is a partial list of programs that are on your CN3, in the order they appear in the Start menu. Look on the Windows Mobile Companion CD for additional programs that you can install onto the CN3. Keep track of your appointments and create meeting requests. Keep track of your friends and colleagues. Browse web sites, and download new programs, files from the Internet. Send and receive e-mail messages. Keep track of your tasks. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 31 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Play digital audio and video files that are stored on your CN3 or on a network. Navigation Bar and Command Bar The navigation bar is located at the top of the screen. It displays the active program and current time, switch to programs, and close screens. Tap to switch to a program Select from up to six recent accessed programs Tap to see more programs Tap to change device settings Tap to see a Help topic for the current screen Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs. The command bar includes menu names, functions, and the Input Panel icon, when needed. To create a new item in the current program, tap New. To see the name of a icon, tap and hold the stylus on the icon. Drag the stylus off the icon so the command is not carried out. Use pop-up menus to quickly perform an action on an item. For example, you can use a pop-up menu to delete or make a copy of an item. To access a pop-up menu, tap and hold the item on which you want to perform the action. When the menu appears, tap the action you want to perform, or tap anywhere outside the menu to close the menu without doing the action. Tap and hold to display the pop-up menu Lift the stylus and tap the action you want Tap outside to close without performing an action When you have something to do, your CN3 notifies you in a variety of ways. For example, if you have set up an appointment in Calendar, an e-
mail message arrives, or a friend sends you an instant message, you are notified in any of the following ways: a message box appears on the screen, a sound (which you can specify) is played, a light flashes on your CN3, or the CN3 vibrates. You can choose the notification types. Pop-up Menus Notifications 32 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Entering Information You can enter information on your CN3 in several ways, depending on the type you have and the program you are using:
Synchronizing Typing Writing Drawing Recording Using Microsoft ActiveSync, synchronize or copy information between your desktop and CN3. For more information on ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop. Using the input panel, enter typed text into the CN3. Do this by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by using handwriting recognition software. Using the stylus, write directly on the screen. Using the stylus, draw directly on the screen. Create a stand-alone recording or embed a recording into a document or note. Use the input panel to enter information in any program on your CN3. You can either type using the onscreen keyboard or write using Block Recognizer, Letter Recognizer, or Transcriber. In either case, the characters appear as typed text on the screen. To show or hide the input panel, tap the Input Panel icon. Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel icon to see your choices. Select an input method Tap to see your choices Input Panel icon When you use the input panel, your CN3 anticipates the word you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel. When you tap the displayed word, it is inserted into your text at the insertion point. The more you use your CN3, the more it learns to anticipate. Tap a text box to display the input panel Tap to insert anticipated word Tap characters on the onscreen keyboard to enter them CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 33 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile To change word suggestion options, such as the number of words suggested at one time, tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Input > the Word Completion tab. Typing With the Onscreen Keyboard Tap the input panel arrow, then tap Keyboard. On the soft keyboard that is displayed, tap the keys with your stylus. To type a single uppercase letter or symbol, tap the Shift key. To tap multiple uppercase letters or symbols, tap the CAP key. To convert to uppercase, hold the stylus on the letter and drag up. To add a space, drag the stylus to the right across at least two keys. To backspace a character, drag the stylus to the left across multiple keys. To insert a carriage return, tap and hold the stylus anywhere on the keyboard and drag down. To use larger keys, tap the input panel arrow, tap Options, select Keyboard from the Input method drop-down list, then select Large 34 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual keys. Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Using Block Recognizer Character recognition software gives you a fast and easy method for entering information in any program on your CN3. Letters, numbers, and punctuation you write are translated into typed text. Tap the input panel arrow, then tap Block Recognizer. Write a letter in the box. When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on the screen. For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer, with Block Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area. Tap for assistance Using Letter Recognizer With Letter Recognizer, you can write letters using the stylus just as you would on paper. Tap the input panel arrow, then tap Letter Recognizer. Write a letter in the box. When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on the screen. For specific instructions on using Letter Recognizer, with Letter Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area. Tap for assistance Using Transcriber With Transcriber, you can write anywhere on the screen using the stylus just as you would on paper. Unlike Letter Recognizer and Block Recognizer, you can write a sentence or more of information. Then, pause and let Transcriber change the written characters to typed characters. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 35 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Tap the input panel arrow, then tap Transcriber. Tap ok, then write anywhere on the screen. For specific instructions on using Transcriber, with Transcriber open, tap the question mark in the lower, right-hand corner of the screen. Tap for assistance Selecting Typed Text If you want to edit or format typed text, you must select it first. Drag the stylus across the text you want to select. You can cut, copy, and paste text by tapping and holding the selected words and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or by tapping the command under Menu. Writing on the Screen In any program that accepts writing, such as the Notes program, and in the Notes tab in Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks, you can use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Write the way you do on paper. You can edit and format what you have written and convert the information to text at a later time. Tap the Pen icon to switch to writing mode. This action displays lines on the screen to help you write. Tap to use your stylus like a pen Note: Some programs that accept writing may not have the Pen icon. See documentation for that program to see how to switch to writing mode. Selecting the Writing If you want to edit or format writing, you must select it first. 1 Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you want to select until the insertion point appears. 2 Without lifting, drag the stylus across the text you want to select. If you accidentally write on the screen, tap Menu > Undo and try again. You can also select text by tapping the Pen icon to deselect it and then dragging the stylus across the screen. 36 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile You can cut, copy, and paste written text in the same way you work with typed text: tap and hold the selected words and then tap an editing command on the pop-up menu, or tap the command under Menu. Converting Writing to Text You can convert words you write in print or cursive to text by tapping Menu > Tools > Recognize. If a word is not recognized, it stays in its original form. If you want to convert only certain words, tap Pen to disable the writing function, tap twice over the word or phrase to highlight, then tap Menu >
Tools > Recognize. Before Recognition After Recognition If the conversion is incorrect, you can choose different words from a list of alternates or return to the original writing. To do so, tap and hold the incorrect word (tap one word at a time). On the pop-up menu, tap Alternates. Tap the word use from the menu with a list of alternate words, or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to the original writing. Tap to return to the original writing Or tap the word you want to use Tips for getting good recognition:
Write neatly. Write on the lines and draw descenders below the line. Write the cross of the t and apostrophes below the top line so they are not confused with the word above. Write periods and commas above the baseline. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 37 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile For better recognition, try increasing the zoom level to 300% by selecting Menu > Zoom. Recognition is not good under a 150% zoom. Write the letters of a word closely and leave big gaps between words so that the CN3 can easily tell where words begin and end. Hyphenated words, foreign words that use special characters such as accents, and some punctuation cannot be converted. If you add writing to a word to change it (such as changing a 3 to an 8) after you attempt to recognize the word, the writing you add is not included if you attempt to recognize the writing again. Drawing on the Screen You can draw on the screen in the same way that you write on the screen. The difference between writing and drawing on the screen is how you select items and how they are edited. For example, you can resize selected drawings, while you cannot resize writing. Creating a Drawing Select Menu > Draw, then draw a line to initiate a drawing box. Subsequent strokes in or touching the box become part of the drawing. The drawing box indicates the boundaries of the drawing Note: You may want to change the zoom level so that you can easily work on or view your drawing. Tap Menu > Zoom, then select a zoom level. Selecting a Drawing If you want to edit or format a drawing, you must select it first. Tap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle appears. To select multiple drawings, deselect the Pen icon and then drag to select the drawings you want. You can cut, copy, and paste selected drawings by tapping and holding the selected drawing and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or by tapping the command under Menu. To resize a drawing, make sure the Pen icon is not selected, and drag a selection handle. 38 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Recording a Message Chapter 2 Windows Mobile In a program where you can write or draw onscreen, you can also quickly capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers by recording a message. In the Messaging program, you can add a recording to an e-mail message. In Calendar, Tasks, and Contacts, you can include a recording in the Notes tab. In the Notes program, you can create a stand-alone recording or add a recording to an open note. To add a recording 1 Tap Menu > View Recording Toolbar to add the recording toolbar to the bottom of the screen. 2 Hold the CN3s microphone near your mouth or source of sound. 3 Tap the red circle to start your recording. 4 Tap the black box when finished. If you are recording in an open note, an icon appears in the note, like in the following sample. If you are creating a stand-alone recording, it appears in the note list. 5 To play a recording, tap the recording icon in the open note or tap the recording in the note list. Note: To quickly create a recording, hold down the Record hardware button. When you hear the beep, begin your recording. Release the button when you are finished. The new recording is stored in the open note or as a stand-alone recording if no note is open. 6 To play a recording, tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note. Indicates an embedded recording Tap to begin recording CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 39 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Using My Text When using Messaging, use My Text to quickly insert preset or frequently used messages into the text entry area. To insert a message, tap Menu > My Text, then select a message. To quickly add common messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap a desired message. To edit a My Text message, tap Menu > My Text > Edit My Text Messages. Tap the message you want to edit and enter new text at the bottom of the screen. Finding and Organizing Information You can use the File Explorer to find files on the CN3, and organize these files into folders, and move files using the cut or copy-and-paste methods. Tap Start > Programs > the File Explorer icon. Tap a folder to open it For future use, this is added to your Start menu in the Recent Programs area, via Start > File Explorer. Tap New Folder to create a new folder 40 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Customizing Your Computer You can customize by adjusting settings and installing additional software. Adjusting Settings To adjust settings to fit the way you work, tap Start > Settings > either the Personal tab or the System tab located at the bottom of the screen. Note: The Phone applet in the Personal tab is available only on CN3s with built-in phones. To customize what appears on the Start menu. To customize the look and information seen on the Today screen. To change the time or to set alarms. To maximize battery life. Menus Owner Information To enter your contact information. Today Clock & Alarms Power Adding or Removing Programs Programs added to your CN3 at the factory are stored in ROM (Read Only Memory). You cannot remove this software, and you cannot accidentally lose ROM contents. Applications added to your CN3 go into the Object Store, which is located in Flash ROM. See Packaging Applications for the Computer on page 76 for more information about the Object Store. You can install any program created for the CN3, as long as there is enough memory. A popular place to find software for your CN3 is on the Windows Mobile web site (www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/
communities/default.mspx). CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 41 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Adding Programs Using ActiveSync Install the appropriate software for your CN3 on your desktop before installing it on your CN3. 1 Determine your CN3 and processor type so that you know which version of the software to install. Tap Start > Settings > the System tab >
the About icon > the Version tab, then make a note of the information in Processor. Note this information 2 Download the program to your desktop (or insert the CD or disk that contains the program into your desktop). You may see a single .xip, .exe, or .zip file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files for different CN3 types and processors. Be sure to select the program designed for the Windows Mobile and your CN3 processor type. 3 Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that comes with the program. Many programs provide special installation instructions. 4 Connect your CN3 and desktop. 5 Double-click the .exe file. If the file is an installer, the installation wizard begins. Follow the directions on the screen. Once the software is installed, the installer automatically transfers the software to your CN3. If the file is not an installer, an error message stating that the program is valid but it is designed for a different type of computer is displayed. Move this file to your CN3. If you cannot find any installation instructions for the program in the Read Me file or documentation, use ActiveSync Explore to copy the program file to the Program Files folder on your CN3. For more information on copying files using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help. Once installation is complete, tap Start > Programs, and then the program icon to switch to it. For future use, this is added to your Start menu in the Recent Programs area, via Start > File Explorer. 42 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Adding a Program Directly from the Internet 1 Determine your CN3 and processor type so that you know which version of the software to install. Tap Start > Settings > the System tab >
the About icon > the Version tab, then make a note of the information in Processor. 2 Download the program to your CN3 straight from the Internet using Pocket Internet Explorer. You may see a single .xip, .exe, or .zip file, a setup.exe file, or several versions of files for different CN3 types and processors. Be sure to select the program designed for the Windows Mobile and CN3 processor type. 3 Read program installation instructions, Read Me files, or other documentation. Many programs provide installation instructions. 4 Tap the file, such as a .xip or .exe file to start the installation wizard. Follow the directions on the screen. Adding a Program to the Start Menu Tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > the Menus icon, then the check box for the program. If you do not see the program listed, you can either use File Explorer on the CN3 to move the program to the Start Menu folder, or use ActiveSync on the desktop to create a shortcut to the program and place the shortcut in the Start Menu folder. Using File Explorer on the Computer Tap Start > Programs > the File Explorer icon, locate the program (tap the folder list, labeled My Documents by default, then My Device to see a list of all folders on the CN3). Tap and hold the program and tap Cut on the pop-up menu. Open the Start Menu folder located in the Windows folder, tap and hold a blank area of the window, and tap Paste on the pop-up menu for the program to appear on the Start menu. For information on using File Explorer, see Finding and Organizing Information on page 40. For future use, this is added to your Start menu in the Recent Programs area, via Start > File Explorer. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 43 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Using ActiveSync on the desktop Use the Explorer in ActiveSync to explore your CN3 files and locate the program. Right-click the program, and then click Create Shortcut. Move the shortcut to the Start Menu folder in the Windows folder. The shortcut now appears on the Start menu. For information, see ActiveSync Help. Removing Programs Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Remove Programs icon. If the program does not appear in the list of installed programs, use File Explorer on your CN3 to locate the program, tap and hold the program, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu. Microsoft ActiveSync Note: You must have Microsoft ActiveSync 4.2 or greater on your desktop before you can synchronize information with your CN3. Visit the following Microsoft web site for the latest in updates, technical information, and samples:
www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/communities/
default.mspx Using Microsoft ActiveSync, you can synchronize the information on your desktop with the information on your CN3. Synchronization compares the data on your CN3 with your desktop and updates both computers with the most recent information. For example:
Keep Pocket Outlook data up-to-date by synchronizing your CN3 with Microsoft Outlook data on your desktop. Synchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your CN3 and desktop. Your files are converted to the correct format. Note: By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information. Use ActiveSync options to turn synchronization on or off for specific information types. With ActiveSync, you can also:
Back up and restore your CN3 data. Copy (rather than synchronize) files between your CN3 and desktop. Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode. For example, you can synchronize continually while connected to your desktop or only when you choose the synchronize command. Select which information types are synchronized and control how much data is synchronized. For example, you can choose how many weeks of past appointments you want synchronized. 44 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Before synchronization, install ActiveSync on your PC from the Windows Mobile Companion CD. ActiveSync is already installed on the CN3. After installation is complete, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps you connect your CN3 to your desktop, set up a partnership so you can synchronize information between your CN3 and your desktop, and customize your synchronization settings. Your first synchronization process automatically begins when finished using the wizard. After your first synchronization, look at Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks on your CN3. Notice that information you have stored in Microsoft Outlook on your desktop was copied to your CN3, and you did not have to type a word. Disconnect the CN3 from your computer and you are ready to go!
Once you have set up ActiveSync and completed the first synchronization process, you can initiate synchronization from your CN3. To switch to ActiveSync on your CN3, tap Start > Programs > the ActiveSync icon. Note that if you have a wireless LAN card, you can synchronize remotely from your CN3. For future use, this is added to your Start menu in the Recent Programs area, via Start > ActiveSync. For information about using ActiveSync on your desktop, start ActiveSync on your desktop, and then see ActiveSync Help. View the connection status Tap to connect and synchronize Tap to synchronize via IR or change synchronization For more information about ActiveSync on your CN3, switch to ActiveSync, tap Start > Help, then select a topic. Microsoft Outlook Mobile Microsoft Outlook Mobile includes Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Messaging, and Notes. You can use these programs individually or together. For example, you can use e-mail addresses stored in Contacts to address e-mail messages in Messaging. Using ActiveSync, you can synchronize information in Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft Exchange on your desktop with your CN3. You can also CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 45 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile synchronize this information directly with a Microsoft Exchange server. Each time you synchronize, ActiveSync compares the changes you made on your CN3 and desktop or server and updates both computers with the latest information. For information on using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. You can switch to any program by tapping it on the Start menu. Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings To switch to Calendar on the CN3, tap Start > Calendar. Use Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and other events. You can check your appointments in one of several views (Day, Week, Month, Year, and Agenda) and set Calendar to remind you of appointments with a sound or other method. Appointments for the day can display on the Today screen. If you use Outlook on your desktop, you can synchronize appointments between your CN3 and desktop. Tap to go to Today Tap to display and edit appointment details Synchronizing Calendar Calendar items stored on your CN3 can be synchronized with calendar items on your desktop or Microsoft Exchange Server. (Note that you can only synchronize information directly with an Exchange Server if your company is running Microsoft Mobile Information Server 2002 or later.) Calendar synchronization is automatically selected in ActiveSync. Calendar items entered on one computer are copied to the other during synchronization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as metafiles
(pictures). For information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. Why Use Categories in the Calendar?
Use categories to group related tasks, contacts, and appointments. Then, use these groupings to quickly display only the information you want. For example, you can easily share your CN3 with another by assigning your 46 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile appointments to a category with a special projects name. You can then use this category to filter and only display project appointments. Note: In Month View, the day of an appointment assigned to the Holiday category appears in red. This day was assigned the Holiday category Tap to access the Year view What Is an All Day Event?
An appointment can either be a normal appointment or an all day event, which lasts the full day or spans many days. Examples include a trade show, a vacation, or a seminar. You can also use all day events to schedule an annual event, such as a birthday or anniversary. In this case, change the Status box to Free (you may need to scroll to see it) so that it does not show time as busy in your calendar. All day events do not occupy blocks of time in Calendar; they appear in banners at the top of the calendar. Note: You cannot modify or create all-day events with attendees on the CN3. If you create all day events with attendees on your desktop, use ActiveSync to copy such events to the CN3, then view them in Calendar. For more information on copying files, see ActiveSync Help. To use the CN3 to schedule an appointment with attendees lasting all day, set type to Normal, then adjust the date and time. This describes the all-day event Tap to access the Week view CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 47 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile What Is a Recurrence Pattern?
If you have an appointment or task that you do on a regular basis, such as a weekly team meeting or a monthly status report, enter the item once and set a recurrence pattern for it. If the default patterns in the list are not what you need, you can create your own pattern using the wizard. Select your recurrence pattern from this list Select <edit pattern> to access the wizard with which to customize your recurrence. Viewing Appointments You can view appointments in one of several views (Agenda, Day, Week, Month, and Year). In Agenda view, upcoming appointments are displayed in bold. To see detailed appointment information in any view, tap the appointment. To see a list of available actions for an appointment, tap and hold the appointment. Tap Start > Today to see appointments for the day. Month view displays symbols to indicate the types of appointments you have on a given day. An upward triangle indicates a morning appointment;
a downward triangle indicates an afternoon appointment. If you have appointments in the morning and afternoon, a solid square is displayed. If you have an all day event not marked Free, a hollow square is displayed. This displays a morning appointment This displays an all-day event not marked Free This displays appointments in morning and afternoon This displays an afternoon appointment Tap this to access the Year view Creating or Changing an Appointment To create an appointment, tap Menu > New Appointment. To select a new date from a pop-up calendar, tap the display date. To enter or select a new time, tap the display time. Enter the appointment details, and when finished, tap ok to return to the calendar. 48 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile If you are working in Day view, tap and hold the time slot for the new appointment, then select New Appointment to have the time automatically entered for you. To change an appointment, tap it in the calendar, and then tap Edit. Change any appointment detail by tapping it and entering the new information. Tap the arrows to the right of the description and location boxes to choose from previous entries. When entering a time, you can type military and abbreviated time forms, such as 2300 (becomes 11:00 PM), 913pm (becomes 9:13 PM), 911
(becomes 9:11 AM), and 9p (becomes 9:00 PM). Tap to return to calendar, saved automatically Tap to choose from predefined text Tap to choose from previous defined locations Tap to select a time Tap to select a date Notes is a good place for maps and directions Creating an All-Day Event Tap Menu > New Appointment, tap All Day, then select Yes to create an event. To change an all-day event, switch to Day or Agenda, tap the event listed at the top of the calendar, then tap Edit. Change any appointment detail by tapping it and entering the new information. Tap to select Yes or No for the all-day event You cannot modify or create all day events with attendees on the CN3. If you create all-day events with attendees on your desktop, use ActiveSync to copy such events to the CN3. Then, view them in Calendar. For more information on copying files, see ActiveSync Help. To use the CN3 to schedule an appointment with attendees lasting all day, set type to Normal, then adjust date and time accordingly. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 49 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Setting a Reminder for an Appointment 1 Tap the appointment, then tap Edit to change the appointment. 2 Tap Reminder and select Remind me. 3 To change how many minutes before the appointment you are reminded, tap the minutes displayed, then select the new minutes from a drop-
down or enter the new minutes. Tap minutes to change hours, days, or weeks. Tap this to enable the reminder feature Note: To automatically set a reminder for all new appointments, in the calendar, tap Menu > Options > the Appointments tab, check Set reminders for new items, then tap the number and timeframe options to change the information given. Tap this to set reminders for new appointments To choose how you are reminded, for example by a sound, tap Start >
Settings > the Personal tab > the Sounds & Notifications icon. Adding a Note to an Appointment You can add written or typed notes and even recordings (if your CN3 supports recordings) to an appointment. This is a good place for maps, drawings, and other detailed information. To edit an existing note, tap the appointment in the calendar, tap Edit, then tap the Notes tab. 50 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 1 In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit. 2 Tap the Notes tab to enter notes. For specific instructions, tap Start >
Help, then select a topic. Use your stylus to write or draw information here Making an Appointment Recurring 1 In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit. 2 Tap Occurs and select a pattern from the list. Or, to create a new pattern, tap <Edit pattern...>, and follow the steps in the wizard. Select your recurrence from the drop-down list Select <edit pattern> to customize your recurrence Assigning an Appointment to a Category To find an appointment assigned to a category, tap Menu > Filter, then select the type of appointment to display. To show all appointments, tap Menu > Filter > All Appointments to clear all categories. 1 In the calendar, tap the appointment, tap Edit, then tap Categories. 2 Check the categories to which you want to assign the appointment. 3 To create a new category, tap New, enter the category name, then tap Done. The new category is automatically checked in the list. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 51 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 4 Tap ok to return to the appointment. A check mark indicates a selected category Sending a Meeting Request Use Calendar to schedule meetings with people who use Outlook or Outlook Mobile. When attendees receive a meeting request, they can accept or decline the meeting. If they accept the request, the meeting is automatically added to their schedule, their response is sent back to you, and your calendar is updated. Before you can send a meeting request, you must enter e-mail addresses in Contacts Help and set up Messaging to send and receive messages. For more information on sending and receiving meeting requests, open either the Calendar application or the Messaging application, tap Start > Help, then select a topic. If you are sending the meeting request through a connection to an ISP or the network, rather than through synchronization with your desktop, tap Menu > Options > the Appointments tab. From the Send meeting request via drop-down list, tap the service to use to send the request. 1 Tap and hold to select a timeslot in the calendar, then tap New Appointment. 2 Enter the meeting information, hide the onscreen keyboard, if needed, then tap Attendees. Only those contacts with e-mail addresses are displayed. Select the contacts to invite, then tap Add to return to the list. 3 Repeat this procedure until you have everyone you want to invite to the meeting, then tap ok. 4 Messaging automatically creates a meeting request and sends it to the attendees the next time you synchronize with your desktop. Textual 52 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile notes entered in the Notes tab (excluding writing) are also sent. To remove a person, highlight that person, then tap Delete Finding an Appointment Tap Start > Programs > the Search icon, enter the appointment name, tap the Type arrow and select Calendar from the drop-down list, and then tap Search. You can tap the Search for drop-down arrow to select from a list of previously searched items or phrases. Note for future access, this is added to your Start menu in the Recent Programs area, via Start > Search. To find an appointment assigned to a category, tap Menu > Filter, select the type of appointment to display. To show all appointments again, tap Menu > Filter > All Appointments to clear all categories. Tap to select or enter a phrase Tap to select where to search for this phrase Tap to see details Deleting an Appointment 1 In the calendar, tap and hold the appointment. 2 On the pop-up menu, tap Delete Appointment. The next time you synchronize, the appointment is also deleted from the desktop. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 53 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Changing Calendar Options In the calendar, tap Menu > Options, tap either tap, make your changes, then tap ok to return to the calendar. Tap the General tab to change the calendar view. Tap the Appointments tab to select what Show icons appointment indicators should appear when you view appointment contents. Tap and hold an icon to see its name. Selected icons are in black. Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues To switch to Contacts on the CN3, tap Start > Contacts. Contacts maintains a list of your friends and colleagues so that you can easily find the information you are looking for, whether you are at home or on the road. You can enter both personal and business information. If you use Microsoft Outlook on your desktop, you can synchronize contacts between your CN3 and your desktop. 54 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Tap and enter part of a name to find it in the list Tap to see additional phone numbers and e-mail addresses Tap to display and edit contact details Tap to create a new contact Creating a Contact 1 Tap New, then use the input panel to enter a name and other contact information. Scroll down to see all available fields. 2 To assign the contact to a category, scroll to and tap Categories, then select a category from the list. In the contact list, you can display contacts by category. 3 To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text or draw. For information on creating notes, see Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas on page 61. 4 When finished, tap ok to return to the contact list. Tap to return to the list, entry saved automatically Scroll to see more fields Use Notes to include maps and directions Synchronizing Contacts Contacts stored on your CN3 can be synchronized with Outlook contacts stored on your desktop or with Mobile Information Server 2002 or later. New items entered in one location are copied to the other during synchronization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as pictures when synchronizing with your desktop, but are removed when synchronizing with a server. For information, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 55 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Viewing Contacts The contact list displays the contact name and the first primary phone number or e-mail address specified for that contact. Contacts are ordered by name of contact or company. You can change the appearance of the Contacts list by tapping Menu > Options. Tap the default letter (home, work, mobile, or e-mail) to the right of the contact to see additional phone numbers and e-mail addresses. Use the up/down controls on your keypad to highlight a contact, then press the left/right controls on your keypad to change the default number, displayed as a letter to the right of the contact name. The default number is highlighted in the contacts summary, like the sample on the next page. To see more contact information, tap the contact. To see a list of available actions for a contact via a pop-up menu, tap and hold the contact. To see a list of contacts employed by a specific company, tap Menu >
View By > Company. Then, tap the desired company name. Indicates the default number Tap to edit the default number 56 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Changing a Contact In the contact list, tap the contact, and then tap Menu > Edit. To cancel edits, tap Menu > Undo. When you are finished making changes, tap ok to return to the contact list. Note: If you enter a name with more than two words, the middle word is recorded as a middle name. If your contact has a double first or last name, tap the Name arrow and enter the names in the proper box. Tap to access the Name fields Tap outside the box to close and return to details Adding a Note to a Contact You can add written or typed notes and even recordings (if your CN3 supports recordings) to a contact. Notes are handy for maps and drawings. To edit an existing note, tap the contact, tap Menu > Edit, then tap the Notes tab. 1 In the contact list, tap the contact. 2 Tap the Notes tab. For instructions, tap Start > Help, then select a topic. Use your stylus to write or draw your information Tap to activate the input panel Assigning a Contact to a Category 1 In the contact list, tap the contact, and then tap Menu > Edit. 2 Scroll to, tap Categories, then check categories to assign to the contact. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 57 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 3 To create a new category, tap New, enter the category name, then tap Done. The new category is automatically checked in the list. 4 Tap ok to return to the contacts. A check mark indicates a selected category Copying a Contact Press and hold a contact for a pop-up menu, then select Copy Contact; or if a contact is already highlighted, tap Menu > Copy Contact. Sending a Message to a Contact Press and hold a contact for a pop-up menu, then select Send E-mail or Send SMS depending on the type of message being sent. To send an e-mail message, you must have an e-mail address configured for the contact. To send an SMS (Short Messaging Service) message, you must have an SMS number for the contact, which is usually the mobile phone number. Finding a Contact Use any of the following methods to find a contact. To quickly move through a long list of contacts, tap one of the sets of letters displayed at the top to view contact names beginning with those letters. Tap Start > Programs > the Search icon, enter the contact name, tap the Type arrow and select Contacts from the drop-down list, and then tap Search. You can tap the Search for drop-down arrow to select from a list of previously searched items or phrases. Note for future access, this is added to your Start menu in the Recent Programs area, via Start > Search. From Contacts, start typing a contact name until you see it displayed on the screen. To show all contacts again, tap the text box at the top of the screen and clear the text, or tap the arrow to the right of the text box. To find a contact assigned to a category, tap Menu > Filter, then select the type of contact to display. To show all contacts again, tap Menu >
Filter > All Contacts to clear all categories. 58 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile To view the names of companies for which your contacts work, in the contact list, tap Menu > View By > Company. The number of contacts that work for that company is displayed to the right of the company. Deleting a Contact Press and hold a contact for a pop-up menu, select Delete Contact, then select Yes; or if a contact is already highlighted, tap Menu > Delete Contact, then select Yes. Changing Contacts Options In the contact list, tap Menu > Options, make your changes, then click ok to return to the Contacts list. Tasks: Keeping a To Do List To switch to Tasks on your CN3, tap Start > Tasks. Use Tasks to keep track of what you have to do. A variety of task information can display on the Today screen. If you use Microsoft Outlook on your desktop, you can synchronize tasks between your CN3 and CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 59 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile desktop. To change the way information is displayed, tap Menu > Options. Indicates a high priority Tap to display or edit details Tap and hold to display a pop-up menu Creating a Task To create a task with only a subject, tap Tap here to add a new task. To quickly create a task, enter text in the Tap here to add a new task box at the top of the screen. If you do not see this box, tap Menu > Options, then check Show Tasks entry bar. To create a task with detailed information, such as start and due dates, tap New. To enter notes, tap the Notes tab. Enter a start date and due date or enter other information by first tapping the field. If the input panel is open, hide it to see all available fields. For information on creating notes, see Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas on page 61. To change a task, tap it in the task list, and then tap Edit. Using the onscreen keyboard, enter a description. To assign the task to a category, tap Categories and check categories from the list. In the task list, you can filter tasks by category. When finished, tap ok to return to the task list. Synchronizing Tasks Tasks stored on the CN3 can synchronize with Microsoft Outlook on your desktop. Task synchronization is automatic in ActiveSync. 60 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile New items entered on one computer are copied to the other during synchronization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as metafiles
(pictures). For information, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas To switch to Notes on your CN3, tap Start > Programs > the Notes icon. Notes helps you quickly capture your ideas, notes, and thoughts. You can create a note using written and typed text, drawings, and recordings. You can also share your notes with others through e-mail, infrared, and synchronization with your desktop. Note for future access, this is added to your Start menu in the Recent Programs area, via Start > Notes. To create documents with advanced formatting or templates, such as bulleted lists and tabs, use word processing software developed for your CN3, such as Word Mobile. Tap to change the sort order of the list Tap to open a note or play a recording Tap and hold to display a pop-up menu Tap to record Tap to create a new note Creating a Note To create your note, tap New, then write, draw, type, or record your information. For information about using the input panel, writing and drawing, and creating recordings, see Recording a Message on page 39. Writing Using the stylus, write directly on the screen. Drawing Using the stylus, draw directly on the screen. Typing Using the input panel, enter typed text into the CN3 by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by using handwriting recognition software. Recording Create a stand-alone recording or embed a recording into a note. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 61 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Synchronizing Notes Notes can synchronize between your desktop and CN3 either through notes synchronization or file synchronization. Notes synchronization synchronizes the notes on your CN3 with Outlook Notes on your desktop. File synchronization ties all notes on the CN3 with the CN3s \My Documents folder on your desktop. To synchronize your notes through notes synchronization, first select the Notes information type for synchronization in ActiveSync. The next time you synchronize, all notes in My Documents and its subfolder on your CN3 appear in Outlook Notes on your desktop. Notes that contain only text appear as regular notes in Outlook on your desktop, while notes containing written text or drawings appear in the device format. In addition, all notes in the Notes group in Outlook on the desktop appear in Notes on the CN3. To synchronize your notes as files, in ActiveSync, select the Files information type for synchronization and clear the Notes information type. When you select Files, the My Documents folder for the CN3 is created on your desktop. All .PWI files placed in the \My Documents folder on your CN3 and all .doc files placed in the CN3s \My Documents folder on your desktop are synchronized. Password-protected files cannot be synchronized. ActiveSync converts documents during synchronization. For information on synchronization or file conversion, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. Note: When you delete or change an item on either your desktop or the CN3, the item is changed or deleted in the other location the next time you synchronize. Note: If you synchronize your notes using file synchronization and then later decide to use notes synchronization, all of your notes are synchronized with Outlook on your desktop and no longer stored in the My Documents folder for the CN3. Messaging: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages To switch to Messaging on your CN3, tap Start > Messaging. You can receive Internet e-mail messages and SMS messages in Messaging. Internet e-mail messages are sent by using an address you receive from your Internet service provider (ISP) or your employer. SMS messages are sent and received through your wireless phone service provider by using a phone number as the message address. You can send and receive e-mail by synchronizing with your desktop, or by connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) mail server. You need to set up an e-mail account for each method that you use except for Microsoft ActiveSync, which is set up by default. The ActiveSync folder on your CN3 stores messages that you send and receive through synchronization with a desktop. Account names 62 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile appear as folders in the folder list (located on the left, under the navigation bar) in the Messaging message list. With synchronization, messages are synchronized between the CN3 Inbox and the PC Inbox by using ActiveSync and Microsoft Exchange or Microsoft Outlook. When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server, you use a modem to connect to your Internet service provider (ISP) or a modem card to connect to the local area network to which your e-mail server is connected. You can also use your phone to connect by using a cellular line connection. For more information, see the next page. Synchronizing E-mail Messages After selecting Messaging for synchronization in ActiveSync, e-mail messages are synchronized as part of the general synchronization process. During synchronization:
Messages are copied from the Inbox folder on your desktop or the Microsoft Exchange server to the Inbox folder on your CN3. (Note that you can only synchronize information directly with an Exchange Server if your company is running Microsoft Mobile Information Server 2002 or later.) By default, you receive messages from the last three days only, the first 100 lines of each new message, and file attachments of less than 100 KB in size. Messages in the Outbox folder on your CN3 are transferred to Exchange or Outlook and then sent from those programs. The messages on the two computers are linked. When you delete a message on your CN3, it is deleted from your desktop the next time you synchronize. Messages in subfolders in other e-mail folders in Outlook are synchronized only if they were selected for synchronization in ActiveSync. For information on initiating Messaging synchronization or changing synchronization settings, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop or tap Start >
Help, then select a topic. Managing E-mail Messages and Folders Each e-mail account and SMS account has its own folder hierarchy with five default folders: Inbox, Outbox, Deleted Items, Drafts, and Sent Items. The messages you receive and send through the mail account are stored in these folders. You can also create additional folders within each hierarchy. The \Deleted Items folder contains messages that were deleted on the CN3. The behavior of the \Deleted Items and \Sent Items folders depends on the Inbox options you have chosen. The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using ActiveSync, SMS, POP3, or IMAP4. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 63 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile If you use ActiveSync, e-mail messages in the \Inbox folder in Outlook automatically synchronize with your CN3. You can select to synchronize additional folders by designating them for ActiveSync. The folders you create and the messages you move are then mirrored on the server. For example, if you move two messages from the \Inbox folder to a folder named \Family, and you have designated \Family for synchronization, the server creates a copy of the Family folder and copies the messages into that folder. You can then read messages while away from your desktop. If you use SMS, messages are stored in the Inbox folder. If you use POP3 and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken between the messages on the CN3 and their copies on the mail server. The next time you connect, the mail server sees that the messages are missing from the CN3 Inbox and deletes them from the server. This does prevent duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that you no longer have access to messages that you move to folders created from anywhere except the CN3. If you use IMAP4, the folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored on the server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you connect to your mail server, whether it is from your CN3 or desktop. This folder synchronization occurs when you connect to your mail server, create new folders, or rename/delete folders when connected. For all accounts except ActiveSync, you can access folder options by tapping Menu > Tools > Manage Folders. Connecting to a Mail Server In addition to synchronizing e-mail messages with your desktop, you can send and receive e-mail messages by connecting to an e-mail server using a modem or network card connected to your CN3. You need to set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP, and a connection to your e-mail server. For information, see Remote Access (Modems) on page 139. When connected to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded to the CN3 \Inbox folder, messages in the CN3 \Outbox folder are sent, and deleted messages in the e-mail server are removed from the CN3 \Inbox folder. Messages that you receive directly from an e-mail server are linked to your e-mail server rather than your desktop. When you delete a message on your CN3, it is also deleted from the e-mail server the next time you connect based on the settings selected in ActiveSync. You can work online or offline. When working online, you read and respond to messages while connected to the e-mail server. Messages are sent as soon as you tap Send, which saves space on your CN3. When working offline, once you have downloaded new message headers or partial messages, you can disconnect from the e-mail server and then decide which messages to download completely. The next time you connect, Inbox 64 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile downloads the complete messages you have marked for retrieval and sends the messages you have composed. Setting Up or Changing an Account To set up a a POP3 or IMAP4 e-mail account, tap Menu > Tools >
Options > New Account. Follow instructions in the New Account Wizard. To set up an SMS account, tap Menu > Switch Accounts, and then tap SMS. Follow the instructions on the screen. To change options for an account, tap Menu > Tools > Options > the name of the account, and follow the instructions on the screen. To delete an account, tap Menu > Tools > Options, tap and hold the name of the account, and then tap Delete. Note: You can set up several e-mail accounts including your ActiveSync account, but you can set up only one SMS account, which you cannot delete once it is set up. Downloading Messages from the Server Note that receiving entire messages consumes storage memory. The size column in the message list displays the local size and server size of a message. Even when a message has downloaded fully, these numbers may differ because the size of a message can vary between the server and the CN3. 1 Tap Menu > Switch Accounts and ensure that the account you want to use is selected (marked by a bullet.) 2 The messages on your CN3 and e-mail server are synchronized. Tap a message in the message list to open it. 3 If you read a message and decide that you need the full copy, tap Menu >
Download Message while in the message window. If you are in the message list, tap and hold the message, and then tap Download Message. This also downloads message attachments if you selected those options when you set up the e-mail account. You can also choose to download full copies of messages by default. 4 When finished, close Messaging. Composing and Sending Messages If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was received, before sending the message, tap Menu > Message Options > Request SMS text message delivery notification. Depending on the e-mail address options that you select, you can use a directory service in addition to your contact list to verify names. To compose a message 1 In the message list, tap New. 2 To select an account, tap the From list and select ActiveSync, SMS, or the desired e-mail account. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 65 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 3 Enter the e-mail address or SMS address of one or more recipients, separating them with semicolons. To access addresses and phone numbers from Contacts, tap To. 4 Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, tap Menu > My Text, select a desired message. 5 To check spelling, tap Edit > Spell Check. 6 Tap Send. If you are working offline, the message is moved to the
\Outbox folder and is sent the next time you connect. Companion Programs Word Mobile Companion programs include Word Mobile, Excel Mobile, and PowerPoint Mobile, and Windows Media Player. To switch to a companion program on your CN3, tap Start > Programs > the program name. Word Mobile works with Microsoft Word on your desktop to give you access to copies of your documents. You can create new documents on your CN3, or you can copy documents from your desktop to your CN3. Synchronize documents between your desktop and your CN3 to have up-
to-date content in both locations. Creating a Document Use Word Mobile to create documents, such as letters or meeting minutes. To create a new file, tap Start > Programs > the Word Mobile icon > New. You get either a blank document or a template, depending on what you have selected under Menu > Tools > Options. For future use, this is added to your Start menu in the Recent Programs area, via Start > Word Mobile. You can open only one document at a time; when you open a second document, you have to save the first. You can save a document you create or edit in formats such as Word (.doc), Pocket Word (.psw), Rich Text Format
(.rtf), and Plain Text (.txt). 66 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Word Mobile contains a list of files stored on your CN3. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files, tap and hold a file in the list, then, select the action on the pop-up menu. Tap to change the sort order of the list Tap to open a document Tap and hold an item to see a pop-up menu Tap to create a new document You can enter information in Word Mobile in by typing or writing. Each mode has its own toolbar, which you can show and hide by tapping the Input Panel icon in the center of the command bar. You can change the zoom magnification by tapping View > Zoom, then select the percentage you want. Select a higher percentage to enter text and a lower one to see more of your document. If you are opening a Word document created on a desktop, you may select View > Wrap to Window so that you can see the entire document. To check spelling, select text, then tap Menu > Tools > Spelling. To use new documents as templates, move the documents to the Templates folder. You can insert the data in a document. Tap and hold anywhere on the document, then tap Insert Date from the pop-up menu. Typing Mode Using the input panel, enter typed text into the document. For more information on entering typed text, see Basic Usage on page 30. To format existing text and to edit text, first select the text. You can select text as you do in a Word document, using your stylus instead of the mouse to drag through the text you want to select. You can search a document to CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 67 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile find text by tapping Menu > Edit > Find/Replace. Tap to return to the document list Tap and hold to see a pop-up menu Tap to format text Writing Mode In writing mode, use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Ruled lines are displayed as a guide, and the zoom magnification is greater than in typing mode to allow you to write more easily. For more information on writing and selecting writing, see Basic Usage on page 30. Written words are converted to graphics (metafiles) when a Pocket Word document is converted to a Word document on your desktop. Synchronizing Word Mobile Documents Word Mobile documents can be synchronized with Word documents on your desktop. To synchronize files, first select the Files information type for synchronization in ActiveSync. When you select Files, the My Documents folder for the CN3 is created on your desktop. Place all files you want to synchronize with the CN3 in this folder. Password-protected files cannot be synchronized. All Word Mobile files stored in My Documents and its subfolders are synchronized with the desktop. ActiveSync converts documents during synchronization. For more information on synchronization or file conversion, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. When you delete a file on either your desktop or your CN3, the file is deleted in the other location the next time you synchronize. 68 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Excel Mobile Chapter 2 Windows Mobile You can create and edit workbooks and templates in Excel Mobile as you do in Microsoft Excel on your desktop. Excel Mobile workbooks are usually saved as .PXL files, but you can also save them in .XLS format. When you close a workbook, it is automatically named and placed in the Excel Mobile workbook list. Creating a Workbook Use Excel Mobile to create workbooks, such as expense reports and mileage logs. To create a new file, tap Start > Programs > the Excel Mobile icon >
New to access a blank workbook. Or, if you have selected a template for new workbooks under the Menu > Tools > Options, that template appears with appropriate text and formatting already provided. For future use, this is added to your Start menu in the Recent Programs area, via Start > Excel Mobile. You can open only one workbook at a time. Save the first workbook before you open the second workbook. You can save a workbook in formats such as Pocket Excel (.PXL) and Excel (.XLS). You can also save a workbook as a template by moving the workbook to the \Templates folder. Excel Mobile contains a list of the files stored on your CN3. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, send files, tap and hold a file in the list, then select the appropriate action from the menu. Excel Mobile provides fundamental spreadsheet tools, such as formulas, functions, sorting, and filtering. Tap View > Toolbar to see the toolbar. Cell contents appear here as you enter them Autosum icon Tips for Working in Excel Mobile Note the following when working in large worksheets in Excel Mobile:
View in full-screen mode to see as much of the worksheet as possible. Tap View > Full Screen. Tap View > Full Screen to exit the full screen. Tap View > Zoom and select a percentage so that you can easily read the worksheet. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 69 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile PowerPoint Mobile Show and hide window elements. Tap View > Show, then tap the elements you want to show or hide. Freeze panes on a worksheet. First select the cell where to freeze panes. Tap View > Freeze Panes. You might want to freeze the top and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels visible as you scroll through a sheet. Tap View > Unfreeze Panes to undo this process. Split panes to view different areas of a large worksheet. Tap View > Split. Then drag the split bar to where you want it. To remove the split, tap View > Remove Split. For more information on using Excel Mobile, tap Start > Help. With PowerPoint Mobile on your CN3, you can open and view slide show presentations created on your PC. Whether the presentation is opened from an e-mail message, downloaded from a file share or the Internet, copied to the CN3 via a storage card, or obtained by synchronizing with your PC, slide shows created in .PPT and .PPS format with PowerPoint 97 and later can be viewed on your CN3. Many presentation elements built into the slide shows such as slide transitions and animations will play back on the device. If the presentation is set up as a timed slide show, one slide will advance to the next automatically. Links to URLs are also supported. For more information on PowerPoint Mobile while you are in this application, tap Start > Help, then select a topic. To Start a Slide Show Presentation For future use, this is added to your Start menu in the Recent Programs area, via Start > PowerPoint Mobile. 1 To start a slide show presentation, tap Start > Programs > the PowerPoint Mobile icon. 2 In the presentation list, tap the slide show you want to view. 3 Tap the current slide to advance to the next slide. If the presentation is set up as a timed slide show, slides will advance automatically. 70 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 4 To view a PowerPoint Mobile presentation in portrait, or right-handed or left-handed landscape orientations, tap the slide icon (in the bottom, left corner of the following illustration) for a pop-up menu. 5 Tap Show Options > the Orientation tab, then select an orientation. 6 Tap Default to view the presentation in the orientation that best fits the size and shape of the screen. Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile Tap Start > Windows Media. For more information about using Windows Media, tap Start > Help, then select a topic. Use Microsoft Windows Media Player on your desktop to copy digital audio and video files to your CN3. You can play Windows Media and MP3 files on your Windows Mobile. Tap to download from the internet Indicates the current track progress Tap to adjust the volume Tap to skip to the next song Tap to play the previous song Tap to play or pause CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 71 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Internet Explorer Mobile Use Internet Explorer Mobile to view web pages in these ways:
During synchronization with your desktop, download your favorite links and mobile favorites that are stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in Internet Explorer on the desktop. Connect to an ISP or network and browse the web. To do this, create the connection first, as described in Remote Access (Modems) on page 139. When connected to an ISP or network, you can also download files and programs from the Internet or intranet. To switch to Internet Explorer Mobile on your CN3, tap Start > Internet Explorer. During synchronization, the list of favorite links in the Mobile Favorites folder on your desktop is synchronized with Internet Explorer Mobile on your CN3. Both computers are updated with changes made to either list each time you synchronize. Unless you mark the favorite link as a mobile favorite, only the link is downloaded to your CN3. Connect to your ISP or network to view the content. 1 In ActiveSync on your desktop, click Tools > Options, and select Favorites from the Windows PC list. For more information on using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. 2 In Internet Explorer on your desktop, save or move favorite links to the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites list via Favorites > Organize Favorites. For more information on using Internet Explorer, see Internet Explorer Help on the desktop. 3 Connect your CN3 to your desktop. If synchronization does not start automatically, in ActiveSync on your desktop, click Sync. Only items stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folder in Internet Explorer on your desktop are synchronized with your CN3. This folder was created automatically when you installed ActiveSync. If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later on your desktop, you can download mobile favorites to your CN3. Synchronizing mobile favorites downloads web content to your CN3 so that you can view pages while you are disconnected from your ISP and desktop. Use the Internet Explorer plug-in installed with ActiveSync to create mobile favorites quickly. Favorite Links Mobile Favorites 72 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile To create a mobile favorite 1 In ActiveSync on your desktop, click Tools > Options, and select Favorites from the Windows PC list. For more information on using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. 2 In Internet Explorer 5.0 or greater on your desktop, browse to the page you want to view offline, then click Tools > Create Mobile Favorite. 3 To change the link name, enter a new name in the Name box. 4 In the Update box, select a desired update schedule to keep the page in the Mobile Favorites folder up to date. You can also update content by clicking Tools > Synchronize in Internet Explorer. 5 To save the link in a subfolder of Mobile Favorites, click Create In and select the desired subfolder. 6 Click OK. Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the page to your desktop. 7 To download the pages that are linked to the mobile favorite you just created, in Internet Explorer on the desktop, right-click the mobile favorite, then click Properties. On the Download tab, specify the number of links deep you want to download. To conserve CN3 memory, go only one level deep. 8 Connect your CN3 to your desktop. If synchronization between your CN3 and desktop does not start, in ActiveSync on your desktop, click Sync. Mobile favorites take up storage memory on your CN3. To minimize the amount of memory used:
In the settings for the Favorites information, type in ActiveSync options, turn off pictures and sounds, or stop downloading some mobile favorites to the CN3. For more information, see ActiveSync Help. Limit the number of downloaded linked pages. In Internet Explorer on the desktop, right-click the mobile favorite you want to change and then Properties. In the Download tab, specify 0 or 1 for the number of linked pages you want to download. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 73 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile Using Internet Explorer Mobile You can use Internet Explorer Mobile to browse mobile favorites and channels that were downloaded to your CN3 without connecting to the Internet. You can also connect to the Internet through an ISP or a network connection and browse the web. Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels 1 Tap Favorites, or Menu > Favorites to display your list of favorites. 2 Tap the page you want to view. Tap the favorite you want to view Tap to add or remove a folder or link 3 The page that was downloaded the last time you synchronized with your desktop opens. If the page is not on your CN3, the favorite is dimmed. Synchronize with your desktop again to download the page to your CN3, or connect to the Internet to view the page. Browsing the Internet Set up a connection to your ISP or corporate network using Connections, as described in Remote Access (Modems) on page 139. Tap Favorites, or Menu > Favorites, and then tap the favorite to view, in the address bar that appears at the top of the screen; enter the web address you want to visit, then tap Enter, and tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses; or while using the CN3, go to the page you want to add, tap and hold on the page, and tap Add to Favorites to add favorites. 74 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 3Configuring the Computer There are multiple ways to get an application to your CN3 Mobile Computer like there are multiple ways to package the application for delivery. Note: Desktop icons and settings icons are shown to the left. Any place that Start is mentioned, tap the following Windows icon in the top, left corner of your CN3 desktop. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 75 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer Developing Applications for the Computer CN3s run applications programmed in Microsoft Visual Studios 2005. Use this chapter to understand what you need to develop a new application for the CN3. Note: Microsoft eMbedded Visual C++ 4.0 may be used, but some features are not available. To develop applications for your CN3, use the Resource Kits in the Intermec Developer Library (IDL). Download the IDL from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/idl. Contact your Intermec representative for more information. You need the following hardware and software components to use the resource kits:
Pentium desktop, 400 MHz or higher Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later) or Windows XP (Home, Professional, or Server) For native and managed development, Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 128 MB RAM (196 MB recommended) 360 MB hard drive space for minimum installation (720 MB for complete) CD-ROM drive compatible with multimedia desktop specification VGA or higher-resolution monitor (Super VGA recommended) Microsoft Mouse or compatible pointing device Packaging Applications for the Computer Use any of these methods to package applications for installation:
Package an application as a cabinet (CAB) file. (Recommended) For simple applications, the application itself may be the file to deliver. It could be a directory structure that contains the application, supporting files like ActiveX controls, DLLs, images, sound files, and data files. Consider any of these when choosing a storage location for applications:
In the basic CN3, there are two built-in storage options: the Object Store and the Flash File Store. The Object Store, or User Store, is a Disk on Chip (DOC) Flash that looks like a disk. The Flash File Store is an area of storage which is embedded in a section of the systems FLASH memory. This storage area is not erased during a clean-boot. If the optional Secure Digital storage card is in the system, then consider this card the primary location for placing an applications install files. This storage card creates the \Storage Card folder. 76 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer Use the small nonvolatile Flash File Store region to hold CAB files that rebuild the system at clean-boot or install applications from a CAB file into the Flash File Store so they are ready-to-run when a clean-boot is performed. Since the FLASH in the system has a limited number of write cycles, do not use the Flash File Store for excessive writing purposes; however, reading is okay. Installing Applications on the Computer Any of these options can move items to locations on your CN3:
Microsoft ActiveSync FTP Server Secure Digital storage cards SmartSystems Console Wavelink Avalanche InstallSelect This section describes each option. Using Microsoft ActiveSync You can use Microsoft ActiveSync to establish a connection between your desktop and the CN3. Microsoft ActiveSync transfers files, synchronizes files, remote debugging, and other device management activities. See Chapter 2, Windows Mobile for information about the Microsoft ActiveSync application as provided by Microsoft Corporation. This can be a USB Microsoft ActiveSync connection. Files can be copied using Windows Explorer on a desktop or a laptop computer. This is usually good when updating few CN3s. These instructions assume that Microsoft ActiveSync was installed onto your desktop and is up and running. If not, go to Chapter 2, Windows Mobile for an URL from which to download the latest application. To connect your CN3 to your desktop 1 Connect your CN3 to your desktop using a USB cable. You may have to detach, then reattach the cable to wake the connection. 2 Wait for a Connected message to appear in ActiveSync to signal a connection to the CN3. If necessary, select File > Get Connected to initiate a connection or detach, then reattach the USB cable. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 77 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer 3 Click Explore to access the \Mobile Device folder on your CN3. 4 From your desktop, select Start > Windows Explorer, then browse the C:\Intermec\CN3 Mgmt Tools\CabFiles path for any CAB files needed for your CN3. Select the appropriate file, right-click the file for a pop-up menu, then select Copy. 5 Within the \My Windows Mobile-Based Device directory, go to the directory where you want the files located on the CN3, do a right-click for a pop-up menu, then select Paste. 6 When all the files are pasted, perform a clean-boot on the CN3. When the computer reboots, wait for the LED on the top-left of the keypad to stop blinking. Tap Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to locate the new, copied executable files, then tap these files to activate their utilities. Using the FTP Server Using a Storage Card The CN3 has a built-in FTP Server that connects to a network via Ethernet, 802.11b, or WAN (Wireless Access Network). This allows connections to the CN3 to perform file transfers or computer management functions. Another benefit is you can create FTP scripts to automate the process of copying files to the CN3. This option is good for when a large number of CN3 computers need updating. To enable or disable the FTP server, you need to use iConnect. For more information, see iConnect on page 147. If you have a miniSD storage card for your CN3, this is the best place for you to installation applications. To install applications using a storage card 1 If you are using a Secure Digital card reader, suspend the CN3, remove its miniSD storage card, insert it in a miniSD adapter card, then place it in the reader. For help, see Using the Storage Card on page 24. 78 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer 2 Copy your application file to the miniSD card. If you are using Microsoft ActiveSync to copy the files to the miniSD card, place the application in the \Storage Card folder on the CN3. 3 If using a Secure Digital card reader, insert the miniSD card back into the CN3. 4 Navigate to the \Storage Card folder and run your application. After your application is installed, you can run it from the Programs menu. Using the SmartSystems Console You can use the SmartSystems Console to drag-and-drop Intermec applications onto your CN3s. The CN3 ships with the SmartSystems client loaded on it. The console is part of SmartSystems Foundation and is available from the Intermec web site. To use SmartSystems Console to install an application file 1 Download the file from the Intermec web site, unzip it on your desktop. 2 From the SmartSystems Console, drag-and-drop the application onto each CN3 discovered in your network. To download SmartSystems Foundation, go to www.intermec.com/idl and open the Device Management page. For information on using the SmartSystems Console, see its online help. Using Wavelink Avalanche You can use the Wavelink Avalanche device management system to install applications on all of your wireless CN3s. Contact your Intermec representative or visit the Wavelink web site at www.wavelink.com for more information on using Wavelink Avalanche. Note: If you manually activate the Avalanche Enabler on the CN3, you may be prompted for a password when you exit the Avalanche Enabler. The default password is leave. When the Avalanche Enabler is activated, the CN3 attempts to connect to the Avalanche Agent. When the CN3 connects to the agent, the agent determines whether an update is available and immediately starts the software upgrade, file transfer, or configuration update. To use Avalanche to remotely manage the CN3 1 Use the Avalanche Management Console to install software packages and updates for the CN3. See the Console online help for information. 2 Schedule the CN3 updates or manually initiate an update using the Avalanche Management Console. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 79 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer Using InstallSelect Note: This application should only be used by administrators, developers, integrators, or Intermec representatives. InstallSelect manages the installation of value-added software features of the CN3. Removal of software features may result in loss of device functionality, or the ability to manage device settings. See Understanding Software Feature Descriptions on page 81 or contact your Intermec representative for information about each software feature before making changes. You can use the InstallSelect application to reduce the amount of virtual memory used by portions of the SmartSystems Platform Bundle (SSPB). See SmartSystems Platform Bundles (SSPB) on page 21 for more information about SSPB. Freeing up virtual memory provides you with more space to load and run custom applications. In technical terms, virtual memory allows software to run in a memory address space whose size and addressing are not necessarily tied to the physical memory of the CN3. InstallSelect is not intended to be run with any other application. After the clean boot is performed, the applications cleared (unchecked) from the list shown in InstallSelect are not installed. You can reinstall any of these SSPB components using InstallSelect. Be sure to back up any related files that you wish to retain before you proceed. See Clean Boot Process on page 5 for more information about performing the clean boot. Using the InstallSelect Application The InstallSelect application is included in the SSPB, which is installed at the factory. To use the InstallSelect application 1 Select Start > Programs > the File Explorer icon. 2 Browse to the \Windows folder, then scroll down to and select the InstallSelect application. 80 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer 3 By default, components already installed on the CN3 are checked to be installed again after you perform a clean boot on the CN3. Check additional components you do want installed after a clean boot is performed. Clear (uncheck) any components you do not want installed after the clean boot. Note: When a component is not checked, the components listed after this component will appear as if they are not checked after the clean boot is performed. However, if you had checked these components before the clean boot, they will have been installed on the CN3 after the clean boot. 4 Click Apply to initiate the clean boot and install only the files that are checked. Click Cancel to disregard any selections you made and close the InstallSelect application. 5 If you clicked Apply, then click Yes to continue with the clean boot. After the CN3 has finished with its clean boot, you should find all of the checked components installed. Understanding Software Feature Descriptions The following table shows the friendly name that you may see in InstallSelect and its underlying filename. Note that the list of files varies by product so you will see a different list on the CN3 versus the CV30 Fixed CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 81 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer Mount Computer. Also, the underlying filenames includes the product name (such as CV30) that is represented by product in the table. InstallSelect Software Features Friendly Name Data Collection & Intermec Settings Funk Wireless Security Printer Support Avalanche Enabler Description Data Collection and Intermec Settings or Data Collection, Intermec Settings, and on-unit SDK libraries. Intermec Security Supplicant -
Provides a wireless security solution with several features that are unsupported by Microsoft (this replaces MS zero config). Provides Intermec printer driver support. Provides client enablement to Wavelink's Device Management solution. Filename ITCIVAproduct.cab SuppRCMagneto.cab PrinterSupport.cab WLEnablerproduct.cab SmartSystems Client & Intermec Settings Provides client enablement to the Screen Magnifier Application TE2000 Intermec DHCP Client Wavelink Emulator Bluetooth Connection Service Release SmartSystems Server and enables the use of Intermec Settings on the local computer. Magnifies or enlarges a selected portion of the display. This is the terminal emulation application that provides support for VT/ANSI, 3270, 5250, and Native emulations. This is the Intermec DHCP client application. This is the Wavelink terminal emulation client application. This is a service release CAB file that corrects a Bluetooth connection issue. SSRefClient_WM50_ARMV41.cab magnifier.cab TE_product.cab Intermec_DHCP.cab WLTNproduct.cab SR062700.cab Notes:
SmartSystems Client & Intermec Settings:
If a user disables this CAB file, they cannot use SmartSystems and they also cannot use Intermec Settings locally on the device. Data Collection & Intermec Settings:
If a user disables this CAB file, they cannot scan or collect data on the device and they cannot use Intermec Settings because the executable file is not extracted from the CAB file. We used the ampersand symbol (&) to keep the names shorter. The CN3 display in this application can show about 40 characters without scrolling. 82 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Launching Your Application Automatically Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer Note: This describes the system component startup for Intermec provided components only. It does not describe the bootstrap loader process. It only describes the component installation process provided by Windows Mobile. It is assumed that you understand the Microsoft Mobile startup procedures and are familiar with how Microsoft components start up. You can configure the various media used in the Windows Mobile system with a folder name and can change the media in the registry of the system. Many of the startup components rely on folder names to locate information files, applications, or other related data. The registry keys used by FolderCopy and other startup components to retrieve the folder names are as follows:
Flash File Store
[HKLM\Drivers\BuiltIn\FlshDrv]
FolderName=Flash File Store SD Card (Storage Card)
[HKLM\System\StorageManager\Profiles\SDMemory]
Folder=Storage Card Disk On Chip
[HKLM\System\StorageManager\Profiles\TRUEFFS_DOC]
Folder=DiskOnChip During normal Windows Mobile system startup, there are Intermec-
specific and non-Intermec components that require an orderly start to properly function. These non-Intermec components may also need to start themselves so the Windows Mobile device can function properly. Since there are possible configurations that come from using one or more optional built-in peripheral devices, the platform components starting on the next page are required to manage startup. System components are installed and configured during the power up process from a single starting point. RunAutoRun (RunAutoRun.exe), built into the operating system image and located in the \Windows\Startup folder, checks for AutoExec (AutoExec.exe) in a \SYSTEM folder on a mounted volume in this order: miniSD, Object Store (or User Store), which may be non-volatile storage or RAM, Disk on Chip which may map as Object Store, and Flash File Store which may map as Object Store
(default location for the AutoExec program in Intermec systems). Intermec system applications start from this folder. However, the ordering of mounted volumes does override this feature. Folder names used for the mounted volumes above are retrieved from the registry to maintain coherence with the naming of the mounted volumes on the platform. These folder names are not hard-coded. If AutoExec is RunAutoRun CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 83 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer present in the \SYSTEM folder on any of these media, it executes the program only on the first media it is found on and no other. AutoExec is reserved for Intermec use to configure Intermec-specific applications. It launches the CAB installer, AutoCab (AutoCab.exe), to install platform cab files to the system, such as Intermec Data Collection. When the AutoExec is complete, RunAutorun then checks for the existence of AutoRun (AutoRun.exe) and executes this program from the first media it is found on. This order is the same as what is used by AutoExec. AutoRun is reserved for customer use to configure application launch sequences. It launches the AutoCab installer and any customer programs added to the AutoUser.dat file. Shown is the hierarchy of these files:
runautorun autoexec autorun autocopy autoreg foldercopy autocab customer applications autocab AutoExec (AutoExec.exe) automates operations such as pausing, launching processes, or signaling, and is configured through the AutoExec data file
(AutoExec.dat). This script file must be in the same directory as the program itself. Note: Intermec considers the usage of the AutoExec data file as Intermec Private. AutoExec installs Intermec applications such as Data Collection, Security Supplicants, Intermec Management, and shortcuts from components found in the Flash File System. Do not modify the AutoExec data file. Instead, use the AutoRun program to add software components. Usage:
AutoExec [-%[W]] [-E=["X"]] [-F=["Y"]] [-LOG=] [-W=[Z]]
-E
-F Passes an ID to use in a call to SignalStarted. This argument is useful only during system startup that relies on a SignalStarted to call. W is an integer value. Passes a signal event name to use when autoexec completes. X is a string value. Overrides the data file to use. This must be a fully qualified name. Default is autoexec.dat in the same location as the AutoExec.exe program. Y is a string value.
-LOG Set to any value logs activity to AutoExec.txt (in the same location as the AutoExec.exe program). Default is disabled. AutoExec 84 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer
-W Pauses the autoexec process by calling sleep for the number of seconds specified by Z. Z is an integer value. Process return code uses standard error codes defined in WinError.h. Keywords that AutoExec supports are:
Enables user notification when an error occurs. QUIET LOGGING Enables logging to a trace file. SIGNAL CALL RUN LOAD EXEC Enables the specified named event and is immediately signaled. Useful for notifying other components of the current status. Opens another .dat file to process. After the called file is completed, this file is resumed. Runs a program with a SW_SHOWNORMAL attribute. Autoexec does not wait for the child process to exit. Runs a program with a SW_HIDE attribute. Autoexec waits for 60 seconds for the child process to exit or EXECWAIT seconds if set. Runs the specified program. AutoExec waits 60 seconds for the child process to exit or EXECWAIT seconds if set. EXECWAIT Changes the default EXEC wait time from 60 seconds to the number of seconds specified. There is a maximum 10-minute limit imposed. Forces a sleep for the specified number of seconds to occur. WAIT WAITFOR Forces a sleep until the named event is signaled. Examples of keyword usage are as follows:
; Allow message pop up if an error occurs. QUIET 0
; Log any debug output to a trace file. LOGGING 1
; Perform a SetEvent on the event name "autoexec_started". SIGNAL "autoexec_started"
; Include this child data file, childexec.dat. CALL "\childexec.dat"
; Use autocopy to copy the audio control panel from flash file store to the windows directory. Wait for up to 60 seconds for it to exit. EXEC "\Flash File Store\SYSTEM\autocopy.exe" -S"\Flash File Store\System\CPLAudio.cpl" -D"\Windows\CPLAudio.cpl"
; Change the default EXEC wait time to 90 seconds. EXECWAIT 90
; Suspend processing any commands for 10 seconds. WAIT 10
; Suspend processing any commands until event called MyEventName is signaled. WAITFOR "MyEventName"
AutoRun AutoRun (AutoRun.exe) automates operations such as launching other processes and is configured through the AutoRun data file (AutoRun.dat). This file must be in the same directory as the program itself. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 85 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer AutoRun supports the following script commands in AutoUser.dat and AutoRun.dat. Note: If you need to add steps at boot time, add them to AutoUser.dat, not to AutoRun.dat. AutoRun.dat is provided by Intermec and is subject to change. AutoUser.dat is the designated place for the end user to add steps to the boot time process. Loads a specified program and executes it. Loads a specified program and executes it. Launches a specified program, waits for it to complete (up to 10 minutes). Processes a specified file of commands and returns. EXEC CALL CHAIN Processes a specified file of commands and does not return. RUN LOAD AutoRun handles quoted file names for the first parameter to allow specifying path names or file names that contain white space. Note only one set of quotes per command is supported. AutoRun.dat entry examples:
RUN CALL Flash File Store\Apps\some.exe arg1, arg2, arg3 Flash File Store\2577\usercmds.dat AutoCopy AutoCopy (AutoCopy.exe) copies/moves files between locations. It has no user interface and is configured through command line arguments. It has support for the following parameters, in no particular order:
Usage:
AutoCopy [-D["W"]] [-L["X"]] [-M[D]] [-Q[Y]] [-S["Z"]]
-D
-L
-M
-Q
-S Indicates the destination file name and must be fully qualified. W is a string value. Indicates a fully qualified file name for logging to enable. Default is disabled. X is a string value. Moves file to a destination rather than copies the file. Default value is disabled. D is an integer value. D=1 indicates enabled, 0 is disabled. Indicates if a message box should appear when an error occurs. Default is disabled. Y is an integer value. Indicates a source file name and must be fully qualified. Z is a string value. Process return code uses standard error codes defined in WinError.h. Example:
; use AutoCopy to copy the control panel from flash file store to windows. autocopy.exe -S"\Flash File Store\System\Audio.cpl" -D"\Windows\Audio.cpl"
; use AutoCopy to move the control panel from flash file store to windows. autocopy.exe -M1 -S"\Flash File Store\System\Audio.cpl" -D"\Windows\Audio.cpl"
AutoReg The AutoReg (AutoReg.exe) component adds registry information to the Windows Mobile registry. It has no user interface and is configured through command line arguments. 86 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer Usage:
AutoReg [-D] [-HKey] [-Q] filename
-D
-H
-Q filename Deletes the registry file after successfully loading it. This allows for systems that have hives implemented. Saves the registry path, and all child entries, to the specific .REG registry file. Indicates whether a message box should appear when a fatal error occurs. Fully qualified file name to read from or write to, encased in double quotes to support spaces in paths or file names. See examples below. Process return code uses standard error codes defined in WinError.h. Example:
; use AutoReg to install this registry information. autoreg.exe "\Flash File Store\install.reg"
; use AutoReg to install this registry information. Delete the file afterwards. autoreg.exe -D "\Flash File Store\install.reg"
; use AutoReg to extract registry information to a file. autoreg.exe -HHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Intermec\Version "\version.reg"
The format of the input file, in this example, is the standard registry format which should ease the creation of the input file since there are many publicly available utilities to generate a registry file besides Notepad. One example of a tool is the Microsoft Remote Registry Editor. AutoCab AutoCab (AutoCab.exe) extracts files, registry settings, and shortcuts from Windows Mobile cabinet (.cab) files. The Windows Mobile startup sequence invokes AutoCab as a part of AutoExec and AutoRun. During the Windows Mobile startup sequence, AutoCab processes all cab files in the
\CabFiles directory relative to the current location of Autocab, unless the location is overridden by command line arguments. AutoCab can run as a stand-alone program to install a cab file or a directory of cab files. AutoCab only installs the cab file if it was not installed before by AutoCab. To track the installation of a cab file, AutoCab marks the cab file with the System attribute. This attribute is ignored if the device is performing a clean-boot on a non-persistent file system. AutoCab preserves the cab file after installation if the ReadOnly attribute is set. If not set, the cab file is deleted automatically after installation. Command line switches are described as follows. Usage:
AutoCab [-ChkRst=][-File=][-Force][-Log=][-Move=][-Quiet=][-Show=][-Signal=]
-ChkRst=
-File=
-Force
-Log=
Set to 1 to configure AutoCab to check for the Reset flag after all cab files are installed. This file is created by cab files that want a clean reset after installation. Default is 0 (do not check for flag). Specifies the cab files to extract. Note that the specified files need not end with the .cab extension. Forces the specified cab files to extract regardless of whether it was previously extracted. Set to 1 to create a log file in the same folder that AutoCab is running. Useful for debugging cab installation. Default is 0 (disabled). CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 87 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer
-Move=
-Quiet=
-Show=
-Signal=
Set to 1 to force source cab file deletion, even when read-only bit set on file. Default is 0 (disabled). Set to 0 to allow AutoCab to display user message box on errors. Useful for debugging cab installation. Default is 1 (keep quiet). Set to 0 to prevent showing any installation progress interfaces. Also prevents user from canceling installation. Set to 1 to show normal installation. Set to 2 to show Intermec installation progress interface
(user can see what is installing but cannot cancel it). Default is 1 (show normal). Set to string name of signal to use at the completion of cab installation before a reboot occurs (if enabled). AutoCab uses WaitForSingleObject on this name. Default is disabled. If <PathName> references a single cab file, that file is processed. If
<PathName> references a directory, all the .cab files in that directory is processed. If <PathName> is a wild card pattern, all files matching that pattern is processed, If <PathName> is omitted, InstallCab processes all the
.cab files in directory \CabFiles. Example:
; Install all cab files in the \Flash File Store\XYZ directory, regardless. AutoCab -FILE="\Flash File Store\XYZ\.cab" -FORCE
; Install only one cab file, use Intermec cab installation display AutoCab -FILE=\myCab\app.cab =show=2 Customizing How Applications Load on the Computer If you have several processes that you need running in a specific order as the CN3 turns on, you can use the AutoRun system to customize the way applications load. For compatibility with other Intermec computers, you can place a copy of AutoRun.exe in the same folder as your AutoRun.dat file but it is not required. To create and install the AutoRun.dat file on your Computer 1 On the CN3, create a folder called SYSTEM. 2 On your desktop, open the Notepad application. 3 Write commands for AutoRun.dat using these supported script commands:
Script Command Description EXEC CALL Launches a specified program and waits up to 10 minutes for it to complete. Processes a specified file of commands, returns. When you use the CALL command, the execution of the current file pauses while a new file that follows the same set of commands executes. Once the new file completes executing, AutoRun.exe processes the current file. Processes a specified file of commands and does not return. This command calls another file that follows the same set of commands and stops processing the current file. Loads a specified program and executes it. Specifies the show window attribute so that the user interface is visible when the application launches. Loads a specified program and executes it. Specifies the hide window attribute so the user interface is hidden initially. 4 Save this Notepad file as AutoRun.dat. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual CHAIN RUN LOAD 88 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer 5 Copy the AutoRun.dat file to the \SYSTEM folder on your CN3. During every boot, the system scans for AutoRun.dat in the \SYSTEM folder. Here is a sample AutoRun.dat file that runs a dialer application and connects to a VPN:
EXEC \Program Files\My Dialer\Dialer.exe 348-2600 EXEC \Program Files\My VPN\Connect.exe MyDomain Configuring Parameters You can configure many parameters on the CN3, such as the bar code symbologies it decodes or the network settings. These characteristics are controlled by configuration parameters. The values you set for these configuration parameters determine how the computer operates. Use configuration commands to configure the CN3. Configuring the Computer With Intermec Settings Use Intermec Settings to configure the CN3 and view system information. You can access Intermec Settings while running any application. To access Intermec Settings From the CN3 desktop, select Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. For detailed information on most of the commands available in Intermec Settings, see the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual (P/N 073529) via the Intermec web site. Go to Before You Begin for access information. Synchronizing the Computer System Time with a Time Server It is important that the time on all of your CN3s be synchronized with a network time server to ensure real-time communications and updates. Network time servers acquire Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) from an outside source such as the U.S. Naval Observatory (USNO). The CN3 uses CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 89 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) to synchronize with a network time server. The default reference time server is the USNO (tock.usno.navy.mil). To synchronize the time on your CN3 with this time server, you must have a valid connection to the Internet. You can also synchronize the CN3 system time with a corporate network server within your firewall that is SNTP-
capable. To use an internal corporate network server, you need to set the command name in the registry. Configuring the Computer through the Network You can change the configuration parameters of the CN3 by sending commands through a host computer or through the network. If you are using a network, you can configure one or more CN3s at a time. You can remotely configure the wireless CN3 by sending a command from an application on the host computer. Note: You cannot set all parameters through the network. You can only set those commands that have a syntax in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. Note: You can continue running an application on the CN3 while configuring it from the host computer. Configuring the Computer in a TCP/IP Direct Connect Network Use the host computer to configure a wireless CN3 in a TCP/IP network. To send and receive configuration data, write a host application that can communicate with the CN3 directly through an access point or through the network. Use the TMF protocol to send and receive transactions between the host application and the CN3. To set up the host computer, verify communication with the CN3. To set up the application, prepare and write a host application that can communicate with the IAS and send transactions to and receive transactions from the CN3 in this format:
TMF field where:
TMF field commands A 2-byte field containing one of these values:
CG Cg Configuration Get request sent from the host application. Configuration Get response sent from the CN3 to the host computer. Configuration Set request sent from the host application. Configuration Set response sent from the CN3 to the host computer. CS Cs commands The reader and configuration commands to set on the CN3 or the current value to retrieve from the CN3. To save configuration changes in flash memory, send the .+1 reader command as the last command. See the Command Reference Manual for a list of commands. 90 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer Example In the host application, you want to get the current values of two configuration commands from the CN3. Send the CG$+NABV transaction from the host application Note: The transaction header is not shown in this example. You do not need a transaction header for a host application in a TCP/IP network, but you do for a UDP Plus network. where:
CG
BV The computer returns the CgS+BV4 transaction to the host application:
Cg
BV4 is a TMF Configuration Get response. is the Change Configuration reader command. means the Beeper Volume configuration command is set to a value of 4, which is a very high beeper volume. is a TMF Configuration Get request. is the Change Configuration reader command. is the Beeper Volume configuration command. Configuring the Computer in a UDP Plus Network Use the host computer to configure a CN3 in your wireless network. To send and receive configuration data or files, write a host application that can communicate with an Intermec Application Server (IAS), formerly Gateway or DCS 30X. For help, see the appropriate Gateway or DCS 30X Users Manual. Use the Terminal Message Format (TMF) protocol to send and receive transactions between the host application and the CN3. To set up the IAS, configure a peer-to-peer destination name for the host application. Create a $NGCFGRSP transaction ID that routes to this destination name. The IAS uses the transaction ID to route responses from the CN3 back to the host application. $NGCFGRSP is a special transaction ID that the server uses to forward configuration response data from a CN3. All configuration responses are routed with the $NGCFGRSP transaction ID. The IAS cannot track multiple applications sending reader or configuration commands. If you have two host applications sending reader or configuration commands, they must both be configured to receive the
$NGCFGRSP transactions, and receive all CN3 responses. To set up the host computer, verify host computer-to-IAS communication. To set up the application, prepare and write a host application that can communicate with the IAS and send transactions to and receive transactions from the CN3 in this format. TMF field transaction header where:
commands CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 91 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer transaction header TMF field commands A 96-byte field with message number, date, time, source application ID, destinations application ID, transaction ID, and other. Set the system message (SYS$MSG) flag to E in the transaction header. A 2-byte field containing one of these values:
CG Cg Configuration Get request sent from the host application. Configuration Get response sent from the CN3 to the host computer. CS Configuration Set request sent from the host application. Cs Configuration Set response sent from the CN3 to host computer The reader and configuration commands to set on the CN3 or the current value to retrieve from the CN3. To save configuration changes in flash memory, send the .+1 reader command as the last command. See the Command Reference Manual for a list of supported commands. Reprogramming the CN3 Keypad Information about remapping the CN3 keypads can be found online in the Device Resources Kit in the Intermec Developer Library at www.intermec.com/idl. Look for the Key Remapper Functions section in this kit. Information is also in the IDL Resource Kit Developers Guide
(P/N 934-006-001). Configuring the Color Camera Using the Pictures & Videos application, you can take, view, edit pictures, and record and launch video clips stored on your CN3 or on a storage card. You can also send pictures and video clips to others, or save an image as the background on the Today screen. Pictures can be viewed individually, as thumbnails, or as part of a slide show. You can edit your pictures by cropping, rotating, and adjusting the brightness and contrast. If the color camera is enabled, then tap Menu > Options to configure camera options. While you are in the Pictures & Videos application, you can select Start > Help for complete information on using the camera. To enable the camera Select Start > Programs > the Pictures & Videos icon to access the options. To set the pixel size and rotation Use the General tab to set the pixel size of the image and to rotate it in either direction by 90 degrees before sending it through the e-mail. Note 92 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer that only the picture sent in the e-mail is resized. To set images to portrait or landscape Using the Slide Show tab, you can set your images to portrait or landscape for optimum viewing. When your CN3 is connected to your desktop PC using an ActiveSync USB connection and ActiveSync is idle, you can play a screensaver slide show using all the pictures in the \My Pictures folder. To save picture files Use the Camera tab, you can set the default location where pictures are saved. If you select main memory, pictures are saved to permanent storage on your CN3, which may mean you need to consider the storage needs of other programs. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 93 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer You can also set the compression level of each image taken. Note that selecting a high quality picture increases the size of each file significantly. To add sound to images and set the timer With the Video tab, you can add sound to your images and set the time for how long the camera is to stay on an image before pausing the recording. Configuring the SF51 Cordless Scanner Setting the Imager The following information pertains to configuring the SF51 Cordless Scanner to work with your CN3. These instructions assume you have EasySet version 5.4 or later installed on your desktop or laptop. EasySet is available at no charge from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Depending on what is selected as the scanner model, image settings, decode security, scanner settings, and virtual wedge are configured from Intermec Settings. See the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual, available from the Intermec web site for more information about each enabled option. Go to Related Documents on page xii for information how to download this .chm file. 94 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Enabling Bluetooth Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer Bluetooth is required for the SF51. On the CN3, use Intermec Settings to enable Bluetooth communications before you configure the SF51. To enable Bluetooth 1 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. 2 Tap (+) to expand Communications > Bluetooth > Power, then select On to enable Bluetooth. 3 Tap File > Save Settings, then File > Exit to close Intermec Settings. Creating an SF51 Connection Label To initiate a connection from the SF51 1 Use EasySet to create an SF51 connection label with the CN3 Bluetooth address. The device address is listed in Intermec Settings on your CN3, like the illustration shown previously. 2 On your desktop or laptop, double-click the EasySet icon if you have not already done so. 3 Enter the Bluetooth address assigned to your CN3 (shown in the Bluetooth window), then click OK to close this dialog box. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 95 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer 4 The connection label for the SF51 appears to the right in EasySet, similar to the following. Scan the label once, then confirm the blue Intermec Ready-to-Work indicator on the SF51 starts blinking, which means it is trying to connect. 5 Enter the passcode number when prompted. The default is 0000. 6 When connected, the blue Intermec Ready-to-Work indicator turns on and stays on. Viewing SF51 Scanner Information from Your Computer Note that in the CN3, Intermec Settings can display up to seven separate SF51 connections. The following illustration shows such connections under the Data Collection option. Tap Data Collection, then tap (+) to expand the SF51 Scanner connections to view MAC addresses, firmware version numbers, and whether each scanner is connected to the CN3. When you clear (uncheck) Enable scanner port, the SF51 is disconnected from the CN3. Check Enable scanner port again to reconnect. If you want to rename these connections to descriptions more suitable for your situation, press the stylus on each SF51 Scanner connection for a pop-up menu, then select Rename. Enter the description, tap ok to save. When the SF51 is connected, configuration changes take effect immediately. When the SF51 is not connected, configuration changes take effect once the SF51 is reconnected. 96 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Using Configuration Parameters Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer A configuration parameter changes the way the CN3 operates. Use either of these methods to execute configuration parameters:
Scan EasySet bar code labels:
Use the EasySet application from Intermec Technologies Corporation to print configuration labels. Scan labels to change imager configuration and data transfer settings. See the EasySet online help for information. Send Reader Commands through the Network or from an Application See the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual for information. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 97 Chapter 3 Configuring the Computer 98 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual
1 2 3 4 | User Manual 4 of 6 | Users Manual | 669.70 KiB | May 09 2007 |
4Maintaining the Computer Use this chapter to solve problems you may encounter and perform routine maintenance on your CN3 Mobile Computer. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 99 Chapter 4 Maintaining the Computer Upgrading the Operating System on your Computer You can use the SmartSystems Foundation application from Intermec to perform upgrades on your CN3, versions 3.0 or later. Contact your Intermec representative for more information about the SmartSystems Foundation software. When you upgrade the operating system, you erase the current configuration and replace it with the new default configuration. You will need to reset the network parameters on the CN3 to reestablish communications with other devices in the network. In other words, if you upgrade the operating system and the default registry from the operating system has changed, the registry is rolled back to the new default. When you upgrade your CN3, you are updating the operating system (OS) and the SmartSystems Platform Bundle (SSPB) files. The SSPB files are stored on the DiskOnChip, and deliver Intermec value-
added functionality such as data collection, unit configuration and diagnostics, and Intermecs wireless security suite. As new features are added to these components, you can upgrade your SSPB files without needing to upgrade the operating system image. Similarly, features added to the operating system images do not affect the functionality of the SSPB, and you can choose to upgrade only the operating system image. There are two ways to upgrade the CN3:
You can use a miniSD card to upgrade the CN3. For help, see the next page. You can use the SmartSystems Console to upgrade the CN3. For help, see Using the SmartSystems Console to Upgrade the Computer on page 98. You need to download the latest upgrade files from the Intermec web site to your desktop or laptop computer, then determine if you want to upgrade both the operating system and SSPB files, just the operating system files, or just the SSPB files. To download the latest upgrade files 1 Start your web browser and go to the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 2 Go to Service & Support > Downloads. 3 Select Computers: CN3 Mobile Computer from the drop-down list. 4 Select which download you need. Make sure the download you select is for the CN3. 5 Look at the description (or the ReadMe file) to determine if this download will upgrade both the operating system and SSPB files, just the operating system, or just the SSPB. You will need this information later. 100 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Maintaining the Computer 6 Close the link and download the .zip file to your desktop computer or your laptop computer. 7 If you are using the SmartSystems Console to upgrade the CN3, go to page 102, otherwise go to the next paragraph. Using a Storage Card to Upgrade the Computer To use a miniSD storage card to upgrade the CN3, you need a Secure Digital card reader and a miniSD storage card formatted as FAT16. Note: Intermec offers miniSD cards for sale which have been tested and certified to work with the CN3. Intermec cannot guarantee that other miniSD cards will work with CN3s. Upgrading Both Operating System and SSPB Files 1 Extract the upgrade files to a folder on your desktop or laptop computer. Make sure to select the option to use folder names when extracting files. 2 Place all individual root files onto your miniSD card, this will update your operating system only. Ignore the SSPB files at that point. 3 Insert the miniSD card in the CN3. 4 Remove the battery pack from the CN3 and place the CN3 in a dock connected to external power. With a stylus, press the reset button in the battery cavity in the back. Reset button 5 When the Installation Complete menu appears, remove the miniSD card. Remove the existing files from the miniSD card and place all of the files from the SSPB folder into your miniSD card. The number of files will vary from version to version. 6 Insert the miniSD card in the CN3. With a stylus, press the reset button in the battery cavity in the back, and press and hold the power switch as you put the battery back in the CN3. 7 Continue to hold the power switch until a Warning message appears on the display, release the power switch, then read the message. Press either right-side button to continue with the clean-boot. 8 Perform the pen calibration, then wait for the CN3 to load files from the miniSD card. This progress is shown via the orange banner near the Start menu in the display. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 101 Chapter 4 Maintaining the Computer 9 When progress is complete, the CN3 performs a warm-boot to reset its configuration. Remove the miniSD card and delete its files. Set the date, time, and network communication parameters to reestablish communications with the other devices in the wireless network. Upgrading the SSPB Files 1 Extract the SSPB upgrade files to a miniSD card. 2 Insert the miniSD card in the CN3, then press the reset button in the battery cavity in the back to wipe the current SSPB and load the new SSPB over the old in the persistent storage. 3 Do the pen calibration, then wait for the CN3 to load files from the miniSD card. This progress is shown via the orange banner near the Start menu in the display. 4 When the progress is complete, remove the miniSD card, delete its files. 5 When progress is complete, the CN3 performs a warm-boot to reset its configuration. Remove the miniSD card and delete its files. 6 Set the date, time, and network communication parameters to reestablish communications with the other devices in the wireless network. Using the SmartSystems Console to Upgrade the Computer Use the SmartSystems Console to upgrade the CN3 operating system. The console is part of SmartSystems Foundation and is available from the Intermec web site via the IDL. Before upgrading the CN3, you need:
the SmartSystems Foundation. To download SmartSystems Foundation, go to www.intermec.com/idl and open the Device Management page. the device upgrade .exe file, which is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Go to Service & Support > Downloads. To use the SmartSystems Console to Upgrade the CN3 1 Install SmartSystems Foundation on your desktop or laptop computer, then open the SmartSystems Console. 2 Make sure the SmartSystems Console can communicate with the CN3. See the SmartSystems online manual for more information. 3 Make sure your CN3s are either in a communications dock or charging dock, or that power management is disabled to prevent the CN3 from suspending during an upgrade. 4 Download the device upgrade .exe file to your desktop or laptop computer, then double-click the file to start the InstallShield application. Note: Do not change the default location where InstallShield extracts the files. The SmartSystems Console requires files to be in this location. 5 From the SmartSystems Console, locate the device upgrade to install. 102 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Maintaining the Computer 6 Drag-and-drop the device upgrade onto each CN3 icon. Once the upgrade is done downloading to your CN3, your CN3 replaces the operating system, then performs a warm-boot. The SmartSystems Console shows your CN3 as offline (via a red stop sign) until the device reboots and reconnects to the system. Troubleshooting Your Computer Before sending the CN3 in for service, save its data and configuration. Problems While Operating the Computer Problem Solution You press the power switch to turn on the CN3 and nothing happens. The Battery status LED is on. The CN3 appears to be locked up and you cannot enter data. Make sure the backlight is on by pressing E. Make sure you have a charged CN3 Battery installed correctly. For help, see Using the Batteries on page 9. The battery may be discharged. Replace the battery with a spare charged battery, or charge the battery. Perform a warm-boot or press the reset button in the battery cavity. If the battery status LED is a steady green, the battery is more than 95% charged and CN3 is on a charger. If the battery status LED is blinking red, then the battery is low. If the battery status LED is a steady red, the main battery is on charge. Press the power switch to turn off the CN3, then press the power switch again to turn on the CN3. Press and hold the power switch ten seconds to warm-boot the CN3. Try reloading the firmware. See Upgrading the Operating System on your Computer on page 100. If the CN3 does not boot or reset, contact your local Intermec representative for help. Problems While Configuring the Computer Problem Solution You scan a configuration command, such as Beeper Volume, and you hear three low beeps. If you are working in Intermec Settings, you cannot scan configuration commands. Exit Intermec Settings to scan configuration commands. You scan or enter an option for the Scanner Model configuration command and you hear three low beeps. You may have scanned or entered a Scanner Model command that does not apply to the type of scanner that you have installed. Try scanning or entering the Scanner Model command again and select an option for the type of device you are using. You cannot type a character on the keypad or you can only type uppercase or lowercase letters. You may have locked a modifier key on the keypad. Check the CN3 toolbar to see if it contains an icon with a locked symbol. Press the necessary key sequence to unlock the key. See Using the Keypad on page 16. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 103 Chapter 4 Maintaining the Computer Problems with Wireless Connectivity Problem Solution When you turn on the CN3 after it was suspended for a while (10-
15 minutes or longer), it can no longer send or receive messages over the network. The No Network Connection icon appears on the toolbar. The CN3 is not communicating with the access point. The CN3 is connected to the Intermec Application Server or host computer and you move to a new site to collect data. The Network Connection icon was visible, but is now replaced with the No Network Connection icon. The Network Connection icon is in the toolbar, but you cannot establish a terminal emulation session with the host computer. The Network Connection icon is in the toolbar, but the host computer is not receiving any data from the CN3. Host may have deactivated or lost current terminal emulation session. In a TCP/IP direct connect network, turn off the KeepAlive message from host to maintain the TCP session while a CN3 is suspended. The CN3 is not connected to access point. Ensure access point is turned on and operating. Move closer to access point to reestablish communications. Ensure the CN3 is configured correctly for network. CN3 radio parameters must match all access point values. If you have an 802.11b/g radio and its radio initialization process failed, reset the CN3 (see page 5). If No Network Connection icon still appears, you may have a defective radio card. For help, contact your local Intermec representative. Move closer to an access point or to a different location to reestablish communications until the Network Connection icon appears. Any data you collected while out of range is transmitted over the network. There may be a problem with the host computer, with the connection between the Intermec Application Server and the host computer, or with the connection between the access point and the host computer. Check with network administrator to make sure the host is running and allowing users to login to the system. In a UDP Plus network, there may be a problem with the connection between the Intermec Application Server and the host computer. Check with network administrator or see the users manual for the Intermec Application Server. In a TCP/IP network, there may be a problem with the connection between the access point and the host computer. Check with network administrator or use your access point users manual. Problems While Configuring 802.1x Security If you have trouble configuring the computer for 802.1x security, check these problems and possible solutions. Problems While Configuring 802.1x Security Problem Solution The CN3 indicates that it is authenticated, but it does not communicate with the host. Make sure the CN3 IP address, host IP address, subnet mask, default router are configured for network. The CN3 does not appear to be authenticating and a network connection icon does not appear on the toolbar. The CN3 may not be communicating with access point. Make sure the CN3 network name matches access point network name (SSID). 802.1x security network may not be active. Ensure the server software is properly loaded and configured on server PC. See server software documentation for help. 104 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Maintaining the Computer Problems While Configuring 802.1x Security (continued) Problem Solution A network connection icon appears in the toolbar, but then disappears. The CN3 indicates it is not authenticated. The CN3 may not be communicating with the intended access point. Make sure the CN3 network name matches the access point network name. Default network name is INTERMEC. Access point may not be communicating with server. Ensure the access point is turned on, properly configured, and has 802.1x security enabled. User Name and Password parameters on the CN3 must match the user name and password on authentication server. You may need to reenter the password on both the CN3, authentication server. On your authentication server, the user and group are allowed and the group policy is allowed to log into the server. For help, see the documentation that shipped with your authentication server software. IP address and secret key for access point must match the IP address and secret key on authentication server. You may need to reenter the IP address and secret key on both your access point and authentication server. Authentication server software is running on server PC You are setting up multiple access points in a network, with different SSIDs, and the connection fails. CN3 does not save WEP key values when changing the SSID. Reenter the WEP key value after changing the SSID, select Apply Network Settings from the 802.11 Radio menu. You should now be able to connect to the different access points. You receive a message saying The server certificate has expired or your system date is incorrect after you perform a clean-boot on the CN3. Date and time are not saved when a clean-boot is performed. Reenter the date and time, then select Apply Network Settings from the 802.11 Radio menu. Problems While Scanning Bar Codes Problem Solution You cannot see a red beam of light from the scanner when you press the Scan button and aim the scanner at a bar code label. When you release the Scan button or handle trigger, the Good Read light does not turn off. You may be too far away from the bar code label. Try moving closer to the bar code label and scan it again. You may be scanning the bar code label straight on. Change the scanning angle and try again. Move within 2 feet of a wall to test the effective scan of the scanner. For help scanning bar codes, see page 15. The Good Read light will remain on if you configure the CN3 to use continuous/edge triggering. If you configure the CN3 for level triggering and the Good Read light remains on, there may be a problem. Press the Scan button or pull the trigger again without scanning a bar code label. If the light is still on, contact your local Intermec representative. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 105 Chapter 4 Maintaining the Computer Problems While Scanning Bar Codes (continued) Problem Solution The input device attached to the CN3 does not work well or read bar code labels very quickly. The scanner will not read the bar code label. The scanner does not read the bar code labels quickly, or the scanning beam seems to be faint or obscured. You scan a valid bar code label to enter data for your application. The data decoded by the scan module does not match the data encoded in the bar code label. Set the Scanner Model command to the specific attached input device. Check enabled bar code symbologies and enable only the symbologies being used. Aim the scanner beam to cross entire bar code label in one pass. Vary the scanning angle. Check the quality of the bar code label, Scan a bar code label that you know will scan. Compare the two bar code labels to see if the bar code quality is too low. You may need to replace the label that you cannot scan. Ensure the bar code symbology is enabled. Use Intermec Settings to check the symbologies. Expand Data Collection > Symbologies beneath devices listed
(scanner, virtual wedge) to check and enable symbologies, then scan the bar code label again. Ensure the CN3 application is expecting input from a bar code. You may need to type this information instead. The scanner window may be dirty. Clean the window with a solution of ammonia and water. Wipe dry. Do not allow abrasive material to touch the window. The CN3 may have decoded the bar code label in a symbology other than the labels actual symbology. Try scanning the bar code label again. Make sure you scan the entire label. Cleaning the Scanner and Camera Windows and Screen To keep the CN3 in good working order, you may need to clean the EA11 scanner and color camera windows and the screen. Clean the scanner and camera windows and screen as often as needed for the environment in which you are using the CN3. To clean the CN3, use a solution of ammonia and water. There are no user-serviceable parts in the CN3. Opening the CN3 will void the warranty and may cause damage to the internal components. 106 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Maintaining the Computer Press the power switch to turn off the CN3. Dip a clean cloth towel in the ammonia solution and wring out the excess. Wipe off the scanner window and camera lens and flash area. Do not allow any abrasive material to touch these surfaces. Wipe dry. CN3 with EA11 Scanner CN3 with Color Camera CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 107 Chapter 4 Maintaining the Computer 108 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual
1 2 3 4 | User Manual 5 of 6 | Users Manual | 2.67 MiB | May 09 2007 |
5Network Support This chapter includes information about the different networks supported by the CN3 Mobile Computer, and ways to configure and manage those networks. Note that the CN3 automatically installs the appropriate software for radio or phone use when the CN3 is turned on. Note: Desktop icons and settings icons are shown to the left. Any place that Start is mentioned, tap the following Windows icon in the top, left corner of your CN3 desktop. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 109 Chapter 5 Network Support Wireless Network Support Radios are installed at the factory and cannot be installed by a user. The CN3 must be serviced to install or replace radios. Contact your Intermec representative for more information. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Intermec could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Personal Area Networks Bluetooth is the name given to a technology standard using short-range radio links, intended to replace cables connecting portable and fixed electronic devices. The standard defines a uniform structure for a range of devices to communicate with each other with minimal user effort. Its key features are robustness, low complexity, low power, and low cost. The technology offers wireless access to LANs, the mobile phone network, and the internet for a host of home appliances and mobile computer interfaces. Wireless Printing can also be done with Microsoft APIs, including Bluetooth extensions for Winsock, and Bluetooth virtual COM ports. Information about other Bluetooth software is in the Bluetooth Resource Kit and the Bluetooth Resource Kit Users Guide via the Intermec Developer Library (IDL), which is available as a download from the Intermec web via www.intermec.com/idl. See your Intermec representative for information. Configuring with the Wireless Manager Note: The Wireless Manager application is available only when Microsoft Zero Configuration is enabled. If Intermec Security is enabled, then this application is not available. See page 175 for information on enabling and configuring Microsoft Security. You can use the Wireless Manager to enable and disable Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and the Phone if it is built into your CN3. To enable Bluetooth using the Wireless Manager Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Wireless Manager icon, or Tap the Wireless Manager row from the Today desktop. 110 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support In the Wireless Manager, either tap All or tap Bluetooth, then wait for On to appear beneath the Bluetooth row. Once activated, information appears in the Today desktop like the following. Note the Bluetooth icon is on the right. Tap Menu > Bluetooth Settings to perform a device search (more information on the next page). Tap Done to close the Wireless Manager. Enabling Bluetooth After a Clean Boot Bluetooth is not started by default after a clean-boot is performed. To enable Bluetooth Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Bluetooth icon. The CN3 retains the Bluetooth state when clean-boots are performed, for example:
If Bluetooth was enabled before a clean-boot was performed, the CN3 boots up with the Bluetooth state enabled and Bluetooth virtual COM ports (such as printing) registered. Reactivate the connections manually as the system does not do them. If Bluetooth was disabled before a clean-boot was performed, the CN3 boots up with Bluetooth disabled. To turn on Bluetooth Select Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Bluetooth icon >
the Mode tab, then check Turn on Bluetooth. If the CN3 is to be found by other Bluetooth devices that require such visibility, then check Make this device visible to other devices. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 111 Chapter 5 Network Support In most cases, the CN3 will find other Bluetooth devices, such as a printer, GPS receiver, headset, or hands-free device. To scan for other Bluetooth devices 1 Tap the Devices tab, then tap Add new device... to search for (or scan) remote Bluetooth devices. 2 When the CN3 is finished scanning, any newly found devices appear in the box. Tap Refresh to perform additional searches. 112 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 3 Select a device to which to connect, then click Next. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 113 Chapter 5 Network Support 4 Enter a passkey to establish a secure connection, then tap Next. Passkeys are typically provided in the documentation that comes with the Bluetooth device being searched. Tap Yes if prompted to let the other device connect with your CN3. 5 Select what services you want from this remote device, then click Finish to return to the Devices tab. To connect with other devices 1 Tap the COM Ports tab, then tap New Outgoing Port to connect to a Bluetooth device. 114 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 2 Select the device to add, then click Next. 3 Select a port from the Port drop-down list, check Secure Connection, then click Finish to return to the COM Ports page. 4 Tap New Incoming Port to allow other Bluetooth devices to connect with your CN3. Select on which port to secure this connection, then click Finish to return to the COM Ports page. 5 You can press and hold on a device to edit that device or delete it from the list. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 115 Chapter 5 Network Support Using the Wireless Printing Applet The Wireless Printing applet separates the task of wireless printing from other Bluetooth management items not relevant to this task. Wireless Printing has a concept of the current wireless printer. This printer is the one to which the CN3 makes a connection when the wireless printing COM port is opened. If there is no current wireless printer, there is no wireless printing COM port. Registration and deregistration of this COM port is controlled by the Bluetooth COM port control. Use the Wireless Printing applet to handle the COM port registration. Customer software or other test applications can also use this applet to manage the COM port registration and deregistration. The current wireless printer is stored in the registry and is registered and deregistered on Bluetooth stack load/unload. If the current wireless printer changes, the existing wireless printing COM port is deregistered, and the new one is registered instead. The registered COM port is stored in the registry as the WPort. For information on using Bluetooth communications, see the Bluetooth Resource Kit in the IDL, which is available as a download from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/idl. Contact your Intermec representative for more information. Use any of the following methods to set the wireless printer:
Use a Bluetooth device search to locate the remote device. Manually enter the remote Bluetooth Device Address. Use Current Wireless Printer to set a different printer. 116 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support To perform a Bluetooth device search 1 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > the Wireless Printing icon. 2 Clear the Show Printers Only box if you want to find more than just the Bluetooth printers. 3 Tap Search to initiate the device search. 4 In about half a minute, Bluetooth devices found within your range will appear. If your preferred printer is in the list, select to highlight the printer, then tap OK. 5 If you do not see your preferred device, make sure this device is powered on and set to search, then tap Search again. 6 Tap Cancel to return to the first screen without making changes. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 117 Chapter 5 Network Support To perform a manual setup Note: If you know the Bluetooth Device Address of the printer you want to use, use this procedure to avoid a Device Search. 1 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > the Wireless Printing icon. 2 Tap Manual, enter the address of your device in the field, then tap OK. Tap Cancel to return to the first screen without making changes. When you set your printer manually, your device may not receive the printer name. Therefore, -unknown- can display under Device Name. To set a different printer 1 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > the Wireless Printing icon. 2 Tap Set Different Printer to return to the device search screen. 3 Tap either Search or Manual, tap OK, then do the applicable steps. 4 Tap Cancel to return to the current wireless printer settings without making changes, then tap Exit to close the applet. 118 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Connecting to Bluetooth Audio Devices Chapter 5 Network Support The Bluetooth audio user interface is a part of the Bluetooth Audio applet. You can use this applet to search for, activate, and connect to Bluetooth audio devices, such as Bluetooth headsets. You can control the audio volume and the amplification for the microphone for the connected Bluetooth audio device (if the connected device has these capabilities). To access the Bluetooth Audio applet 1 From the CN3 desktop, select Start > Settings. 2 Tap the System tab, then tap the Bluetooth Audio icon. Searching for Bluetooth Headsets To search for a Bluetooth headset with either a headset or a hands-free profile, tap Search for devices. Audio devices that are found are added to the list with an icon to identify either profile. 1 When searching for a device, select Yes at the following prompt to allow that device to connect to your CN3. 2 Enter the passcode that is provided with your Bluetooth audio device, such as 0000, then tap Next to finish pairing with your audio device. The passcode is provided by the manufacturer of your Bluetooth audio device. You can usually find your passcode in the user manual that is provided with your audio device. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 119 Chapter 5 Network Support 3 Select the services tied to the Bluetooth audio device to which you are connecting, then tap Finish. Once the pairing is successfully completed, the Bluetooth audio device appears in the list of devices that are found. You can double-tap any of the devices for a pop-up menu to set it as a default, make a connection, refresh the connection, or delete the device from the list. Note: You can only select one Bluetooth audio device as the default device. You must set a device to default before you can connect to that device. Audio Device Icons Each device has two icons to the left, one to reflect its connection status, the other to reflect its default status. This table lists their meanings:
Bluetooth Audio Device Status Icons Icon Description Your CN3 and your Bluetooth audio device are not connected. Note the red diagonal bar. Your CN3 and your Bluetooth audio device are connected. Your Bluetooth audio device is not set as the default. Your Bluetooth audio device is set as the default. Note the red check mark. 120 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Connecting to a Bluetooth Headset If you find several Bluetooth audio devices, you can only connect to one audio device. Before you can connect to that device, you must set it as the default audio device. To connect to an audio device 1 Double-tap a device for its pop-up menu, then select to check Set as default if it is not already checked. On successful device activation, the device icon changes to include a red check mark. You can set another device as the default without having to clear the red check mark on the original. 2 Select Refresh to retrieve missing information from a device. Select Delete to remove a device from the list. 3 If the activated device has a hands-free profile, press a button on the device to establish an audio connection between the CN3 and the activated device. See the user manual for the Bluetooth device for information on what button to press. 4 To establish an audio connection to the activated device with either a headset or hands-free profile, double-tap the audio device, then select Connect from the pop-up menu. A check mark is added to this option in the pop-up menu. To disconnect from the audio device, repeat this step to clear the check mark. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 121 Chapter 5 Network Support 5 When connection is established, the connected/disconnected status changes to that of a connected status and the Audio Device Settings are enabled to adjust settings of the connected Bluetooth audio device. Tap the Volume slider bar to adjust the volume Tap the Microphone slider to adjust the amplification Check Keep audio connected at suspend to maintain your connection when you suspend the CN3 Configuring Bluetooth Using Intermec Settings You can also configure your Bluetooth communications using Intermec Settings. To configure Bluetooth using Intermec Settings 1 From the CN3 desktop, select Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. 2 Tap (+) to expand Communications, then Bluetooth to configure its settings. Connecting with Bluetooth Note: While these instructions apply to many Bluetooth devices, these instructions use the Nokia 3650 for example purposes. Make sure Bluetooth is enabled on your mobile phone. For example, with the Nokia 3650, go to its menu, select Connect > Bluetooth, then set My phones visibility to Shown to all. 122 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Before you connect to the network, make sure Bluetooth is enabled on your CN3 so you can find and connect to remote devices. Go to Personal Area Networks on page 110 for information. Once connected, you should be able to browse Internet websites and use other online resources. To establish a Bluetooth connection between your CN3 and your mobile phone, then establish a dial-up networking session with your wireless network 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Connections icon, then tap Add a new modem connection. 2 Enter a name for the connection, such as Nokia. In the Select a modem list, select Bluetooth, then tap Next to continue. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 123 Chapter 5 Network Support 3 Tap Add new device... if the phone is not listed in the known devices. Make sure your Bluetooth device is turned on before you start the search. 4 When the search for devices is complete, select your Bluetooth device, then tap Next to continue. 5 Enter the correct Passkey on both the Bluetooth device and the CN3, then tap Next to continue. 124 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 6 Enter a name for the device if needed, or select what services to use, then tap Finish. 7 Select the Bluetooth device to use to connect to the network, then tap Next to continue. 8 Enter the appropriate number as it should be dialed for your Bluetooth connection, then tap Next to continue. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 125 Chapter 5 Network Support 9 Enter the user name, password, and domain required for your Bluetooth device, then tap Finish. Now you can establish a connection to your network via the Internet Explorer application. To disconnect, tap the Connectivity icon in the top menu bar, then select Disconnect. Local Area Networks (LANs) The CN3 is a versatile mobile computer that you can add to your wired or wireless LAN. It has an internal 802.11b/g radio to transfer data using wireless communications. This section of the manual assumes that you have already set up your wireless communications network including access points. Your CN3 supports TCP/IP network protocols. The easiest way to configure the network parameters on the CN3 is to use Intermec Settings . See Using the Intermec Settings Applet on page 15 for more information. In a TCP/IP network, the CN3 communicates with a host computer directly using TCP/IP. The access point acts as a bridge to allow communications between the wired and wireless networks. 126 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Using the CDMA Radio Phone Application Chapter 5 Network Support With the CDMA radio module installed in your CN3, you can send and receive telephone EV-DO (1x Evolution Data Optimized) calls as well as transmit data via wide-area (WAN) cellular networks. The CN3 provides a phone speaker, microphone, and speakerphone, and supports the use of a Bluetooth headset or hands-free kit. At factory-
default, the phone is not activated. Using the Wireless Manager to Turn on the Phone Note: The Wireless Manager application is available only when Microsoft Zero Configuration is enabled. If Intermec Security is enabled, then this application is not available. See page 175 for information on enabling and configuring Microsoft Security. You can use the Wireless Manager to enable and disable Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and the Phone if it is built into your CN3. To turn on the phone using the Wireless Manager 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Wireless Manager icon, or tap the Wireless Manager row from the Today desktop. 2 In the Wireless Manager, either tap All or tap Phone, then wait for On to appear beneath the Phone row. 3 Once activated, the name of your phone network appears in the Today screen like the following:
4 Tap Menu > Phone Settings to configure the phone (more information to follow). 5 Tap Done to close the Wireless Manager. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 127 Chapter 5 Network Support Activating the Phone The CDMA phone is activated using the Activation Wizard in the Phone application. Contact your Intermec representative for more information. With the WAN radio module installed in your CN3, you can send and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the computer as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the computer for your mouthpiece. Note: If you wish to perform this activation another time, tap Cancel to close this wizard, then tap Yes. To initiate activation before using your Phone application 1 Tap Start > Phone from the Today screen to access the application which processes your phone calls. Tap the Close button in the upper right corner of this application to close. 2 In the Phone application, tap Menu > Activation Wizard from the bottom of the screen. 3 Have your activation code, phone number (MDN), and MSID information ready before you tap Next to continue. You can get this information from your network provider. 128 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 4 Enter your 6-digit activation code (hidden by asterisks), then tap Next to continue. 5 Enter the phone number and MSID from Sprint, then tap Next to continue. 6 The application prompts whether the information entered is correct. If so, tap Yes to continue, else tap No to return to the previous screen. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 129 Chapter 5 Network Support 7 The application acknowledges that your phone will be in service in up to four hours. Tap Finish to close the wizard. Note: Voice service is available immediately. Data service takes up to four hours of activation before you can use the service. If after four hours, a data connection is not established, go to Updating Your PCS Vision Profile on page 132 to manually launch data provisioning. Using the CDMA Phone To access the Phone application that processes your phone calls Tap Start > Phone. Tap the appropriate keys to enter a telephone number, then tap Talk to dial the number shown above the keypad. Tap this to backspace one digit Tap this to select a previously dialed number Tap this to access the Contacts application 130 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support To use the Call History feature Tap Call History to note the telephone numbers that were previously dialed from this CN3. To configure your phone settings Either select Menu > Options from the Phone application, or Select Start > Settings > the Personal tab > the Phone icon to access the applet. Customizing the Phone Tap the Phone tab to customize your phone settings such as the ring type and ring tone to use for incoming calls, and the keypad tone to use when entering phone numbers. Detecting Your Network Position Tap the Location Settings tab to allow your network to detect your position or remain private with the exception of 911 emergencies. To get detected Tap Location ON. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 131 Chapter 5 Network Support To remain private Tap 911 Only. This ensures that no service may use your location without you giving permission. Updating Your PCS Vision Profile Tap the Data Settings tab to either repair your connection settings or automatically update your PCS Vision. When the built-in phone data connection used by Microsofts connection manager is corrupted, tap Repair Connectoid to repopulate the registry with the correct values for the data connection. If you find you cannot make a data connection to the CDMA data network, tap Repair Connectoid to assure that the connection entry used by the CDMA device is correct. For Sprint networks, if your CN3 is unable to make a data connection and it has been more than four hours since activation, tap Provision, then follow the prompts to launch data provisioning from this screen. It takes a few minutes to set up the data portion of the WWAN network. 132 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Note: The data provisioning process can be automatically initiated by the Sprint network, by attempting to make a cellular line connection to the WAN before the CN3 is data provisioned, or by manually starting the connections through this screen. Intermec recommends that Sprint Network push the data provisioning to your CN3. This should occur shortly after the voice activation is complete. To repair your connections 1 Click Repair Connected, then tap Yes to perform the repair. 2 Tap ok to return to the Data Settings tab. To automatically update your profile 1 Click Provision to start the provisioning. 2 Tap ok to return to the Data Settings screen. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 133 Chapter 5 Network Support Setting the Roaming Range Scroll to, then tap the System Settings tab to set your roaming feature to either automatic with having to go through your server or to roam through the Sprint server. To alert the caller when roaming is enabled Tap Automatic. To roam the network through the Sprint server Tap Sprint. To be notified when devices are located Check Enable Call Guard alert when roaming. Knowing the Version Numbers of Your Phone Features Scroll to, then tap the Version Information tab to view the latest versions of all of your phone features. Move the scroll bar along the bottom to the right to see additional information. 134 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Using the GSM/EDGE Radio Phone Application Chapter 5 Network Support With the WAN radio module installed in your CN3, you can send and receive telephone calls as well as transmit data via wide-area cellular networks. The CN3 provides a phone speaker, microphone, and speakerphone, and supports the use of a Bluetooth headset or hands-free kit. At factory-default, the phone is disabled. To turn on the phone, use either of the following methods:
Using the Wireless Manager to Turn on the Phone Note: The Wireless Manager application is available only when Microsoft Zero Configuration is enabled. If Intermec Security is enabled, then this application is not available. See page 175 for information on enabling and configuring Microsoft Security. You can use the Wireless Manager to enable and disable Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and the Phone if it is built into your CN3. To turn on the phone using the Wireless Manager 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Wireless Manager icon, or tap the Wireless Manager row from the Today desktop. 2 In the Wireless Manager, either tap All or tap Phone, then wait for On to appear beneath the Phone row. 3 Once activated, the name of your phone network appears in the Today screen like the following:
4 Tap Menu > Phone Settings to configure the phone (more information to follow). 5 Tap Done to close the Wireless Manager. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 135 Chapter 5 Network Support Activating the Phone The GSM/EDGE phone is activated via a SIM card that you can purchase from your network provider, and inserted in the miniSD/SIM cavity in the back of your CN3. Contact your Intermec representative for more information. To insert the SIM card 1 Press the power switch to suspend the CN3, then remove the battery pack from the back of the CN3. 2 Remove the two screws on the miniSD/SIM card slot door. Note the screws to this door are to be torqued to 1.5 in-lbs. 3 Gently lift the door to the card slot, then with the metal contacts facing down, insert the SIM card into its card slot in the door. 4 Press the miniSD/SIM card slot door down, insert the two screws, reinsert the battery pack, then press the power switch. Once the door to the miniSD is opened (for changing, installing, or removing the SIM or miniSD card); a cold-boot is performed. SIM card slot miniSD/SIM door Using the GSM/EDGE Phone To access the application that processes your phone calls Tap Start > Settings > the Phone desktop icon from the Personal tab, or Tap Start > Phone. 136 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Tap the appropriate keys to enter a telephone number, then tap Talk to dial the number shown above the keypad. Tap this to access the Contacts application Tap this to backspace one digit Tap this to select a previously dialed number Tap this to view previous calls To use the Speed Dial feature Tap Speed Dial to select a telephone number with which the CN3 is to dial automatically. Use the Contacts application to add to this list. See Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues on page 54 for more information. To use the Call History feature Tap Call History to note the telephone numbers that were previously dialed from this CN3. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 137 Chapter 5 Network Support To customize your phone settings Either select Menu > Options from the Phone application, or Select Start > Settings > the Personal tab > the Phone icon to access the applet. Customizing the Phone Tap the Phone tab to customize your phone settings such as the ring type and ring tone to use for incoming calls, and the keypad tone to use when entering phone numbers. Tap Change PIN to reset the personal identification number for this phone. Setting the Phone Services 1 Tap the Services tab to access settings for any of the provided services. Tap any of the settings, then tap Get Settings. 138 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 2 Make your changes, then tap ok to return to the Settings screen. Below is a sample Settings screen. Setting Up the Network Tap the Network tab to find, set, or select the type of network on which this phone is to communicate. Remote Access (Modems) You can set up connections to the Internet and corporate network at work to browse the Internet or intranet, send and receive e-mail, and synchronize information using ActiveSync. Connections are made via wireless networks. Your CN3 has two groups of connection settings: My ISP and My Work Network. Use My ISP settings to connect to the Internet. Use My Work Network settings to connect to any private network. My ISP Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages by using Messaging and view web pages by using Internet Explorer Mobile. The communication software for creating an ISP connection is already installed on your CN3. Your service provider provides the software needed to install other services, such as paging and fax services. If this is the method you want to use, see Connecting to an Internet Service Provider on page 140. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 139 Chapter 5 Network Support My Work Network Connect to the network at your company or organization where you work. Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages by using Messaging, view web pages by using Internet Explorer Mobile, and synchronize with your desktop. If this is the method you want to use, see Connecting to Work on page 143. Connecting to an Internet Service Provider You can connect to your ISP, and use the connection to send and receive e mail messages and view web pages. Get an ISP dial-up access telephone number, a user name, and a password from your ISP. Tap the Help icon to view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings. To connect to an Internet service provider 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections icon. 2 In My ISP, tap Add a new modem connection. 3 Enter a name for the connection, such as ISP Connection. 140 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 4 If using an external modem connected to your CN3 with a cable, select Hayes Compatible on COM1 from the Select a modem list drop-
down list, then tap Next to continue. 5 Enter the access phone number, then tap Next. For more information, tap use dialing rules. 6 Enter the user name, password, and domain (if provided by an ISP or your network administrator), then tap Finish. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 141 Chapter 5 Network Support 7 Tap the Advanced tab from the Connections screen, then tap Dialing Rules to specify your current location. These settings apply to all connections. 8 Tap Use dialing rules, tap ok, then tap Edit to continue. 9 Specify your current phone type. If your phone type is pulse dialing, check Pulse dialing. If your type is tone dialing (as most phone lines are), then clear Pulse dialing. Continue to tap ok to close each page and return to the Settings page. To start the connection, start using one of the following programs. Once connected, you can:
Send and receive e-mail messages by using Messaging. Before you can use Messaging, you need to provide the information it needs to communicate with the e-mail server. Visit web pages by using Internet Explorer Mobile. For more information, see Internet Explorer Mobile on page 72. Note: Tap Manage existing connections to change modem connection settings in My ISP. Select the desired modem connection, tap Settings, then follow the instructions on the screen. 142 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Connecting to Work Chapter 5 Network Support If you have access to a network at work, you can send e-mail messages, view intranet pages, synchronize your CN3, and possibly access the Internet. Create a modem connection via a RAS (Remote Access Server) account. Before you can create this modem connection, your network administrator needs to set up a RAS account for you. Your network administrator may also give you Virtual Private Network (VPN) settings. Note: To change modem connection settings in My Work Network, tap Manage existing connections. Select the desired modem connection, tap Settings, then follow the instructions on the screen. To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings, tap the Help icon. To connect to work 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections icon. 2 In My Work Network, tap Add a new modem connection. 3 Enter a name for the connection, such as Company Connection. 4 In the Select a modem list, select your modem type, then tap Next to continue. If your modem type does not appear, try reinserting your CN3 into your modem dock. If using an external modem connected to your CN3 with a cable, select Hayes Compatible on COM1. If using any type of external modem, select the modem by name. If a listing does not exist for your external modem, select Hayes Compatible on COM1. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 143 Chapter 5 Network Support 5 Enter the access phone number, using some of the following guidelines. If you know part of the phone number changes frequently as you travel, create dialing rules to avoid creating numerous modem connections for the same phone number. For more information, tap use dialing rules. Enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed. For example, if you call from a business complex or hotel that requires a nine before dialing out, enter 9 in front of the phone number. Enter the APN provided by your mobile phone service provider. When using dialing rules, phone numbers are entered differently. To use additional numbers, such as a 9 to dial from an office complex or hotel, you must use additional dialing rules or change dialing patterns. See the Create Dialing Rules online help for information. a In Country/Region code, enter the appropriate code when dialing internationally. For more information, contact an operator at your local phone company. b In Area code, enter the area code, if needed. c Enter the Phone Number, then tap Next to continue. 144 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 4 Enter the user name, password, and domain (if provided by an ISP or your network administrator). If a domain name was not provided, try the connection without entering a domain name. Tap Finish. Creating a VPN Server Connection to Work A VPN connection helps you to securely connect to servers, such as a corporate network, via the Internet. Ask your network administrator for the following: user name, password, domain name, TCP/IP settings, and host name or IP address of the VPN server To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings, tap the Help icon. Note: Tap Manage existing connections > the VPN tab to change existing settings in My Work Network. Select the desired VPN connection, tap Settings, then follow the instructions on the screen. To create a VPN server connection to work 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections icon. 2 In My Work Network, tap Add a new VPN server connection. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 145 Chapter 5 Network Support 3 In Name, enter a name for the connection, such as a companys name. In Host name/ IP, enter the VPN server name or IP address. Next to VPN type, select the type of authentication to use with your device: IPSec/L2TP or PPTP. If you are not sure which option to choose, ask your network administrator. Tap Next to continue. 4 Select the type of authentication. If you select A pre-shared key, enter the key provided by your network administrator. 5 Enter your user name, password, and domain name as provided by your ISP or network administrator, then tap Finish. If a domain name was not provided, try the connection without entering a domain name. 146 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Insert necessary equipment, such as a network card, into the CN3, and use a desired program to begin connecting. Ending a Connection iConnect FTP Server Use any of these methods to end your connection:
When connected via modem or VPN, tap the Connectivity icon on the top, then tap Disconnect. When connected via cable or cradle, detach your CN3. When connected via Infrared, move the CN3 away from the other computer or device. When connected via a wireless network, switch off the connection. With iConnect, you can manage these features of your CN:
FTP server Network interfaces iConnect allows you to:
enable or disable the FTP server. manage the state of the FTP server based on the registry key settings. iConnect manages the state of the FTP server when iConnect first starts and when a network change occurs though iConnect. The easiest way to manage the FTP server is to enable the FTP menu within iConnect. To enable the FTP menu Create this DWORD registry key and set it to a value of 1:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\iConnect2\IConnect\Settings\ShowFTPMenu CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 147 Chapter 5 Network Support The iFTP menu is available the next time you start iConnect. To manage the state of the FTP server Modify these existing registry keys:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\iConnect2\IConnect\Settings\FtpAutoStart HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\iConnect2\IConnect\Settings\FtpHeartbeat where 1 = enable and 0 = disable. Network Interfaces The default network adapter or radio is dependent on what radios are installed in your CN3. With the iConnect menu, using the Enable feature, you can specify Wireless or No Networking to load onto your CN3 when a cold-boot is performed. If you had specified a network prior to when a warm-boot is performed on the CN3, the iConnect application restores your network interfaces to what they were before the warm-boot was performed. See the Developers Support area of the Intermec web site for the latest information on network adapters for your CN3. To access the iConnect menu Tap the iConnect icon (shown to the left) above your command bar. Select Dismiss from the iConnect menu to end the session without exiting the application. Select Exit iConnect to exit the application. To access the iConnect application after you have exited it Perform a warm-boot on the CN3. The iConnect icon then reappears above the command bar. No Networking To disable the networking interface Select Enable > No Networking from the iConnect menu. The Wireless radio tower icon is replaced with one that shows an X, a check mark appears next to the No Networking option in the menu, and the iConnect application disables all other networking interfaces. Wireless Communications To enable wireless communications on the CN3 Select Enable > Wireless from the iConnect menu. 148 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support The Wireless icon (shaped like a radio tower) appears in the toolbar, a check mark appears next to the Wireless option in the menu, and wireless communications is enabled. To configure wireless communications on the CN3 Select Tools > Wireless Settings from the iConnect menu to access the Profile Wizard for the 802.11b/g radio module. To configure wireless 802.11b/g communications using the Profile Wizard Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Wireless Network icon to access the Profile Wizard. Go to Configuring Microsoft Security on page 175 for information. To view information about the Wireless 802.11b/g communications Select Tools > Wireless IP Settings from the iConnect menu for the following:
To view the status of the Wireless communications Select Status > Wireless from the iConnect menu to view the status. Tap Try Again to check the status after you make changes to the connection. Ping Test To test the connection of your CN3 against your network Select Tools > Ping Test from the iConnect menu. To ping your gateway or DHCP server Select Ping my gateway or DHCP server, then select which to ping from the top drop-down list. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 149 Chapter 5 Network Support To ping a specific host Select Ping the host address below, then enter its IP address in the field beneath. After you make your selection, tap Ping! and wait for results. ISpyWiFi The ISpyWiFi utility provides more detailed information for the 802.11 radio connection in your CN3, such as MAC address, access point information, association, encryption, power management, antenna status, RSSI, data link rates, and supplicant status. With the utility, you can scan for access points in your network and ping for detailed and illustrated information. Starting the Utility The ISpyWiFi utility is installed in your CN3 as an executable. You can either start the utility using File Explorer or create a shortcut with which to start the utility from the CN3 desktop. To start the ISpy WiFi utility via File Explorer 1 Tap Start > Programs > the File Explorer icon. 2 Tap the \Windows folder from the root. 3 Scroll down for, then double-click the ISpyWifi executable. To place the ISpyWiFi utility in the Programs group 1 Press and hold your stylus on the ISpyWifi executable for its pop-up menu, then select Copy. 2 Scroll up to the \Start Menu\Programs folder, then tap it to open. 150 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 3 Press and hold your stylus in an empty (white) area in the folder, for its pop-up menu, then select Paste Shortcut. 4 Close the File Explorer, select Start > Programs to locate the Shortcut to ISpyWifi icon. Tap this icon to access the ISpyWifi application. Note that this icon is temporary. To use the ISpyWiFi tab The ISpyWiFi tab contains network interface, configuration, access point, and radio frequency information:
WiFi NIC (Network Interface Card) BCMCF1 A WLAN adapter and its associated driver version MAC The client radio MAC address IP(DHCP) The IP address of the client radio, if using DHCP IP (Static) The IP address of the client radio, if using a static IP address CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 151 Chapter 5 Network Support AP Status Shows whether the radio is associated with the access point Channel The channel on which the radio is communicating with the access point The text SSID (Network Name) for your network MAC address of radio AP with which the client radio is communicating Shows one of the following types:
Open, WPA, WPA-PSK, WPA2, Network EAP Note that more information about these types start on page 183. Shows potential encryptions for the association shown:
Key Absent/WEP, TKIP, Key Absent, TKIP/AES, WEP CAM (Constantly Awake Mode) or FAST PSP (Power Save Poll) Diversity (multiple antennas), Primary (one antenna) ESSID BSSID Config Association Encrypt Power Antenna RF TX Power Transmit power level in milliwatts (mW). RSSI Link The Received Signal Strength Indicator. The closer to zero, the better. For example: -40dBm is excellent, while -60dBm is good. The data rate at which the radios are communicating To use the WiFi Scan tab Use the WiFi Scan tab to scan your network and bring back information about any access points with which you can communicate. See Wireless Network on page 182 for information on connecting with a network. Tap Scan, then wait for the table to fill with information. Tap any of the columns to sort by ascending or descending order. Tap the slider bar on the bottom to scroll left and right to view all of the information. 152 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support SSID displays the broadcast range from the access point. Signal shows the RSSI seen from the access point. Channel lists the channel on which client radio is communicating with access point. BSSID displays the MAC address for the access point radio When Privacy shows a Y, WEP, TKIP, or AES encryption is used; an N indicates that no encryption is used. To use the Supplicant tab The Supplicant tab provides you with security and authentication information configured elsewhere in the CN3. See Configuring Security on page 156 for setting up Funk and Microsoft security. Security and Authentication Information Status Service Status Authentication State Authentication Result Description ON: Intermec Funk Security is enabled OFF: Microsoft Security is enabled Starting Up:
Shutting Down:
Unknown/Undefined:
authenticated: Authentication Server successful authentication failed: Previous authentication attempt failed disconnected: No authentication used, Open or Static WEP connection used acquired: Access point located, authentication process not initiated authenticating: Attempting authentication with Authentication Server logoff: Current session terminated by supplicant unknown: Error occurred, but not defined success: Authentication successful time-out: Authentication Server not responding to requests, may be out of range no credentials: Proper credentials not configured in device client reject: Unable to validate access point certificate server reject: Authentication Server rejects submitted credentials unknown: No authentication used or in the process of authentication Supplicant Events Displays output from the supplicant detailing its status. Intermec Supplicant Version Version of Intermec Funk Security in the CN3 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 153 Chapter 5 Network Support Click Configure Profile to launch the Profile Wizard and configure 802.11 options. See Using the Profile Wizard on page 161 for information on configuring this wizard. Click Reconnect to disassociate the radio, momentarily dropping its connection. The radio then reassociates and reauthenticates, but does not do anything with the radio driver. Click Clear Events to remove the information shown in the Supplicant Event box. Pinging Use the Ping tab to contact with any host in your network for information. Ping Information Status Timing Statistics BSSID Channel RSSI Link Description Min: The shortest ping reply in milliseconds (ms) Max: The maximum ping reply in milliseconds Avg: The average ping reply time Count: The number of pings already completed Timeouts: The number of pings that did not receive a response The MAC address for the access point radio The channel on which the access point is communicating The RSSI seen on the access point The speed at which the last ping occurred To ping a host 1 From the Host drop-down list, select an IP address for the host you want to ping. Enter a new IP address using the input panel or the keypad. Select Clear List to remove all the IP addresses from the drop-down list. 2 From the Repetitions drop-down list, select the number of times to ping the selected host. These repetitions are done once per second. 3 Tap Ping to initiate contact with the selected host. 154 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 4 Depending on how the screen is set up, you can toggle between a graph and a list of ping results:
Tap Graph to toggle to the graphical view of 25 of the most recent pings and their response results, like in the following sample graph:
Maximum ping Minimum ping Last ping Average ping Note the size of the gray area represents the standard deviation from the mean. Tap List to toggle to detailed information showing what ping touched what host and its RTT (Round Trip Time). Logging Supplicants If you reach a situation where you need to send in debug information to Intermec Product Support or Intermec Engineering, you can use the Intermec Funk Security logging feature. To enable the logging feature 1 Tap the Supplicant tab, then tap Configure Profile to access the Profile Wizard. 2 Tap Edit Selected Profile, then tap the Advanced tab. 3 Check Enable Logging, tap ok to close the profile settings, then tap ok to close the Profile Wizard. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 155 Chapter 5 Network Support The debug output file is then stored in the \My Device root folder as a text file called uroddsvc. Using File Explorer, press and hold your stylus on this file for its pop-up menu, then select any of its options to copy, beam, send, or delete this file. Configuring Security The CN3 provides three types of security for your wireless network:
Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2/802.11i) WPA WEP. 802.1x (should be referred to as an authentication method used for WPA and WPA2) Another authentication method for WPA and WPA2 would be the Pre-
Shared Key (PSK). Intermec recommends that you use Intermec Settings to configure your security. For help, see the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual
(P/N 073529) available online at www.intermec.com. Choosing Between Microsoft and Funk Security Before you can implement a security solution on the CN3, you need to choose between Microsoft and Funk security:
By default, Funk security is enabled. It provides everything you get with Microsoft security plus Cisco Compatible Extensions features. It also provides additional authentication types like EAP-TTLS, LEAP, and EAP-FAST. Microsoft security, with its Microsoft Zero Config feature, is also available. To switch to Microsoft security, go to Configuring Microsoft Security on page 175 to start. Note: Your security choice does not depend on your authentication server. For example, you can choose Funk security if you use Microsoft Active Directory to issue certificates. Configuring Funk Security You can define up to four profiles for your Funk security. Different profiles let your CN3 communicate in different networks without having to change all of your security settings. For example, you can set up one profile for the manufacturing floor and one for the warehouse. 156 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support To configure Funk Security 1 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. 2 Tap (+) to expand Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 3 Select an active profile, then configure its security settings. Using WPA Security Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a strongly enhanced, interoperable Wi-Fi security that addresses many of the vulnerabilities of Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Instead of WEP, WPA uses Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for its data encryption method. Currently, WPA satisfies IEEE 802.11i standards. WPA runs in Enterprise (802.1x) mode or PSK mode:
In Enterprise mode, WPA provides user authentication using 802.1x and the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). That is, an authentication server (such as a RADIUS server) must authenticate each device before the device can communicate with the wireless network. In PSK mode, WPA provides user authentication using a shared key between the authenticator and the CN3. WPA-PSK is a good solution for small offices or home offices that do not want to use an authentication server. To use WPA security, you need an access point with an 802.11b/g radio that supports WPA. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 157 Chapter 5 Network Support Configuring WPA Security With Funk Security Use this procedure to set WPA security with Funk security. 1 Make sure you have configured the communications and radio parameters on your CN3 and that Funk is your security choice. 2 Open Intermec Settings. Tap (+) to expand Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security > Profile X with X being 1 through 4. 3 For Association, select WPA and press Enter. 4 For 8021x, select PEAP, TLS, TTLS, LEAP, or EAP-FAST and press Enter. If you select TTLS or PEAP:
a Select User Name, type your user name, then press Enter. b Select User Password, type a user password, then press Enter. c For Validate Server Certificate, select Yes, then press Enter. Note that you must have the date on the CN3 set correctly when you enable Validate Server Certificate. d You must enter a User Name and Subject Name. You can also enter a Server 1 Common name or Server 2 Common name if you want to increase your level of security. If you select TLS:
a Load a user and root certificate on your CN3. For help, see Loading Certificates on page 182. b For Validate Server Certificate, select Yes, then press Enter. Note that you must have the date on the CN3 set correctly when you enable Validate Server Certificate. c You must enter a User Name and Subject Name. You can also enter a Server 1 Common name or Server 2 Common name if you want to increase your level of security. If you select LEAP or EAP-FAST:
a Select User Name, type your user name, then press Enter. b Select User Password, type a user password, then press Enter. 158 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Configuring WPA-PSK Security With Funk Security 1 Make sure you have configured the communications and radio parameters on your CN3 and that Funk is your security choice. 2 Open Intermec Settings. Tap (+) to expand Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security > Profile X with X being 1 through 4. 3 For Association, select WPA and press Enter. 4 For 8021x, select None and press Enter. 5 For Pre-Shared Key, enter the pre-shared key or the passphrase. The pre-shared key must be a value of 32 hex pairs preceded by 0x for a total of 66 characters. The value must match the key value on the access point. The passphrase must be from 8 to 63 chtomaracters. After you enter a passphrase, the CN3 internally converts it to a pre-shared key. This value must match the passphrase on the authenticator. 6 Exit Intermec Settings. Using 802.1x Authentication 802.1x authentication provides centralized user authentication using an authentication server, authenticators (access points), and supplicants. These components communicate using an EAP authentication type, such as TLS
(Transport Layer Security) or PEAP (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol). 802.1x security provides data encryption using dynamic WEP key management. To use 802.1x security, you need:
An access point with an 802.11b/g radio. A CN3 with an 802.11b/g radio and the 802.1x/WPA security option. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 159 Chapter 5 Network Support Configuring 802.1x Security With Funk Security 1 Make sure you have configured the communications and radio parameters on your CN3 and that Funk is your security choice. 2 Open Intermec Settings. Tap (+) to expand Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security > Profile X with X being 1 through 4. 3 For Association, select Open and press Enter. When working with Cisco Aironet access points, you can select Network-EAP. 4 For Encryption, select WEP and press Enter. 5 For 8021x, select PEAP, TLS, TTLS, LEAP, or EAP-FAST and press Enter. If you select TTLS or PEAP a Select User Name, type your user name, then press Enter. b Select User Password, type a user password, then press Enter. c For Validate Server Certificate, select Yes, then press Enter. Note that you must have the date on the CN3 set correctly when you enable Validate Server Certificate. d Enter a User Name and Subject Name. You can also enter a Server 1 Common name or Server 2 Common name to increase security. If you select TLS a Load a user and root certificate on your CN3 (page 182). b For Validate Server Certificate, select Yes, then press Enter. Note that you must have the date on the CN3 set correctly when you enable Validate Server Certificate. c You must enter a User Name and Subject Name. You can also enter a Server 1 Common name or Server 2 Common name if you want to increase your level of security. If you select LEAP or EAP-FAST Select User Name, then type your user name. press Enter, select User Password, type a user password, then press Enter. 160 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Using Static WEP Security The CN3 uses the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) protocol to add security to your wireless network based on the 802.11b/g standard. To use WEP security, you need an access point with an 802.11b/g radio. Configuring Static WEP Security With Funk Security Use this procedure to set Static WEP security with Funk security. 1 Make sure you have configured the communications and radio parameters on your CN3 and that Funk is your security choice. 2 Open Intermec Settings. Tap (+) to expand Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security > Profile X with X being 1 through 4.. 3 For Association, select Open and press Enter. 4 For Encryption, select WEP and press Enter. 5 For 8021x, select None and press Enter. 7 For Transmit key, select which WEP key to use for encryption of transmitted data. 8 Define a value for each key, up to four. Enter an ASCII key or a hex key either 5 or 13 bytes long based on the radio capability. Set a 5-byte value for 64-bit WEP or a 13-byte value for 128-bit WEP. Precede hex keys with 0x and make sure the keys use 5 or 13 hex pairs. Using the Profile Wizard To start 802.11b/g communications on the CN3, tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Wireless Network icon to access the Profile Wizard for the 802.11b/g radio module. A profile contains all the information necessary to authenticate you to the network, such as login name, password or certificate, and protocols by which you are authenticated. You can have up to four profiles for different networks. For example, you may have different login names or passwords on different networks, or you may use a password on one network, and a certificate on another. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 161 Chapter 5 Network Support Use the Profiles page to select and configure between the networking environments assigned to this 802.11b/g radio. Tap the Profile drop-down list to choose between four different profiles assigned to this CN3, then tap Edit Select Profile, make the changes needed for this profile (starting on the next page), then tap ok to return to the Profiles page. Check Enable Microsofts Wireless Zero Config to enable Microsoft's Wireless Zero Config application and disable the Intermec software solution for 802.11b/g, including configuration via the Wireless Network applet. Basic Use the Basic page to set the network type, name, and manage battery power for this profile. Tap ok to return to the Profiles page. Enter a unique Profile Label name for your profile. Tap the Network type list to select Infrastructure if the network uses access points to connect to the corporate network or internet; or Ad-Hoc to set up a private network with one or more participants. If you select Ad-Hoc for the network type, select the Channel on which you are communicating with others in your network. There are up to 11 channels available. 162 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support SSID (Network Name) assumes the profile name unless another name is entered in this field. If you want to connect to the next available network or are not familiar with the network name, enter ANY" in this field. Consult your LAN administrator for network names. Check Enable Power Management to conserve battery power (default), or clear this box to disable this feature. Security These are available from the 8021x Security drop-down list: None, PEAP
(page 165), TLS (page 167), TTLS (page 168), LEAP (page 171), and EAP-FAST (page 172). To disable 802.1x security and enable WEP encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as None. 2 Set Association to Open. 3 Set Encryption to None. To enable WEP encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as None and Association to Open or Shared as required to match the settings in your access point. Open is the recommended choice as Shared key authentication has security weaknesses. 2 Set Encryption to WEP. 3 Select a data transmission key from the Data TX Key drop-down list near the bottom of this screen. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 163 Chapter 5 Network Support 4 Enter an ASCII key or a hex key either 5 or 13 bytes long based on the radio capability in the appropriate Key # field. Set a 5-byte value for 64-
bit WEP or a 13-byte value for 128-bit WEP. Precede hex keys with 0x and make sure the keys use 5 or 13 hex pairs. To enable WPA encryption using a pre-shared key 1 Set 8021x Security as None. 2 Set Association to WPA. 3 Enter the passphrase as ASCII (12345) in the Pre-Shared Key field. To enable WPA2 encryption using a preshared key 1 Set 8021x Security as None. 2 Set Association to WPA2. 3 Set Encryption to either TKIP or AES. 164 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 4 Enter the passphrase as ASCII (12345) in the Pre-Shared Key field. PEAP (Protected EAP) This protocol performs secure authentication against Windows domains and directory services. It is comparable to EAP-TTLS (see page 168), both in its method of operation and its security, though not as flexible. This does not support the range of inside-the-tunnel authentication methods supported by EAP-TTLS. Microsoft and Cisco both support this protocol. Use PEAP to configure the use of PEAP as an authentication protocol and to select Open, WPA, WPA2, or Network EAP as an association mode. To configure with PEAP 1 Set 8021x Security as PEAP, then choose any of the following:
Set Association to Open. Set Association to WPA. Set Association to WPA2 and Encryption to TKIP or AES. Set Association to Network EAP and Encryption to either WEP or CKIP. 2 Enter your unique Username and password to use this protocol. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 165 Chapter 5 Network Support 3 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol; or leave Use following password as selected and enter your unique password to use the protocol without entering a password each time you use your CN3. 4 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates (page 170). 5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set options for server certificate validation and trust. To configure additional PEAP settings 1 Select a method from the Inner PEAP Authentication drop-down list. PEAP Authentication Methods Method Description EAP/MS-CHAP-V2 Authenticates against a Windows Domain Controller and other non-Windows user databases. This is Microsoft's implementation of PEAP. EAP/Token Card Use with token cards. The password value entered is never cached. This is Cisco's implementation of PEAP. EAP/MD5-Challenge Message Digest 5. A secure hashing authentication algorithm. 2 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authentication server based on its certificate when using PEAP. 3 Tap Root CA, select a root certificate, then OK to close. 4 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. If these fields are left blank, the client will accept any authentication server with a valid certificate. For increased security, you should specify exactly which authentication servers you expect to use. 5 Tap ok to return to the Security page. 166 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support TLS (EAP-TLS) EAP-TLS is a protocol that is based on the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol widely used to secure web sites. This requires both the user and authentication server have certificates for mutual authentication. While cryptically strong, this requires corporations that deploy this to maintain a certificate infrastructure for all their users. Use TLS to configure using EAP-TLS as an authentication protocol, pick Open, WPA, WPA2, or Network EAP as an association mode. To configure TLS settings 1 Set 8021x Security as TLS, then choose any of the following:
Set Association to Open. Set Association to WPA. Set Association to WPA2 and Encryption to TKIP or AES. Set Association to Network EAP and Encryption to either WEP or CKIP. 2 Enter your unique Subject Name and User Name of the corresponding certificate installed on your CN3 to use this protocol. 3 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates (page 170). 4 Tap Additional Settings to set server certificate validation and trust. To configure additional TLS settings 1 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authentication server based on its certificate when using TLS. 2 Tap Root CA, select a root certificate, then tap OK to return to the TLS settings. 3 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. If these fields are left blank, the client will accept any authentication server with a valid certificate. For increased security, you should specify exactly which authentication servers you expect to use. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 167 Chapter 5 Network Support 4 Tap ok to return to the Security page. TTLS (EAP-Tunneled TLS) This protocol provides authentication like EAP-TLS (see page 167) but does not require user certificates. User authentication is done using a password or other credentials that are transported in a securely encrypted tunnel established using server certificates. EAP-TTLS works by creating a secure, encrypted tunnel through which you present your credentials to the authentication server. Thus, inside EAP-
TTLS there is another inner authentication protocol that you must configure via Additional TTLS Settings. Use TTLS to configure EAP-TTLS as an authentication protocol, select Open, WPA, WPA2, or Network EAP as an association mode. To configure TTLS settings 1 Set 8021x Security as TTLS, then choose one of the following:
Set Association to Open. (default configuration) Set Association to WPA. Set Association to WPA2 and Encryption to TKIP or AES. Set Association to Network EAP and Encryption to either WEP or CKIP. 168 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 2 Enter your unique Username to use this protocol. 3 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected and enter your unique password to use the protocol without entering a password each time you use your CN3. 4 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates (page 170). 5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner TTLS authentication and an inner EAP, and set the server certificate validation and trust. To configure additional TTLS settings 1 Select an authentication method from the Inner TTLS Authentication drop-down list. TTLS Authentication Methods Method PAP CHAP MS-CHAP;
MS-CHAP-V2 PAP/Token Card Description Password Authentication Protocol. A simple authentication protocol that sends security information in the clear. Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. Use of Radius to authenticate a terminal without sending security data in the clear. Authenticates against non-Windows user databases. You cannot use this if authenticating against a Windows NT Domain or Active Directory. Authenticates against a Windows Domain Controller and other non-Windows user databases. Use with token cards. The password value entered is never cached. EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 2 If you select EAP for the inner authentication protocol, then select an inner EAP protocol from the Inner EAP drop-down list. 3 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. If these fields are left blank, the client will accept any authentication server with a valid certificate. For increased security, you should specify exactly which authentication servers you expect to use. 4 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authentication server based on its certificate when using TTLS. 5 Tap Root CA, select a root certificate, then tap OK to return to the Inner TTLS Authentication. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 169 Chapter 5 Network Support 6 Enter the Anonymous EAP-TTLS Name as assigned for public usage. Use of this outer identity protects your login name or identity. Tap ok. Getting Certificates Certificates are pieces of cryptographic data that guarantee a public key is associated with a private key. They contain a public key and the entity name that owns the key. Each certificate is issued by a certificate authority. Use these fields for batch importing certificates into the Microsoft certificate store. You can also use these fields to remotely import certificates onto the CN3 using the SmartSystems Console. However, you must make sure all the certificate files are downloaded to the appropriate folders on the CN3 before you invoke the call through the SmartSystems Console. Importing Root Certificates Setting this field to True imports root certificates located in the
\Temp\Root folder on the CN3 into the Microsoft Root certificate store. The certificates should be DER-coded and have a .cer file extension. The certificate files are deleted from the CN3 after they import to the store. If there are no certificate files to import, this action fails. Note: When you set either of the following fields to True, and the CN3 imports the requested certificates, the field toggles back to False. You must reset the field to True before you can import more certificates. To import root certificates 1 Tap the <<< button next to the Import Root Certificate field to select the root certificate (DER-encoded .cer file) to import. 2 Click Import Root Cert to install the selected certificate. Importing User Certificates Setting this field to True imports user certificates located in the
\Temp\User folder on the CN3 into the Microsoft personal certificate store. The certificates must be provided in two files:
DER-encoded certificate that does not contain the .cer private key base-64 encoded private key with the .pvk extension 170 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Both files must have the same name for the appropriate private key to associate with the correct certificate, such as admin.cer and admin.pvk. The certificate files are deleted from the CN3 after they import to the store. If there are no certificates to import, this action fails. To import user certificates 1 Tap the <<< button next to the Certificate Path field to select the user certificate (DER-encoded .cer file without the private key) to import. 2 Tap the <<< button next to the Key Path field to select the .pvk private key that corresponds to the user certificate chosen in step 1. 3 Tap Import User Cert to install the selected certificate. To obtain a user certificate Tap Web Enrollment to obtain a user certificate over the network from an IAS Server, then tap X to return to the Security page. LEAP (Cisco Lightweight EAP) LEAP is the Cisco Lightweight version of EAP. Use LEAP to configure the use of LEAP as an authentication protocol, select Open, WPA, WPA2, or Network EAP as an association mode, or assign Network EAP. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 171 Chapter 5 Network Support To configure LEAP settings 1 Set 8021x Security as LEAP, then choose one of the following:
Set Association to Open. Set Association to WPA. Set Association to WPA2 and Encryption to TKIP or AES. Set Association to Network EAP and Encryption to either WEP or CKIP. (default configuration) 2 Enter your unique Username to use this protocol. 3 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected and enter your unique password to use the protocol without entering a password each time you use your CN3. EAP-FAST (EAP-Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunnel) The EAP-FAST protocol is a client-server security architecture that encrypts EAP transactions with a TLS tunnel. While similar to PEAP, it differs significantly as EAP-FAST tunnel establishment is based on strong secrets unique to users. These secrets are called Protected Access Credentials
(PACs), which CiscoSecure ACS generates using a master key known only to CiscoSecure ACS. Because handshakes based upon shared secrets are intrinsically faster than handshakes based upon PKI, EAP-FAST is the significantly faster of the two solutions that provide encrypted EAP transactions. No certificate management is required to implement EAP-FAST. Use EAP-FAST to configure EAP-FAST as an authentication protocol, select Open, WPA, or Network EAP as an association mode. To configure EAP-FAST settings 1 Set 8021x Security as EAP-FAST, then choose one of the following:
Set Association to Open. Set Association to WPA. Set Association to WPA2. 172 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Set Association to Network EAP and Encryption to either WEP or CKIP. 2 Enter your unique Username to use this protocol. 3 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected and enter your unique password to use the protocol without entering a password each time you use your CN3. 4 Tap Additional Settings to set options for PAC management and assign an anonymous EAP-FAST name. To configure additional EAP-FAST settings 1 Tap PAC Manager to view the PAC files currently installed on your CN3. Tap ok to return to the Additional Settings screen. 2 If you already have a PAC on your CN3, clear Allow Automatic PAC provisioning to avoid receiving more PACs from the server. 3 If Allow Automatic PAC provisioning is checked, you can check:
Prompt before acquiring a new PAC for notification of any incoming PACs. Prompt before replacing a PAC for notification whether to replace a current PAC with an incoming PAC. 4 Enter the Anonymous EAP-FAST Name as assigned for public usage. This outer identity protects your login name or identity. 5 Click ok to return to the Security page. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 173 Chapter 5 Network Support Configuring Advanced Settings Wireless NICs and APs associate based on the SSID configured for the NIC. Given an SSID, the BSSID with the strongest signal is often chosen for association. After association, 802.1x authentication may occur and during authentication credentials to uniquely identify a user -
these are passed between the NIC and the AP. Base 802.1x technology does not protect the network from rogue APs. These can mimic a legitimate AP to authentication protocols and user credentials. This provides illegal users ways to mimic legitimate users and steal network resources and compromise security. Check Detect Rogue APs to detect and report client behavior suspected of being rogue APs. Once a rouge AP is detected, your CN3 no longer associates with that AP until you perform a clean boot. Clear Detect Rogue APs to solve AP connection problems that result when an AP gets put on the rogue list due to inadvertent failed authentications, not because it is a real rogue. Mixed cell is a profile-dependent setting. If Enable mixed cell is enabled when you are using WEP, you can connect to access points that allow the optional use of encryption. When using a wireless LAN that uses Cisco Access Points, a LEAP-
enabled client device can roam from one access point to another without involving the authentication (RADIUS) server. If Allow fast roaming
(CCKM) is enabled, an access point configured to provide Wireless Domain Services (WDS) takes the place of the RADIUS server (caching credentials of an initial authentication with the RADIUS server) and authenticates the client without perceptible delay in voice or other time-
sensitive applications. Check Enable Logging to log what activity occurs for this profile. 174 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Configuring Microsoft Security The default security setting is Funk. If you want to use Microsoft security, you need to select it as your security choice. Intermec recommends that you use Intermec Settings to configure your security. For more information, see the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. To enable Microsoft Security 1 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. 2 Tap (+) to expand Communications > 802.11 Radio > Security Choice. 3 Select Microsoft Security from the drop-down list, then press Enter. 4 Tap Yes or press Esc to clear the alert box, save your settings, then perform a clean boot on the CN3. See Clean Boot Process on page 5 for more information on performing a clean boot. You can configure Microsoft Settings using Intermec Settings. However, with Intermec Settings, you cannot detect preferred networks (networks already configured), and WPA2-PSK is not provided. When Microsoft Security is enabled, you can use the Wi-Fi applet to configure your preferred networks. See Configuring Preferred Networks on page 177 for more information. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 175 Chapter 5 Network Support To configure Microsoft Security using Intermec Settings 1 Tap (+) to expand Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 2 Select Network name (SSID) and enter the SSID. To connect to an ad-hoc connection Set Infrastructure Mode to Ad hoc. To disable WEP encryption Set Network Authentication to Open if WEP keys are not required; or Shared when WEP keys are required. Set Data Encryption to Disabled. To enable WEP encryption Set Network Authentication to either Open if WEP keys are not required; or Shared when WEP keys are required for association. Set Data Encryption to WEP. If you need to change the network key, set Network Key Setting to Enter Key and Index, enter the new key in Network Key Value, and select the appropriate index under Network Key Index. To enable WPA authentication Set Network Authentication to WPA. To enable WPA authentication using a preshared key Set Network Authentication to WPA-PSK, then enter a new network key under Pre-Shared Key. 3 Select File > Save Settings to set the changes made. 176 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Configuring Preferred Networks Networks already configured are preferred networks. You can connect to only preferred networks or search for and connect to any available network. A wireless network can be added either when the network is detected, or manually by entering settings information. To determine if authentication information is needed, see your network administrator. To add a wireless network 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Wi-Fi icon , then tap Add New . 2 Enter a Network name. If the network was detected, the network name is entered and cannot change. 3 From Connects to, select to what your network is to connect. If you select Work, you can do a VPN connection or use proxy servers. If you select The Internet, you can connect directly to the internet. 4 Select This is a device-to-device (ad-hoc) connection to connect to an ad-hoc connection. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 177 Chapter 5 Network Support 5 Do one of the following:
To disable WEP encryption Set Authentication to either Open if WEP keys are not required; or Shared when WEP keys are required for association. Set Data Encryption to Disabled. To enable WEP encryption Set Authentication to either Open if WEP keys are not required; or Shared when WEP keys are required for association. Set Data Encryption to WEP. Clear The key is automatically provided, then enter the new Network key and select the appropriate Key index to change the network key. 178 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support To enable WPA authentication Set Authentication to WPA. Set Data Encryption to either AES or TKIP. Enter the new Network key. To enable WPA authentication using a preshared key Set Authentication to WPA-PSK. Set Data Encryption to either AES or TKIP. Enter the new Network key. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 179 Chapter 5 Network Support To enable WPA2 authentication Set Authentication to WPA2. Set Data Encryption to either AES or TKIP. Enter the new Network key. To enable WPA2 authentication using a preshared key Set Authentication to WPA2-PSK. Set Data Encryption to either AES or TKIP. Enter the new Network key. 6 Tap Next, select either PEAP or Smart Card or Certificate for the EAP type, then tap Properties to adjust its settings. 180 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support 7 Tap Finish to return to the Configure Wireless Network screen. 8 From the Networks to access drop-down list, select All Available, Only access points, or Only computer-to-computer depending on the type of networks to which you connect. Tap ok to close this screen. Note: If you select to connect to non-preferred networks, your CN3 detects any new networks and provides configuration opportunities. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 181 Chapter 5 Network Support Loading Certificates If you choose to use Transport Layer Security (TLS) with WPA or 802.1x security, you need to have a unique client certificate on the CN3 and a trusted root certificate authority (CA) certificate. If you choose to use PEAP, you need to load a root CA certificate. You can use a third-party CA to issue unique client certificates and a root certificate. To load certificates If your CA is on your WLAN, select Start > Settings > the System tab >
the Certificates icon > the Root tab to view certificate details. Press and hold a certificate, then select Delete to remove a certificate. Wireless Network Your wireless adapter (network interface card) connects to wireless networks of two types: infrastructure networks and ad-hoc networks. Infrastructure networks get you onto your corporate network and the internet. Using the 802.11b/g infrastructure mode, the CN3 establishes a wireless connection to an access point, linking you to the rest of the network. Ad-hoc networks are private networks shared between two or more clients, even with no access point. Each wireless network is assigned a name (or Service Set Identifier - SSID) to allow multiple networks to exist in the same area without infringement. Intermec recommends using security measures with wireless networks to prevent unauthorized access to your network and to ensure your privacy of transmitted data. Authentication (cryptographically protected) by both the network and the user, transmitted data, and encryption are required elements for secure networks. Schemes are available to implement the features. 182 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Network Support Encryption AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) CKIP (Cisco Key Integrity Protocol) TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption A block cipher, a type of symmetric key cipher that uses groups of bits of a fixed length -
called blocks. A symmetric key cipher is a cipher using the same key for both encryption and decryption. As implemented for wireless, this is also known as CCMP, which implements AES as TKIP and WEP are implementations of RC4. This is Cisco's version of the TKIP protocol, compatible with Cisco Aironet products. This protocol is part of the IEEE 802.11i encryption standard for wireless LANs., which provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a re-keying mechanism, thus overcoming most of the weak points of WEP. This encryption is more difficult to crack than the standard WEP. Weak points of WEP include: No Initiation Vector (IV) reuse protection, weak keys, no protection against message replay, no detection of message tampering, and no key updates. With preconfigured WEP, both the client CN3 and access point are assigned the same key, which can encrypt all data between the two devices. WEP keys also authenticate the CN3 to the access point - unless the CN3 can prove it knows the WEP key, it is not allowed onto the network. WEP keys are only needed if they are expected by your clients. There are two types available: 64-bit (5-character strings, 12345) (default) and 128-bit (13-character strings, 1234567890123). Enter these as either ASCII (12345) or Hex (0x3132333435). Key Management Protocols WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access) This is an enhanced version of WEP that does not rely on a static, shared key. It encompasses a number of security enhancements over WEP, including improved data encryption via TKIP and 802.11b/g authentication with EAP. WiFi Alliance security standard is designed to work with existing 802.11 products and to offer forward compatibility with 802.11i. Second generation of WPA security. Like WPA, WPA2 provides enterprise and home Wi-
Fi users with a high level of assurance that their data remains protected and that only authorized users can access their wireless networks. WPA2 is based on the final IEEE 802.11i amendment to the 802.11 standard ratified in June 2004. WPA2 uses the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) for data encryption and is eligible for FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standards) 140-2 compliance. Authentication EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) 802.11b/g uses this protocol to perform authentication. This is not necessarily an authentication mechanism, but is a common framework for transporting actual authentication protocols. Intermec provides a number of EAP protocols for you to choose the best for your network. EAP-FAST (Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling) A publicly accessible IEEE 802.1X EAP type developed by Cisco Systems. It is available as an IETF informational draft. An 802.1X EAP type that does not require digital certificates, supports a variety of user and password database types, supports password expiration and change, and is flexible, easy to deploy, and easy to manage. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 183 Chapter 5 Network Support Authentication (continued) LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) Also known as Cisco-Wireless EAP, provides username/password based authentication between a wireless client and a RADIUS server. In the 802.1x framework, traffic cannot pass through a wireless network access point until it successfully authenticates itself. EAP-PEAP (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol) Performs secure authentication against Windows domains and directory services. It is comparable to EAP-TTLS both in its method of operation and its security, though not as flexible. This does not support the range of inside-the-tunnel authentication methods supported by EAP-TTLS. Microsoft and Cisco both support this protocol. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security) Based on the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol widely used to secure web sites. This requires both the user and authentication server have certificates for mutual authentication. While cryptically strong, this requires corporations that deploy this to maintain a certificate infrastructure for all their users. This protocol provides authentication like EAP-TLS (see page 167) but does not require certificates for every user. Instead, authentication servers are issued certificates. User authentication is done using a password or other credentials that are transported in a securely encrypted tunnel established using server certificates. EAP-TTLS works by creating a secure, encrypted tunnel through which you present your credentials to the authentication server. Thus, inside EAP-TTLS there is another inner authentication protocol that you must configure via Additional TTLS Settings. 184 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual SmartSystems Foundation Chapter 5 Network Support Use the SmartSystems Foundation (www.intermec.com/SmartSystems) to configure and manage your network. You can also contact your Intermec representative for support. This tool, available as a free download from Intermec, includes a management console that provides a default method to configure and manage Intermec devices out-of-the-box, without the purchase of additional software licenses. This is for anyone who must configure and deploy multiple devices or manage multiple licenses. Use Intermec Settings to perform device configuration settings within the SmartSystems Foundation. For more information, see the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. Information about the SmartSystems Foundation is available as an online help within the SmartSystems Console application. Select SmartSystems >
Help in the console to access the manual. Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon, then tap to expand the SmartSystems Information option. CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 185 Chapter 5 Network Support 186 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual
1 2 3 4 | User Manual 6 of 6 | Users Manual | 846.70 KiB | May 09 2007 |
ASpecifications CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 187 Appendix A Specifications Physical and Environmental Specifications Physical Dimensions (excluding overmold) Length:
Width:
Height:
16.0 cm (6.3") 8.1 cm (3.2") 3.3 cm (1.3") with standard battery 2.8 cm (1.1") with extended battery Non-WAN units - 14 oz WAN units w/standard battery - 15 to 16 oz WAN units w/extended battery - 16 to 17 oz Intel XScale PXA270 520 MHz RAM 128 MB RAM 128 MB NAND Flash, provides onboard non-volatile storage of applications and data miniSD Card Slot, user-accessible numeric or QWERTY; w/LED backlighting EA11, EA11HD scan engine or Color Camera Weight:
Hardware Microprocessor:
Application Processor:
Memory:
Persistent Storage:
Removable Storage:
Keypad:
Scanner Options:
Operating System Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0 Software Development Environments:Embedded Visual C++ 4.0, IDL:
Browser support:
.NET Compact Framework (VB. NET, C#) Integrates with leading development environments; supports device-specific features and bar code scanning Internet Explorer 6-compatible Bar Code Scanning Options of Integrated 2D Area Imager or 1D & PDF417 Linear Imager Supports all popular 1D and 2D symbologies including Australian Post, British Post, Codabar, Codablock A, Codablock F, Code 11, Code 2 of 5, Code 39, Code 93, Code 93i, Code 128, Datamatrix, Dutch Post, ISBT 128, Interleaved 2 of 5, Macro 2 of 5, Matrix 2 of 5, Maxicode, Micro PDF417, MSI, PDF417, Planet, Plessey, Postnet, QR Code, RSS 14, RSS Expanded, RSS Limited, Telepen, TLC39, UCC-EAN Composite Code, UPC/EAN Standard Communications USB host, USB client, Bluetooth, 802.11b/g, GPRS, CDMA, GPS 188 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Wireless LAN Standards Compliant:
Data Rates:
Radio Power Output:
Security:
Certifications:
Device Management SmartSystems Support:
Power Specifications Operating:
Backup:
Electrical Specifications External Charge Power:
Environment Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Humidity:
Electrostatic Discharge:
Rain and Dust Resistance:
Drop Survival:
Appendix A Specifications IEEE 802.11g (2.4 GHz - OFDM) IEEE 802.11b (2.4 GHz - DSSS) Up to 54 Mbps for 802.11g Up to 11 Mbps for 802.11b 100 mW WEP, WPA, 802.11i, 802.1x
(EAP-TLS, TTLS, LEAP, PEAP, EAP-FAST) Wi-Fi, WPA, WPA2, Cisco Compatible Extensions Centralized remote support capability;
configures, updates, and maintains single devices or entire populations;
real-time or batch, wired or wireless. Based on Wavelink Avalanche with Intermec value added utilities. Removable, rechargeable LiIon batteries;
AB8 standard pack, 3.7 VDC, 2.2 AHr,
(8 W-hr - 4 hr charge time); or AB9 extended pack, 3.7 VDC, 4.0 A Hr,
(14 W-hr - 5 hr charge time);
battery life is application-dependent;
typical recharge cycle time is 4 hours or less Super capacitor supplies 5 minutes bridge time while replacing the AB8 or AB9 Battery 5 V +/-5% @ 3.5 A max. (18 W max.)
-10 to 50C (14 to 122F)
-20 to 70C (-13 to 158F) 5% to 95% noncondensing
+8 kV Contact Discharge; +15 kV Discharge IP54 compliant Multiple 1.2 m (4 ft) drops to steel or concrete Screen Specifications Transflective TFT; QVGA Color with touch panel; 240x320 pixels; 8.9 cm
(3.5 in) diagonal active area; 5-level LED backlight control with settings Regulatory Approvals UL and cUL Listed, UL 60950 and UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 157, FCC Part 15, TUV, CE mark CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 189 Appendix A Specifications Accessories for the Computer AC14 Quad Battery Charger (P/N 852-065-001) Use the quad battery charger to charge up to four CN3 battery packs. AD10 Single Dock (P/N 871-025-001) Use the single dock to hold a CN3 with its battery installed, charge a spare battery pack, charge the main battery, and provide power to the CN3. The dock has USB host and client connectors. Optional modules are available to convert the USB host to Ethernet or to a landline modem. AD11 Multidock (P/N 871-026-001) Use the multidock to hold up to four CN3s with batteries installed. The multidock charges the batteries and provides power and Ethernet connections to each CN3. AD12 Charge-Only Multidock (P/N 875-026-002) Use the charge-only multidock to hold up to four CN3s with batteries installed, charge batteries, and provide power to CN3s. AV6 Vehicle Dock (P/N 871-027-001) Use the vehicle dock to hold and charge the CN3 while using it on a vehicle. AR1 Magnetic Card Reader (P/N 850-557-001) The magnetic card reader provides magnetic stripe reading capability to the CN3. 190 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual I Index CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 191 Index Numerics 1D area imager reading distances, 8 802.11 ISpyWiFi utility, 150 WPA authentication Zero Configuration, 179 WPA authentication with pre-shared key Zero Configuration, 179 WPA2 authentication Zero Configuration, 180 Zero Configuration, 180 zero configuration WEP encryption, 178 WPA2 authentication with pre-shared key 802.1x authentication Funk, 159 802.1x security troubleshooting, 104 A AB8 batteries, 9 AB9 batteries, 9 Access points Accounts via Messaging, 65 ActiveSync scanning for information, 150 ActiveSync Help, 45 adding programs, 42 adding programs to Start menu, 44 Folder behavior connected to email server, 64 installing applications, 77 Internet Explorer Mobile favorite links, 72 mobile favorites, 72 Mobile Favorites folder, 72 URL, 44 Windows Mobile, 44 Adding programs ActiveSync, 42 to the Start menu, 43 via ActiveSync, 44 via File Explorer, 43 Windows Mobile, 41 Address assigned to CN3, 95 Adjusting settings Windows Mobile, 41 Advanced Encryption Standard, 183 AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), 183 AllDay events Calendar, 47 creating, 49 Applets backlight, 19 Bluetooth Audio, 119 intemec settings beeper volume, 185 Intermec Settings, 94, 95 area imager, 7 beeper volume, 23 Bluetooth, 122 funk security, 156 SF51 scanner information, 96 SmartSystems, 185 smartsystems, 15 vibrate, 26 ISpyWiFi, 150 phone settings GSM radios, 131, 138 pictures & videos, 92 power, 11 battery status, 9 unattended mode, 20 sounds & notifications, 12 vibrate mode, 26 wireless manager bluetooth, 111 phone, 127, 135 wireless printing, 116 Appointments Calendar adding a note, 50 assigning to a category, 51 changing, 48 creating, 48 deleting, 53 finding, 53 making recurring, 51 setting a reminder, 50 viewing, 48 via Calendar, 46 Area Imager, 7 Audio camera, 94 audio device icons, 120 Audio device settings Bluetooth, 122 Avalanche, 79 B Backlight applet idle mode, 19 timeout value, 19 Bar codes troubleshooting, 105 Battery low battery warnings, 12 status, 9 192 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Beeper enabling via Sounds & Notifications applet, 12 volume turning it on, 22, 25 Block recognizer Windows Mobile input panel, 35 Bluetooth, 120 Audio applet, 119 audio device settings, 122 connecting to headsets, 121 connecting with remote devices, 123 connection status, 120 default status, 120 enabling for SF51 Scanners, 95 intermec settings, 122 searching for headsets, 119 wireless manager, 111 Wireless Printing applet, 116 Bluetooth applet, 95 address assigned to CN3, 95 Bluetooth Audio applet Bluetooth, 119 Browsing the Internet Internet Explorer Mobile, 74 C Calendar all day events, 47 creating, 49 appointments adding a note, 50 assigning to a category, 51 changing, 48 creating, 48 deleting, 53 finding, 53 making recurring, 51 setting a reminder, 50 viewing, 48 categories, 46 meetings sending a request, 52 options changing, 54 Pocket Outlook, 46 recurrence pattern, 48 Start menu icon, 31 synchronizing, 46 Call history Phone application CDMA radios, 131 GSM/EDGE radios, 137 Camera audio, 94 Index capturing an image, 14 compression, 93 configuring, 92 pixel size, 92 rotating the image, 92 screen saver, 93 slide show, 93 storing images, 93 type of image, 93 using the, 14 video time limit, 94 Capacitor internal super, 9 Capturing thoughts and ideas via Notes, 61 Categories calendar, 46 contacts assigning to, 57 CDMA phone application, 127 CDMA radios phone activation, 128 phone application, 127 installing applications, 78 Compression, camera, 93 Configuration parameters, 97 Configuring location settings CDMA radios, 131 Configuring roaming range CDMA radios, 134 Configuring security, 156 Configuring service settings Phone Phone Phone GSM/EDGE radios, 138 Configuring the Computer troubleshooting, 103 Connecting to an ISP, 140 work, 143 Connecting to a mail server via Messaging, 64 Connection labels SF51 scanners, 95 Cisco Key Integrity Protocol, 183 Cisco Lightweight EAP, 171 CKIP (Cisco Key Integrity Protocol), 183 Clean boot process, 5 Cleaning the scanner window and screen, 106 CompactFlash cards CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 193 Index Connections ending, 147 to an ISP, 140 via modem, 140 to work, 143 via VPN server, 145 via modem to an ISP, 140 via VPN server to work, 145 via wireless network, 177 Contacts adding a note, 57 adding a telephone number GSM/EDGE radios, 137 assigning to a category, 57 changing, 57 changing options, 59 copying, 58 creating, 55, 57 deleting, 59 finding, 58 Pocket Outlook, 54 sending a message, 58 Start menu icon, 31 synchronizing, 55 viewing, 56 Converting writing to text, 37 Converting writing to text on the screen, 37 Copying contacts, 58 Creating a modem connection to an ISP, 140 a VPN server connection to work, 145 a wireless network connection, 177 contacts via Contacts, 55 document via Word Mobile, 66 drawing via Notes, 38 note via Notes, 61 task via Tasks, 60 workbook via Excel Mobile, 69 D Detect rogue APs, 174 E EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol), 183 EAP-FAST, 183, 184 profile security information, 172 WEP encryption, 172 creating Bluetooth connection label, 95 EAP-TLS, 167 EAP-Tunneled TLS, 168 EasySet scan bar code labels, 97 EasySet application, 94 Edition information, 4 Ending a connection, 147 Ethernet iConnect, 148 Excel Mobile about, 69 creating a workbook, 69 tips, 69 Extensible Authentication Protocol, 183 F FAST (Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunnel-
ing), 183, 184 Favorite links Internet Explorer Mobile, 72 File Explorer adding programs to Start menu, 43 removing programs, 44 Windows Mobile, 40 Flash File Store packaging an application, 77 Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling
(FAST), 183, 184 Folder behavior connected to email server ActiveSync, 64 IMAP4, 64 POP3, 64 SMS, 64 Funk security, 156 802.1x, 159 selecting a profile, 156 static WEP, 161 WPA, 157 G Getting connected ISP, 139 to an ISP, 140 to work, 143 GPS described, 27 GSM/EDGE phone application, 135 creating a modem connection, 140 creating a VPN server connection, 145 creating a wireless network connection, 177 Windows Mobile, 139 194 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual disabling network communications, 148 network support, 148 ping test, 149 GSM/EDGE radios phone activation, 136 phone application, 135 using the phone, 130, 137 H Headsets connecting, 121 discovering, 119 setting to default, 121 I iConnect, 148 Idle mode, 19 IDLs Bluetooth, 110, 116 device resource kit, 92 smartsystems, 102 URL, 21 Imager Images IMAP4 beeper volume turning it on, 25 configuration parameters, 97 capturing via camera, 14 Input panel block recognizer, 35 keyboard, 34 letter recognizer, 35 selecting typed text, 36 transcriber, 35 Windows Mobile, 32 Word Mobile, 67 word suggestions, 34 Installing applications Avalanche, 79 SmartSystems, 79 using a storage card, 78 using Secure Digital cards, 78 with ActiveSync, 77 with InstallSelect, 80 InstallSelect installing applications, 80 Intermec settings beeper volume, 185 Intermec Settings applet area imager, 7 Folder behavior connected to email server, 64 Index Bluetooth, 122 enable speaker, 23 Funk security, 156 imager settings, 94 set vibrator, 26 SmartSystems, 185 viewing SF51 information, 96 Intermec settings applet smartsystems, 15 Internal scanners reading distances EA11, 8 Internet Explorer Mobile about, 72 browsing the Internet, 74 favorite links, 72 getting connected, 139 mobile favorites, 72 Mobile Favorites folder, 72 viewing mobile favorites and channels, 74 connecting to via Windows Mobile, 140 creating ISP a modem connection, 140 Internet Explorer Mobile, 72 Windows Mobile, 139 ISpyWiFi utility, 150 NIC, configuration, AP, RFID, 151 pinging hosts, 154 scanning for access point information, 152 scoping the network, 152 shortcut in Start Menu, 150 starting the utility, 150 supplicant, 153 supplicant logging, 155 K Keeping a todo list via Tasks, 59 Key remapper functions, 92 Keyboard Windows Mobile input panel, 34 Keypads capitalizing characters, 17 Caps Lock, 17 numeric, 16 numeric characters, 18 power switch, 19 QWERTY, 16 QWERTY characters, 17 using color-coded keys, 17 Keypads, remapping, 92 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 195 Index L LEAP security fast roaming (CCKM), 174 Microsoft, 171 LED status, 17, 18 Letter recognizer Windows Mobile input panel, 35 Loading certificates, 182 Microsoft, 170 M Managing email messages and folders via Messaging, 63 Meetings Calendar sending a request, 52 via Calendar, 46 Messages sending to contacts, 58 via Messaging Messaging composing/sending, 65 accounts, 65 composing/sending messages, 65 connecting to a mail server, 64 getting connected, 139 managing email messages and folders, 63 Pocket Outlook, 62 Start menu icon, 31 synchronizing email messages, 63 using My Text, 40 Microsoft security, 156 allow fast roaming (CCKM), 174 detect rogue APs, 174 enable mixed cell, 174 LEAP, 171 PEAP, 165 TLS, 167 TTLS, 168 Mixed cell enable via Microsoft security, 174 Mobile Favorites Internet Explorer Mobile, 72 Mobile Favorites folder Internet Explorer Mobile, 72 Modems MP3 files creating a connection to an ISP, 140 Windows Media Player, 71 N Network adapters, 148 Network settings phone application GSM/EDGE radios, 139 Notes adding to appointments, 50 contacts, 57 creating a note, 61 drawing on the screen, 38 creating a drawing, 38 selecting a drawing, 38 Pocket Outlook, 61 recording a message, 39 synchronizing notes, 62 writing on the screen, 36 alternate writing, 37 converting writing to text, 37 selecting the writing, 36 tips for good recognition, 37 O Object store packaging an application, 76 Operating the Computer troubleshooting, 103 Outlook Mobile, 45 P Packaging an application Flash File Store, 77 object store (user store), 76 Secure Digital storage cards, 76 SmartSystems Platform Bundles, 76 Passcodes, 119 PEAP security Microsoft, 165 Phone activation, 128, 136 CDMA radios call history, 131 location settings, 131 version information, 134 GSM/EDGE radios adding contact to speed dial, 137 call history, 137 finding, setting, selecting networks, 139 service settings, 138 using the application, 130, 137 wireless manager, 127, 135 196 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Phone application CDMA radios, 127 roaming range, 134 GSM radios customizing phone settings, 131, 138 GSM/EDGE radios, 135 Phone Settings applet CDMA roaming range, 134 customizing via Phone application GSM radios, 131, 138 GSM radios, 131, 138 network settings GSM/EDGE radios, 139 Pictures & Videos applet audio, 94 compression, 93 configuring the camera, 92 pixel size, 92 rotating the image, 92 screensaver, 93 slide show, 93 storing images, 93 type of image, 93 video time limit, 94 Ping test iConnect, 149 Pixels, camera, 92 Pocket Internet Explorer Start menu icon, 31 Pocket Outlook Calendar, 46 POP3 Power applet battery status, 9 Power applet battery status, 11 timeout value, 20 unattended mode, 20 Power switch, 19, 20 PowerPoint Mobile starting a slide show presentation, 70 Windows Mobile, 70 Profile Wizard Advanced supplicant logging for ISpyWiFi, 155 Programs, adding or removing Windows Mobile, 41 Protected EAP, 165 R Reader commands, 97 Folder behavior connected to email server, 64 Index recording a message, 39 Reading distances EA11, 8 Record button Recording via Notes, 39 Recurrence pattern Calendar, 48 Remapping the keypad, 92 Removing programs Windows Mobile, 41, 44 Reset methods clean boot, 5 preferred, 5 secondary, 5 Resource kits Bluetooth, 110, 116 smartsystems, 102 URL, 21 Roaming Microsoft security, 174 Rotating the image, 92 S Scanning bar codes troubleshooting, 105 Scheduling appointments and meetings via Calendar, 46 Screen saver, 93 Secure Digital cards installing applications, 78 packaging an application, 76 Security choosing between Funk and Microsoft, 156 configuring, 156 loading certificates, 182 wireless network, 182 Selecting drawing via Notes, 38 Selecting the writing on the screen, 36 Sending and receiving messages via Messaging, 62 Services phone application CDMA radios, 131 GSM/EDGE radios, 138 Setting image type, 93 Settings applets Intermec Settings Bluetooth, 122 funk security, 156 SF51 scanner information, 96 wireless printing, 116 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 197 Index SF51 Scanner configuring, 94 creating connection label, 95 enabling Bluetooth, 95 SF51 scanner viewing information from CN3, 96 Slide show, camera, 93 SmartSystems, 15, 79, 185 SMS Folder behavior connected to email server, 64 Sounds & Notifications applet enabling via Intermec Settings applet, 23 enable beeper, 12 set vibrate mode, 26 Speakers, 21 beeper volume turning it on, 22 Speed dial SSPB Start Menu phone application GSM/EDGE radios, 137 packaging an application, 76 adding programs, 43 via ActiveSync, 44 via File Explorer, 43 Static WEP security Funk, 161 Status icons Windows Mobile, 31 Storing images, camera, 93 Synchronize system time, 89 Synchronizing Calendar, 46 contacts, 55 email messages, 63 favorite links, 72 mobile favorites, 72 notes, 62 Tasks, 60 Word Mobile, 68 System software updates, 100 System time, 89 T Tasks creating a task, 60 Pocket Outlook, 59 Start menu icon, 31 synchronizing, 60 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol, 183 Text messages Windows Mobile, 40 Time server, 89 Tips for working Excel Mobile, 69 TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol), 183 TLS security Microsoft, 167 Today screen Windows Mobile, 30 Tools CD CAB files, 78 Tracking people via Contacts, 54 Transcriber Windows Mobile input panel, 35 Troubleshooting, 103 802.1x security, 104 bar code scanning, 105 CN3 configuration, 103 CN3 operation, 103 wireless connectivity, 104 TTLS security Microsoft, 168 Typing mode Word Mobile, 67 Typing on the screen Word Mobile, 67 U Unattended mode Updating bootloader, 77 changing timeout value, 20 Updating the system software, 100 Upgrading the operating system, 100 URLs ActiveSync, 44 Microsoft support, 30 Windows Mobile, 30 Windows Mobile support, 30 User store packaging an application, 76 V Version information Phone CDMA radios, 134 Vibrate mode enabling via sounds & notifications applet, 26 enabling via Intermec Settings applet, 26 Video time limit, camera, 94 Viewing mobile favorites and channels Internet Explorer Mobile, 74 VPN server creating a connection to work, 145 198 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption, 183 WEP encryption W WAP pages connecting to an ISP, 140 Wavelink Avalanche, 79 Web pages, 72 connecting to an ISP, 140 EAP-FAST security method, 172 zero configuration, 178 Wi-Fi Protected Access, 157, 183 Windows Media files Windows Media Player, 71 Windows Media Player Mobile Start menu icon, 32 Windows Mobile ActiveSync, 44 basic usage, 30 Calendar, 46 command bar, 32 Contacts, 54 Excel Mobile, 69 getting connected, 139 Messaging, 62 navigation bar, 32 Notes, 61 notifications, 32 popup menus, 32 PowerPoint Mobile, 70 programs, 31 status icons, 31 support URLs, 30 Tasks, 59 Today screen, 30 where to find information, 30 Word Mobile, 66 writing on the screen, 36 Wired Equivalent Privacy, 161, 183 Wireless 802.11b/g Index iConnect, 148 Wireless connectivity troublshooting, 104 Wireless Manager applet bluetooth, 111 phone, 127, 135 Wireless network creating a connection, 177 security, 182 Wireless Printing applet, 116 Word Mobile about, 66 creating a document, 66 synchronizing, 68 typing mode, 67 writing mode, 68 Work creating a VPN server connection, 145 getting connected, 143 WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), 183 WPA authentication 802.11 radio module Zero Configuration, 179 with pre-shared key Zero Configuration, 179 WPA security Funk, 157 WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access), 183 WPA2 authentication 802.11 radio module Zero Configuration, 180 with pre-shared key Zero Configuration, 180 Writing mode Word Mobile, 68 Writing on the screen Word Mobile, 68 www.intermec.com/idl/, 28 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual 199 Index 200 CN3 Mobile Computer Users Manual Corporate Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com CN3 Mobile Computer User's Manual
*935-003-003*
P/N 935-003-003
1 2 3 4 | User Manual Compliance Insert | Users Manual | 1003.86 KiB | May 09 2007 |
CN3 Compliance Insert For Users in the United States and Canada Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. Attention: Ce marquage indique que lusager doit, avant lutilisation, lire toute la documentation incluse. This product conforms to the following approvals. The users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Conformit aux normes canadiennes sur les appareils numriques Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Battery Information Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Caution: The battery pack used in this device may ignite, create a chemical burn hazard, explode, or release toxic materials if mistreated. Do not incinerate, disassemble, or heat above 100C (212F). Charge only with Intermec Models AC14, AD10, AD11, AD12, and AV6. Do not short circuit; may cause burns. Keep away from children. Use only Intermec battery pack Model AB8 or AB9. Use of incorrect battery pack may present risk of fire or explosion. Promptly dispose of used battery pack according to the instructions. Attention: Le bloc-piles utilis dans cet appareil peut prendre feu, constituer un risque de brlure chimique, exploser ou dgager des substances toxiques sil est manipul de faon inapproprie. Ne pas jeter au feu, dmonter ou chauffer plus de 100 C (212 F). Ne charger quavec les dispositifs Intermec AC14, AD10, AD11, AD12, et AV6. Ne pas court-circuiter;
cela pourrait causer des brlures. Garder hors de la porte des enfants. Nutiliser que le modle de bloc-piles Intermec AB8 ou AB9. Lutilisation dun mauvais bloc-piles pourrait constituer un risque dincendie ou dexplosion. Mettre rapidement au rebut tout bloc-piles us, conformment aux instructions. Battery Recycling Information Li-ion Li-ion This product contains or uses a lithium ion (Li-ion) main battery. When the battery reaches the end of its useful life, the spent battery should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler. Do not mix this battery with the solid waste stream. Contact your Intermec Technologies Service Center for recycling or disposal information. Ce produit contient une batterie principale dions de lithium (Li-ion) et une batterie. Lorsque la batterie atteint la fin de sa dure de vie utile, la batterie uses doivent tre mises aux rebuts par un agent de recyclage ou un manipulateur de matriaux dangereux agr. Il ne faut pas mlanger la batterie aux autres dchets solides. Pour plus dinformations sur le recyclage ou la mise aux rebuts, contacter votre centre de services Intermec Technologies. Note: In the U.S.A., the EPA does not consider spent Li-ion batteries as hazardous waste. 1 Caution: Use Intermec Model 073573, AE10, or 851-070-001 for the power supply. No user-serviceable parts. Attention: Employez le model dIntermec 073573, AE10, ou 851-070-001 pour lalimentation dnergie. Il ne contient aucune pice rparable par lutilisateur. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information for Model CN3 Configurations with 802.11g Radio The FCC permits a maximum SAR value of 1.6 W/kg. For use at the ear, the highest SAR value for the Model CN3 as tested by BABT, is 0.036 W/kg. For body worn operation, the highest SAR value for the Model CN3, as tested by BABT, is 0.087 W/kg. For head worn operation, the highest SAR value for the Model CN3, as tested by BABT, is 1.031 W/kg. Pour une utilisation loreille, le TAS limite pour le modle CN3, tel que test par le BABT, est de 0,036 W/kg. Pour une utilisation au corps, le TAS limite pour le CN3, tel que test par le BABT est de 0,087 W/kg. This product has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Ce produit a t test et rpond aux directives de la FCC en matire dexposition aux radiofrquences lorsquil est utilis avec les accessoires Intermec fournis ou conus pour ce produit. Lutilisation dautres accessoires pourrait contrevenir aux directives de la FCC en matire dexposition aux radiofrquences. Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information for Model CN3 Configurations with GSM/GPRS Radio For residents of Canada and the United States and other countries/regions that have adopted the SAR limit recommended by Industry Canada RSS-102 and Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, the maximum allowed SAR value is 1.6 W/kg over 1g of tissue. For use at the ear, the highest SAR value for the Model CN3, as tested by BABT, is 0.528 W/kg. For body worn operation, the highest SAR value for the Model CN3, as tested by BABT, is 0.543 W/kg. Pour les rsidants du Canada et des Etats-unis et des autres pays/rgions qui ont adopt le TAS limite recommand, cette limite est de 1,6 W/
kg pour 1 g de tissu. Pour une utilisation loreille, le TAS limite pour le modle CN3, tel que test par le BABT, est de 0,528 W/kg. Pour une utilisation au corps, le TAS limite pour le CN3, tel que test par le BABT est de 0,543 W/kg. This product as been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Ce produit a t test et rpond aux directives de la FCC en matire dexposition aux radiofrquences lorsquil est utilis avec les accessoires Intermec fournis ou conus pour ce produit. Lutilisation dautres accessoires pourrait contrevenir aux directives de la FCC en matire dexposition aux radiofrquences. Caution: The Intermec Model CN3 requires 15mm of spacing between the torso and the mobile computer to remain within the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits for general population exposure. The Intermec Model 815-060-001 provides this 15mm of spacing. Attention: Le modle CN3 dIntermec exige 15 mm despace entre le torse et lordinateur mobile pour rester dans les lim-
ites de taux dabsorption spcifique (TAS) pour lexposition de la population en gnral. Le modle 815-060-001 dInter-
mec assure ce 15 mm despace. Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information for Model CN3 Configurations with CDMA Radio For residents of Canada and the United States and other countries/regions that have adopted the SAR limit recommended by Industry Canada RSS-102 and Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, the maximum allowed SAR value is 1.6 W/kg over 1g of tissue. For use at the ear, the highest SAR value for the Model CN3 as tested by CCS, is 0.919 W/
kg. For body worn operation, the highest SAR value for the Model CN3, as tested by CCS, is 0.520 W/kg. Pour les rsidants du Canada et des Etats-unis et des autres pays/rgions qui ont adopt le TAS limite recommand, cette limite est de 1,6 W/
kg pour 1 g de tissu. Pour une utilisation loreille, le TAS limite pour le modle CN3, tel que test par le CCS, est de 0,919 W/kg. Pour une utilisation au corps, le TAS limite pour le CN3, tel que test par le CCS est de 0,520 W/kg. This product has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Ce produit a t test et rpond aux directives de la FCC en matire dexposition aux radiofrquences lorsquil est utilis avec les accessoires Intermec fournis ou conus pour ce produit. Lutilisation dautres accessoires pourrait contrevenir aux directives de la FCC en matire dexposition aux radiofrquences. 2
1 2 3 4 | User Manual part 1 | Users Manual | 2.26 MiB |
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Intermec Technologies Corporation Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Ave.W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior noticed and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2008 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), Intellitag, Intellitag Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower, Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan, Smart Mobile Computing, SmartSystems, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Vista Powered are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. There are U.S. and foreign patents as well as U.S. and foreign patents pending. Wi-Fi is a registered certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. ii 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Contents Before You Begin . xii Safety Information . xii Global Services and Support. xiii Warranty Information. xiii Web Support. xiii Telephone Support . xiii Service Location Support . xiv Who Should Read This Document . xiv Related Documents . xiv Patent Information . xv 1 Using the Printer . 1 Learning About the Printer Models. 2 Guidelines for Operating the Printer . 3 Understanding the Control Panel . 3 Using the Reset Button . 4 Understanding the Power Supply Options . 6 Using the Internal Battery. 6 Connecting to a Vehicle Power Supply. 6 Connecting to a DC Power Source . 7 Fixed Mount Printer . 7 Portable Printer. 7 2 Installing the Printer . 9 Installing the Internal Battery . 10 Installing the Ribbon Cartridge. 11 Adjusting the Printhead Gap . 12 Loading the Paper Tray . 13 Loading Paper in the Printer . 13 Positioning the Paper . 13 Adjusting the Pinfeed Holders . 14 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual iii Contents Inserting a Computer in the Terminal Holder . 16 3 Maintaining the Printer . 19 Cleaning the Printer Case . 20 Cleaning the Outside of the Case . 20 Cleaning the Inside the Case. 21 Cleaning the Printer Ribbon . 21 Cleaning the Mask Spring. 22 4 Configuring the Printer . 25 Connecting to the Printer. 26 Understanding the Font Modules . 27 Using the Windows 95 or Windows 98 Printer Configuration Utility . 28 Installing the Configuration Files . 28 Generating Custom Configuration Files . 29 Understanding the Printer Configuration . 29 Selecting an International Font. 34 Selecting Parameters . 37 Saving Files to the Printer . 40 Default Printer Settings. 41 Using the Windows 2000 or Windows XP Printer Configuration Utility. 42 Installing the Windows 2000/XP Printer Configuration Utility . 42 Disabling the Microsoft ActiveSync Serial Port Connections . 46 Operating the Printer Configuration Utility . 46 Communicating with the Printer. 47 Setting the 6822 Configuration . 49 Default Printer Settings. 53 Error Messages . 54 Timeout Error . 54 Port Not Found Error . 54 Access Denied Error. 54 Connecting to the Bluetooth Adapter . 54 5 Control Code Definitions . 57 Understanding Control Code Definitions . 58 I/O Buffer . 58 iv 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Print Image Buffer . 58 Special Notations . 58 Using Printer Control Codes . 59 Backspace . 59 Beeper . 59 Cancel Line . 60 Carriage Return. 60 Delete . 60 Form Feed . 61 Select Half-Speed Printing . 61 Cancel Half-Speed Printing . 61 Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode . 61 Line Feed . 62 Perform Line Feed . 62 Perform n/216-inch Line Feed . 62 Perform n/216-inch Reverse Line Feed . 62 Perform Master Reset . 62 Set Print Position (absolute) . 63 Set Print Position (relative). 63 Select Top-Down Printing . 64 Select Bottom-Up Printing . 64 Select Unidirectional Printing . 64 Cancel Unidirectional Printing. 64 Select Unidirectional (one line) Printing . 65 Page Formatting Functions . 65 Set Page Length (lines). 65 Set Page Length (inches) . 66 Select 7/72-inch Line Spacing (7 dots) . 66 Select 1/6-inch Line Spacing . 66 Select n/216-inch Line Spacing . 67 Select n/72-inch Line Spacing (n dots) . 67 Set Right Margin . 67 Set Left Margin. 68 Set Skip Over Perforation. 68 Cancel Skip Over Perforation. 69 Character Style and Text Mode Functions . 69 Select Condensed Mode (compressed). 69 Cancel Condensed Mode . 70 Select Double-Strike Mode . 70 Cancel Double-Strike Mode. 70 Select Double-Wide Mode . 71 Cancel Double-Wide Print . 71 Select Double-Wide Mode . 71 Cancel Double-Wide Mode . 72 Select Elite Pitch. 72 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual v Contents Select Emphasized Print Mode. 72 Cancel Emphasized Print Mode . 73 Defining Intercharacter Space . 73 Select Italic Mode. 73 Cancel Italic Mode . 74 Master Select . 74 Select Pica Pitch . 75 Select Superscript Mode. 76 Select Subscript Mode . 76 Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode . 76 Select Underline Mode. 77 Cancel Underline Mode . 77 Tabs and Tab Setting Functions . 77 Perform Horizontal Tab . 78 Set Horizontal Tabs . 78 Clear Horizontal Tabs. 79 Perform Vertical Tab . 79 Set Vertical Tabs . 79 Clear Vertical Tabs. 80 Set Vertical Tabs in Channel . 80 Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel . 80 Select Vertical Tab Channel. 81 Using Character Sets and User-Defined Functions . 81 Single-Byte Character Sets. 81 Double-Byte Character Sets . 82 Multi-Byte Character Sets . 82 Select National Character Set. 83 Hebrew Character Fonts. 84 User Defined Characters. 85 Copy ROM to RAM . 86 Define User-Defined Characters . 86 Select User-Defined Character Set. 87 Select Default Character Set. 87 Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 . 88 Disable Printing of Codes 128-159 . 88 Expand Printable Code Area . 88 Enable Printing of Character Graphics. 89 Disable Printing of Character Graphics . 90 Printing Character Graphics . 90 Graphics Functions . 91 Select Graphics Mode. 92 Reassign Graphics Mode . 92 Select Single Density Graphics Mode . 93 Select Low-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode. 93 Select High-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode . 93 Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Graphics Mode . 94 Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode . 94 vi 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode. 95 6 Troubleshooting . 97 Checking the Power Source . 98 Contents Aligning the Printer Mechanism . 98 Troubleshooting System Components. 100 Verifying the Printer Components . 100 Power Source Verification . 100 Communications / Host Computer Verification. 101 Understanding Printer Errors . 102 Runtime Errors . 102 Power-On-Self-Test (POST) Errors . 103 Fatal Errors . 104 Self-Test Function Descriptions . 105 Detailed Printer Self-Test . 106 Self-Test Report . 106 Understanding the Self-Test Report . 107 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips . 111 Compatibility Issues . 114 Understanding Diagnostic Information. 114 Communications Pin-Out Configurations. 119 A Specifications . 125 Specifications . 126 Printer Dimensions . 127 Fixed Mount Printer . 127 Portable Printer . 128 Media Specifications. 128 Material Breakdown . 129 Caliper Breakdown . 130 Understanding the Fanfold Paper Page Layout. 131 B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications. 133 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual vii Contents Using Configuration Commands. 134 Operating Modes. 135 Command and Control Modes . 136 Set Local Bluetooth Device Name . 137 Set Class of Device/Service Field . 137 Set Service Name . 137 Connectable On/Off . 137 Specify Page Scan Timing . 138 Enable Discoverable. 138 Specify Inquiry Scan Timing . 138 Set Encryption/Authentication: PIN CODE . 139 Manage Security Modes. 139 Read Module Version. 140 Read Local Device Address . 140 Set Shutdown Timing. 141 Clear Link Key Table . 141 Understanding Adapter States or Modes. 141 700 Series or CK60 to 6822 Pass Through . 143 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 to Bluetooth Module Communication Interface 143 Power Management Flow Diagram. 144 Radio Power On/Off Mechanism . 145 Persistent Storage . 145 System Behavior/Software Considerations . 145 Remote Configuration. 146 Bluetooth Performance . 147 Diagnostics Capabilities . 147 Applications . 148 System Qualification. 149 Operation Resilience. 149 Environmental Specifications . 149 Safety/Regulatory/Agency Requirements. 150 Default Configuration . 152 C Cross-Reference Tables . 153 Control Codes and Escape Sequences. 154 Single Character Control Code Definitions . 170 viii 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Escape Sequence Quick Reference . 173 Factory-Installed Printer Defaults . 175 D Printer Font Test Jobs. 179 About the Printer Font Jobs. 180 Big 5 Traditional Chinese Character Set. 180 Simplified Chinese Character Set . 181 IBM 437 Code Page Character Set . 181 Japanese (Shift JIS) Character Set . 181 Korean Character Set . 182 International Character Set . 182 I Index . 183 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual ix Before You Begin Before You Begin This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information. Safety Information Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions. This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this document. You may also see icons which tell you when to follow ESD procedures. A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. This icon appears at the beginning of any procedure in this manual that could cause you to touch components (such as printed circuit boards) that are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). When you see this icon, you must follow standard ESD guidelines to avoid damaging the equipment you are using. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. x 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Global Services and Support Before You Begin Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Service & Support > Warranty. Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals (in PDF). To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product. Telephone Support These services are available from Intermec. Services Order Intermec products Order Intermec media Order spare parts Technical Support Service Service contracts Description Place an order. Ask about an existing order. Order printer labels and ribbons. Order spare parts. Talk to technical support about your Intermec product. Get a return authorization number for authorized service center repair. Request an on-site repair technician. Renew a contract, ask about an existing contract. In the USA and Canada call 1-800-
755-5505 and choose this option 1 and then choose 2 1 and then choose 1 1 or 2 and then choose 4 2 and then choose 2 2 and then choose 1 1 or 2 and then choose 3 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual xi Before You Begin Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click Contact. Service Location Support For the most current listing of service locations, click Support >
Returns and Repairs > Repair Locations. For technical support in South Korea, use the after service locations listed below:
AWOO Systems 102-1304 SK Ventium 522 Dangjung-dong Gunpo-si, Gyeonggi-do Korea, South 435-776 Contact: Mr. Sinbum Kang Telephone: +82-31-436-1191 Email: sbkang@awoo.co.kr Sammi Information Systems Co Ltd 7-9FL, Seo Jo Building 103-15, Galwor-Dong Seoul, Yong San-ku Korea, South 140-807 Contact: Kyung-Hee Koo Telephone: +82-2-790-5508 Email: jlovekoo@sammicomputer.co.kr Who Should Read This Document This users guide is for the person who is responsible for installing, configuring, and maintaining the 6822 printer. This users guide provides you with information about the features of the 6822 printer, and how to install, configure, operate, maintain, and troubleshoot them. Related Documents The Intermec web site contains Intermec documents (in PDF) that you can download for free. To download documents 1 Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. xii 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Before You Begin 2 Click Support > Manuals. 3 In the Select a Product field, choose the product whose documentation you want to download. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Patent Information This product is protected by one or more of the following United States patents:
5,581,293; 5,613,790; 5,927,876; 6,088,049; 6,345,920 There may be U.S. and Foreign Patents Pending. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual xiii Before You Begin xiv 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 Using the Printer Use this chapter to familiarize yourself with the 6822 printer. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Learning about the printer models Guidelines for operating the printer Understanding the control panel Understanding the power supply options 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 Chapter 1 Using the Printer Learning About the Printer Models The 6822 printer is used in the route accounting industry to produce high-quality customer invoices, receipts, load reports, transfers, and other documents. A unique sleep feature saves energy when the printer is not printing, eliminating the need for an ON/OFF switch. Data input is normally provided by hand-held or mobile computers. The 6822 printer is available in the following models:
Fixed Mount Printer The fixed mount printer is mounted in motor vehicles or used in a settlement room. The terminal holder may be mounted on the printer or a remote dock can connect to the side of the printer. A deep paper tray, which holds up to 200 3-ply forms (up to 5 cm or 2 in of paper) is located under the printer mechanism. Portable Printer The portable printer has a handle so that you can carry it. An optional internal battery permits operation without the use of an external power source. The terminal holder is an integral part of this printer. A shallow paper tray, which holds up to 50 3-ply forms (up to 2.5 cm or 1.0 in of paper) is located under the printer mechanism. Note: The printer models are shown on page 8. The discharge of electrostatic energy accumulated on the human body, clothing, or other surfaces can damage or destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this printer. Avoid touching the electrical connectors while unpacking or setting up your printer. 2 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Guidelines for Operating the Printer Chapter 1 Using the Printer Make sure that you mobile computer remains connected to the printer when printing or operating. Keep the printer cover closed except during maintenance or when loading paper. Make sure the paper is properly installed in the paper tray or dashboard mount. Disconnect the printer power cable when jump-starting the vehicle. Make sure your printer is loaded with paper before communicating with your mobile computer. Do not spill liquids or food crumbs into the printer. Do not use solvents or abrasive cleaners on the printer. Do not rest objects on, under, or against the printer. If the printer is attached to a vehicle electrical system, do not start or stop the vehicle engine while printing. Do not overload the paper tray or paper jams will occur. Understanding the Control Panel The printer control panel has four status indicators in the top row and three buttons in the bottom row. Three indicators blink when there is a problem. The three buttons adjust and align the paper. Understanding the Status Indicators Description Indicator Description Paper Out The printer is out of paper. Head Jam Low Battery The printhead is jammed and cannot move. The internal battery voltage, the vehicle battery voltage, or the power module voltage is too low. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 3 Chapter 1 Using the Printer Understanding the Status Indicators (continued) Description Indicator Description Power The power LED turns green when you press any button and goes off after ten seconds. The LED also goes on when:
the printer is attached to an external power supply the printer is using the internal battery and the battery charge is low a print job is sent to the printer you perform a power-on-self-test Understanding How to Use the 6822 Buttons Name Form Feed Button Set Page Line Feed FORM FEED SET PAGE LINE FEED Function Press this button to feed the paper into the printer mechanism or when the printer should advance to the next form. If the printer ran out of paper, press this button to initiate automatic paper loading. Press this button to signal the beginning of the page to the printer after you have made the appropriate paper adjustments;
or to set the line feed counter to zero and move the printhead to its home position. Press this button to clear a Paper Out error so printing can resume. Press this button to adjust the top of the paper to the next line. Note: All printer covers are hinged to the printer. These hinges have a tension screw (turn clockwise to tighten, turn counterclockwise to loosen), should you need to adjust them. Using the Reset Button Use the printer reset button to:
reset a printer that is unresponsive and apparently locked up 4 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Printer force a synchronization between the printer and a connected PC when sending control codes restart the printer for any reason Note: The reset button does not reset a connected Bluetooth module as it is powered from a different power source. Both the fixed mount printer and the portable printer have a reset button on the left-hand side of the raised printer mechanism. See the following illustration for the location of the reset button. Reset button Fixed mount and portable printer reset button 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 5 Chapter 1 Using the Printer Understanding the Power Supply Options The following power supply options are available for the 6822s. Using the Internal Battery The internal battery (P/N 317-075-001) allows the portable printer and some fixed mount printers to operate independently of other power sources. The 6822 discharges the internal battery even when the printer is not is use. Over time, the internal battery can discharge to the point where the battery is not recoverable. Plug the printer into an external charge source or disconnect the battery when you store the printer for any length of time. A total discharge of the battery is most likely to occur when the battery is new and the battery chemical reactions are not fully formed, or the battery has had only one charge cycle. Connecting to a Vehicle Power Supply You will need to order a printer installation kit to install the 6822 printer in a vehicle. The following kits are available:
P/N 203-242-101 (fixed mount printers) P/N 203-242-102 (portable printers). The installation kits contain all of the hardware (nuts, bolts, washers, a terminal ring, and a fuse link) for connecting the battery cable directly to the vehicle battery. These kits also contain adjustable wire clamps to secure the cable in place. Note: The 6820 printer and associated electrical wiring should be installed under the supervision of properly trained and qualified personnel. See the 6820 Printer Installation Instructions (P/N 931-052-001) to learn how to connect the printer to a vehicle power supply. 6 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Connecting to a DC Power Source Chapter 1 Using the Printer Each printer has a dc power jack that connects the printer to a power source, such as the vehicle battery or an external power supply. Each printer communicates with a mobile computer through the mobile computer socket (in terminal holder, remote terminal holder, or vehicle dock). Fixed Mount Printer The dc power connector is on the bottom rear of the printer behind the printer terminal holder. The data communications socket is in either the printer terminal holder or a separate vehicle dock. Portable Printer The dc power connector is on the side of the printer beneath the printer terminal holder. The data communications socket is either in the printer terminal holder or a separate vehicle dock. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 7 Chapter 1 Using the Printer DC Power connector Mobile computer socket Fixed Mount Printer Mobile computer socket DC Power connector Portable Printer 6822 Printer Models 8 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 2 Installing the Printer Installing the internal battery Installing the ribbon cartridge This chapter provides instructions how to set up the 6822 printer for the first time. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Adjusting the printhead gap Loading the paper tray Loading paper in the printer Inserting a computer in the terminal holder 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 9 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Installing the Internal Battery The optional internal battery is primarily for portable printers. The battery can go in some fixed mount printers using a cable and a factory-
installed adapter. The printer battery recharges automatically when the printer is connected to an external power source. For most installations, the external power source is passed through the printer to the mobile computer. The printer battery does not provide charge to the computer. Note: Remove the printer battery when storing a printer for more than 30 days. After storage, reinstall the battery and connect the printer to an external power source for at least 14 hours to recharge the battery. To install the internal battery 1 Unlatch and open the printer mechanism. 2 Lower the battery into the rear of the printer case, as shown. 3 Attach the battery cable to the battery. 4 Push the battery down and back under the back edge of the case. The battery should snap into place. 5 Close and latch the mechanism. Battery Battery cable Printer mechanism Installing the internal battery 10 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Installing the Ribbon Cartridge Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Make sure there is a ribbon cartridge in the printer before you print and that the ribbon is fully seated (the cartridge makes a distinct snap or click when properly seated) with the visible portion of the ribbon straight and even. To install the ribbon cartridge 1 Turn the ribbon advance knob (in the direction of the raised arrows) to remove any slack in the ribbon. 2 Squeeze the ribbon cartridge locking tab into the cartridge, then lower the cartridge over the printhead. 3 Lower the tab side of the cartridge until it clicks. 4 Release the tab and press down on the arrow to fully seat the ribbon cartridge (tab clicks outward). 5 Turn the ribbon advance knob (follow raised arrows) to align the ribbon in the front of the printhead. Ribbon Locking tab Advance knob Tighten ribbon Installing the ribbon cartridge 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 11 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Adjusting the Printhead Gap The head gap adjuster is near the printer mechanism on the side opposite the green thumb wheel. The printhead adjuster has five notches between the printhead and the platen for different paper thicknesses. Verify the thickness of the paper loaded into the printer. To adjust the printhead gap If you are using single-sheet forms, set the head gap adjuster to the third notch away from the paper. If you are using multiple-sheet forms (2-ply or 3-ply), set the head gap adjuster to the fourth notch away from the paper. If you experience frequent head jams, set the head gap adjuster to the fifth notch away from the paper. This may stop the head jams. If the 2-ply and 3-ply paper have light printing, setting the gap adjuster to a closer setting will darken the print. 1 5 Adjusting the printhead 12 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Loading the Paper Tray Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Note: Do not exceed the recommended amounts of paper quantity or thickness. When loading multiple-sheet paper, be sure to have the original faced up, with the leading edge towards the rear of the printer. To load the paper tray in fixed mount and portable printers 1 Unlatch and raise the printer mechanism. 2 Lower a stack of paper, with the original faced up, into the paper tray under the printer mechanism. The fixed mount printer holds up to 200 3-ply forms about 5 cm
(2 in) thick. The portable printer holds up to 50 3-ply forms about 2.5 cm (1 in) thick. 3 Pull the top form out and over the rear of the printer mechanism. Lower and latch the printer mechanism. To load paper from the flat paper tray 1 Hold a stack of paper, up to 6 cm (2.5 in) thick, with the original facing you, and lay the stack flat into the tray. 2 Pull the top form out to load into the printer. Loading Paper in the Printer Follow these steps to load the paper into the printer, or paper jams may occur. Positioning the Paper Paper for the 6822 has perforated strips that fit onto the pinfeed holder pins, guiding the paper into the printer. This paper is sold separately in 1, 2, or 3-ply forms. To position the paper 1 Open the pinfeed holders outward. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 13 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer 2 Take the top edge of the sheet of paper and position it, original side facing down, over the pinfeed holder pins. 3 Align the first few holes of the paper, on each side of the paper, onto the pinfeed holder pins. 4 Close the pinfeed holders. 5 Raise the paper bail. 1 3 4 2 5 Positioning the paper Adjusting the Pinfeed Holders Note: There are two pinfeed holders, one next to the green thumb wheel and one opposite the same wheel. Always loosen the pinfeed holder opposite the green thumb wheel. Note: Adjusting the pinfeed holder next to the green thumb wheel may cause information to print in the wrong place. If this pinfeed holder is moved, correct its location by releasing the pinfeed holder tab, moving the pinfeed holder as close to the green thumb wheel as possible, then locking the pinfeed holder tab, before adjusting the opposite pinfeed holder. To adjust the pinfeed holders 1 With the pinfeed holders open, release the locking tab on the pinfeed holder opposite the green thumb wheel. 14 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 2 Installing the Printer 2 Adjust the pinfeed holder position so that the pins align with the paper. 3 Close the pinfeed holder. 4 Ensure that the paper is smooth (no folds, bulges, bows, etc.) between the pinfeed holders. If so, push the locking tab down on the pinfeed holder that you adjusted. Pinfeed holder Locked pinfeed holder locking tab Released pinfeed holder locking tab Thumbwheel
(green) Adjusting the pin feed holders To feed paper into the printer 1 Press Form Feed button to feed the paper into the printer. 2 Lower the paper bail. An empty printer autofeeds new paper approximately 0.25 cm (0.1 in) beyond the top of the paper bail. Note: The ideal distance to feed paper beyond the paper bail may vary due to environmental conditions (such as humidity) and specific aspects of certain paper. Use the green thumb wheel to position the paper to a desired distance according to your conditions. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 15 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Note: If your paper has a preprinted logo on every page, make sure the printhead is below the preprinted logo. If not, you can adjust the position of the paper, either by pressing the Line Feed button, or by using the green thumb wheel. 3 Once the paper is properly positioned, press the Set Page button to clear the Paper Out light and indicate where the top of the page is. 4 Close the printer lid. Make sure the paper passes through the paper slot when the printer begins to print. Inserting a Computer in the Terminal Holder Note: When removing the computer, do not press the computer keys against the terminal slide retainer. Always store the computer in the terminal holder. The fixed mount or portable printers have terminal holder options for the 4000 Series, 61XX, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, CK60, and the CN3 computers. To insert a 4000 series or a 62XX in the terminal holder 1 Insert the bottom of the computer into the terminal slide retainer. 2 Use the computer to push the terminal slide retainer and make room for the computer. 3 Lower the connector end of the computer into the terminal holder. 4 Slide the computer to fully seat it in the printer docking connector. To insert a 61XX, a 600 Series, a 700 Series, CK60, or a CN3 in a terminal holder 1 Insert the top of the computer into the terminal slide retainer. 2 Use the computer to push the terminal slide all the way in the direction shown. 3 Lower the connector end of the computer into the terminal holder. 16 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 4 Slide the computer to fully seat it in the docking connector. Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Inserting a computer in a terminal holder 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 17 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer 18 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 3 Maintaining the Printer Use this chapter maintain your 6822 printer. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Cleaning the printer case Cleaning the printer ribbon Cleaning the mask spring 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 19 Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer Cleaning the Printer Case Periodic cleaning helps maintain the appearance and reliability of the printer. When cleaning the printer, inspect both the outside and the inside for signs of damage or wear. Glass cleaners containing ammonia will cause permanent damage to the printer cover. Do not use abrasives or solvents (acetone, ketone, toluene, or xylene) to clean any part of the printer or permanent damage to the printer will occur. Note: MICRO-CLEAN II is the only cleaner recommended for the printer case. Other cleaners can damage the printer case. Note: GUIDE SHAFT CLEANER is recommended for cleaning your 80-column printer guide shafts. Cleaning the printer guide shaft can reduce the number of head jams caused by dirt and buildup. Note: Both cleaners are sold separately. Cleaning the Outside of the Case Do not pour liquid cleaners directly on the printer case. Instead, dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with a quality cleaner and clean the exterior surfaces with this cloth. Do not use solvent solutions. Inspect the DC power jack, all cables, and the remote terminal holder or vehicle dock for damage. 20 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer Cleaning the Inside the Case Let the printer cool before you clean the inside of the printer or you may burn your fingers. Open the printer cover and inspect the ribbon cartridge and all visible moving parts on the printer mechanism for signs of wear or damage. Pinfeed holder Thumbwheel
(green) Paper bail Ribbon cartridge Moving parts in the printer mechanism Use a low-pressure, dry air source, such as canned air, or a vacuum, to remove accumulated paper dust from the printer mechanism. Head gap adjuster Cleaning the Printer Ribbon The printer ribbon contains a special lubricant to ensure that the fine dot wires inside the printhead receive adequate lubrication. Replace the ribbon frequently to prolong the life of the printhead. The printer requires no additional lubrication. To remove the ribbon cartridge 1 Move the printhead mechanism to an open area. 2 Squeeze the ribbon cartridge locking tabs (on the side of the cartridge) against the ribbon cartridge. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 21 Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer 3 Lift the ribbon cartridge to remove the ribbon from the printhead. Make sure the ribbon does not catch or get sticky. 4 Lift the ribbon cartridge out of the printer. Cleaning the Mask Spring Check the mask spring behind the printhead.If the mask spring appears to be in good condition, install a new ribbon cartridge. If the mask spring is dirty, clean it as described below. To clean the mask spring 1 Unlatch the printhead locking tabs to release the printhead, lift the printhead aside, then lift up the paper bail. Do not detach the printhead unit. Never use a sharp object to clean between the printhead and the platen (rubber roller). This can damage the mask spring and printhead. 2 Remove the clear plastic paper guide that seats the mask spring, if necessary. Use your fingernails to loosen the base of the paper guide, then pull the paper guide straight up from the printer mechanism. 3 Remove the metal mask spring from the paper guide and clean with a quality cleaner. Replace if damaged. 4 Insert the mask spring in the paper guide and install the paper guide into the printer. 22 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer 5 Close the paper bail, reinsert the printhead, latch the two printhead locking tabs, and install the ribbon. Print head locking tabs Print head lifted aside Mask spring Cleaning the mask spring Raised paper bail 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 23 Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer 24 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual
1 2 3 4 | User Manual part 2 | Users Manual | 2.47 MiB |
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 4 Configuring the Printer A Printer Configuration Utility is used to load font on the printer and to change the printer settings. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Connecting to the printer Understanding the font modules Using the Windows 95 or Windows 98 Printer Configuration Utility Using the Windows 2000 or Windows XP Printer Configuration Utility 25 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Connecting to the Printer Connect your printer to your desktop computer using a serial cable
(P/N 226-270-001). The serial COM port connector on either the fixed mount printer or portable printer is on your printer mechanism, the same side as the green thumb wheel. Before connecting to your PC, locate and disconnect the gray terminal holder ribbon cable connector from the floor of the printer cavity. The cable is located behind the printer mechanism on the same side as the green thumb wheel and is the one that is not attached to the printer mechanism. Disconnect this terminal holder ribbon cable from the floor of the printer cavity Ignore this cable attached to the printer mechanism Intermec provides printer configuration utilities for the following Windows operating systems. If your PC has either Windows 95 or Windows 98, go to page 27 for instructions. If your PC has Windows 2000 or Windows XP, go to page 42. Understanding the Font Modules Intermec provides the following font modules for your 6822:
nft00000.mod Default International, 4820 compatible nft00437.mod IBM/Microsoft compatible Code Page 437 nft00932.mod JIS Japanese nft00936.mod GB2312 Chinese Simplified nft00949.mod KSC5601 Korean 26 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer nft00950.mod Big 5 Traditional Chinese Note: There are three versions of the default font module
(nft0000.mod): Arabic, Turkish, and International. Any one version of this module, but not all three versions, can appear in the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility FONTS directory and install on the 6822. The International version of this font module is automatically placed in the FONTS directory when the Printer Configuration Utility is installed on the PC. All three versions are included on the printer toolkit CD:
The Arabic version is included in the Default Fonts\Arabic directory. The Turkish version is in the Default Fonts\Turkish directory. The International version is in the Default Fonts\International directory. Use the Printer Configuration Utility to replace the existing default font module (nft00000.mod) with any of the of the other provided fonts. The Printer Configuration Utility is provided in the 6820 Tool Kit. Instructions for installing fonts are provided later in this chapter. For Windows 95 and Windows 98 Users If the default installation process was followed, the Printer Configuration Utility FONTS directory is located at 6820PRTR\TOOLKIT\FONTS where 6820PRTR is replaced by the actual directory in which you chose to extract the files. For Windows 2000 and Windows XP Users If you followed the default installation process, the Printer Configuration Utility FONTS directory is located at Program Files\Intermec\6820 Printer Configuration Utility\FONTS. Do not rename the font files in the FONTS directory. If rename the fonts will not work correctly. Using the Windows 95 or Windows 98 Printer Configuration Utility 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 27 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer These instructions apply to desktop computers running either Windows 95 or Windows 98 operating systems. Installing the Configuration Files Configuration files for the 6822 are located in the toolkit CD
(P/N 215-270-001), these include the rpgpconf.exe Printer Configuration Utility program and the rpgpconf.ini initialization file. The Printer Configuration Utility uses the initialization file to specify the location and names of font and printer control program folders. To set up your PC 1 Extract the toolkit files from the nptk6822.exe self-extracting archive file. 2 Create a directory, on your PC, with an appropriate name for the Printer Configuration Utility files. You could choose to have the files extracted at the root directory of your PC or specify another folder. Execute the self-extracting file from the target directory while specifying the path to nptk6822.exe in the command line. When you run nptk6822.exe, a TOOLKIT folder is created, as well the following folders:
DOS FONTS PCFS 6820SYS Generating Custom Configuration Files The Printer Configuration Utility also helps you create custom configuration files. These files have a .pcf file extension, and stored in the folder specified in the initialization file. See the default .pcf file in the PCFS folder for an example configuration file. Understanding the Printer Configuration A configuration consists of a list of fonts, some parameter settings, and optionally, a printer control program. 28 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer When you start the Printer Configuration Utility, it creates a printer configuration. This configuration has no fonts, parameters are set to the default values, and there is no printer control program in memory. You can modify the basic printer configuration to meet your needs and load the custom configuration to your printer. Note: The working configuration is deleted when you exit the Printer Configuration Utility. To start the Printer Configuration Utility. 1 Run rpgconf.exe and click OK on the first screen to continue to the Main Menu. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 29 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 The following options are available on the Main Menu. Use Load Printer Configuration to load an existing configuration. Load either from a file or from the printer. Use Modify Printer Configuration to review or modify the working configuration, include the printer control program in the currently loaded configuration, or load fonts. Use Save Printer Configurations to save a configuration file to disk or download the working configuration to your 6822. Use Defaults to restore the printer to its default configuration. Note: When the Main Menu is first displayed, the Save Printer Configuration options are grayed out, prohibiting selection of those options until a configuration is loaded or modified. 3 Click Exit, then click Yes to exit the Printer Configuration Utility. Click No to the keep the Main Menu open. 30 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To load configuration files from your PC 1 Click From File to access the File, Open window. 2 Select a configuration file to load, then click OK. If the selected file does not exist, a File does not exist! error message appears. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without loading a file. 3 If the file does exist, a warning message indicates that loading the selected file will overwrite your working configuration. Click OK to overwrite settings in working configuration, or Cancel to return to the Main Menu. 4 OK, the configuration from the selected file is loaded into memory and becomes the current working configuration. If this load is 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 31 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer successful, a message similar to the one shown below is displayed. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. 5 If the working configuration is not replaced successfully with the configuration from the selected file, an error message appears indicating that the operation failed. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without loading a file. To load a configuration from the 6822 1 Click From Printer from the Main Menu to display a warning message that indicates that the printers configuration will overwrite the working configuration. 2 Click OK to overwrite the configuration, otherwise click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without loading the printers configuration. 3 If you click OK, a message is then displayed prompting you to reset the printer. If the connection is not successful, after approximately 20 seconds, the following message appears. 32 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 4 Click Yes, to retry connecting to the printer. 5 If you click No, an error message appears and indicates that the configuration was not loaded. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. 6 If a connection is established, no further action is required The Printer Configuration Utility communicates with the 6822 to find out the current settings and which font modules are loaded. The name, version, and size of the font modules are displayed on the Get From Printer screen. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 33 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To modify a printer configuration Use this option to view or change a working configuration, including adding fonts from disk (on the PC), deleting printer fonts, and changing parameters settings. Select Modify Printer Configuration to view or modify the printer configuration. To include the control program Use this option to include the printer control program when saving the working configuration to the printer. The npfl6822.mod control program only needs to be changed when a new version becomes available. Select the Include Control Program check box to add the control program the next time you save the printer configuration. Selecting an International Font A variety of different international fonts are also available in the toolkit for the 6822. To select a font Click Fonts from the Main Menu to access the Font Selection screen where you can perform operations related to font files. The Fonts Available list shows font files that are available on disk. The Fonts Selected list show fonts that are in the current printer configuration. 34 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Note: Save is grayed out, prohibiting that selection, until either new fonts are selected, or fonts are removed from the Fonts Selected list. To copy font files 1 Highlight the font files in the Fonts Available list. You can highlight several files at one time, using conventional Windows selection methods. Click Copy to copy those font files to the Fonts Selected list Note: If you attempt to copy fonts from the Fonts Available list when these fonts already exist in the Fonts Selected list, the following error message is displayed, once for each of the duplicate fonts (where the current font file name is listed in place of nft00000.mod). 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 35 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 Click OK to close the error message and not copy the font to the Fonts Selected list. If there are two or more duplicate fonts, the cycle repeats until an error message is displayed for each of the duplicate font files. To delete font files Delete fonts from the Fonts Selected list to increase available memory in the printer. Select the font names you want to delete from the Fonts Selected list, then click Erase to clear those names. The Space Selection box, below the Fonts Selected list, displays the space remaining in flash (in kilobytes), based on fonts currently selected. When this number is negative, it means the available space in flash is less that the size of the selected fonts. Delete some fonts before saving the rest. Fonts marked with an asterisk (*), in the Fonts Selected list, are currently in printer memory. To cancel changes Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without making any changes. If you have not made any changes to the Fonts Selected list, you return to the Main Menu. 36 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Selecting Parameters To select a parameter Click Parameters from the Main Menu to access the Parameters window where you can modify any of the parameters that are not grayed out. Default parameter values are marked with an asterisk (*). To modify parameter configurations Select parameters on the screen using your stylus. Note: If you are using Bluetooth communication, you must change from the Norand Portable Communications Protocol (NPCP) mode to the Epson DTR mode with the baud rate set to 19.2 K and the parity set to None. To save parameters Click Save to update the working configuration and return to the Main Menu. To cancel the operation Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without modifying any configuration parameters. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 37 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To save a printer configuration Click To File from the Main Menu to access the File Save As dialog. Specify the drive, directory, and filename for the printer configuration file. To specify a file name 1 Click the Alpha button, on either the File Open window or the File Save As window to open the keyboard onscreen for you to enter text. 2 Click Save to save the file name or click Cancel to exit without saving the text. The following confirmation message appears. 38 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 3 Click OK to return to the previous window without the entered text, or click Cancel to continue using the alpha keyboard. To save the configuration to disk After you have selected the drive, directory, and file name, click OK to save the configuration file. If a file by the same name exists, the following confirmation message is displayed, informing you that if you continue it will overwrite the existing file. Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without saving the working configuration. Click OK fto continue. The following information is displayed assuring you that the working configuration was successfully saved to disk. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. To cancel the Save to File operation From the File, Save As window, click Cancel to abort the Save to File operation and return to the Main Menu without saving the working configuration. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 39 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Saving Files to the Printer Select the Save File to Printer option from the Main Menu, to send the working configuration to your 6822. When you select this option, the following warning message is displayed:
The message indicates the configuration will be copied into the 6822 flash memory and overwrite the current configuration. Click OK for the system to connect to the printer and transfer the configuration, or Cancel to return to the Main Menu without updating the printer. Connecting to the printer 1 After you click OK, a message appears informing you that the system is attempting to establish connection with the printer. 2 Connect a serial cable (P/N 226-270-001) between your PC and the printer. 3 Press the Reset button to reset the printer. 4 If the connection is not successful after approximately 20 seconds, the following message is appears. 5 Click Yes to retry making a connection to the printer. 40 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 6 If the configuration was not saved to the printer, the following error message appears. If the connection is successful, the following screen appears and the printer configuration is updated. The screen also displays the data transfer status. Default Printer Settings The following are the default settings used when you click Restore Defaults to Printer:
Default Printer Settings Settings Zero Print Option Autofeed Configuration Protocol Values Slash all zeros (zeros are printed with a slash) CR (carriage return at end of line without line feed) NPCP 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 41 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Default Printer Settings Settings Parity Bit Rate Values N/A (for NPCP) 19.2 K For other printer defaults, see Factory-Installed Printer Defaults on page 175. Using the Windows 2000 or Windows XP Printer Configuration Utility These instructions apply to desktop computers running either Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems. Installing the Windows 2000/XP Printer Configuration Utility The Windows 2000/XP Printer Configuration Utility is provided on the 6822TKCD toolkit CD (P/N 235-145-001). To set up your PC to use the Printer Configuration Utility 1 Insert the toolkit CD in your PC. 2 From your desktop, use your Explorer application to view the contents of the toolkit CD. 42 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 3 Double-click the setup.exe executable file, then click Next from the Welcome screen to continue. 4 The printer configuration utility files are copied to the Program Files\Intermec\6822 Printer Configuration Utility folder. To install the files in a different folder, enter the path and folder name. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 43 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer You can also specify if everyone who uses the computer has access to the printer configuration files or limit access to yourself. 5 Click Disk Cost to see the amount of disk space required to install the Printer Configuration Utility. Click OK to close and return to the installation screens. 44 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 6 Click Next to verify installation, click Back to adjust the information on the previous screen, or click Cancel to exit the installation. 7 Installation Complete appears on the screen. Click Close to exit the installation program. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 45 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Disabling the Microsoft ActiveSync Serial Port Connections If you use Microsoft ActiveSync to connect to your computers, you need to disable the serial port connections before using the Printer Configuration Utility. To disable ActiveSync 1 In the ActiveSync application on your desktop, select File >
Connection Settings. 2 Clear Allow USB connections and Allow connections to one of the following. 3 Click OK. 4 Close the ActiveSync application. Operating the Printer Configuration Utility The Printer Configuration Utility consists of a list of fonts, some parameter settings, and a printer control program. When the Printer Configuration Utility is active, it holds a configuration clipboard in memory. Initially, this configuration has parameters set to their default values. Consider the contents of the configuration clipboard as temporary and lost when you exit from the utility. Click the Get 6820 Configuration button to view the current printer configuration. 46 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Click the Set 6820 Configuration button to change printer setting and send those settings to the printer. Click the Reset to Defaults button to reset the to the factory default printer configuration. To start the Printer Configuration Utility Click Start > Programs > Intermec > 6820 Printer Configuration Utility > PConfigApp.exe to start the Printer Configuration Utility. Communicating with the Printer You can use COM port 1, 2, or 3 to communicate with your printer. COM port 1 is the default selection, but if it is not available or is being used by another application, select another COM port. To communicate with the printer 1 Click either the Get 6820 Configuration or the Set 6820 Configuration button to open communications with the printer. The Opening COM Port x to printer . message appears in the text box when you initiate communications sith the printer. The x in the message indicates which COM port is being used. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 47 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 When the Press Reset on the printer message appears in the text box, press the Reset button on your printer. For the location of the Reset button on your printer, see Using the Reset Button on page 4 3 The Opening COM Port x to printer. Done. message indicates that communication between your PC and the printer has been established. Note: If Unable to open COM Port x to printer appears in the text box another software application may be using the selected COM port. Select another COM port or disable the software application using the COM port. See page 54 for more error messages. 48 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To view the settings on your 6822 1 Click the Get 6820 Configuration button to initiate communication. 2 The Getting printer parameters . message appears when the Printer Configuration Utility retrieves configuration information from the printer. 3 The message Getting printer parameters . Done appears after configuration information is retrieved. 4 Modify configuration settings or click OK to close the Printer Configuration Utility. Setting the 6822 Configuration To modify configuration settings 1 Make changes to the Configuration Clipboard or click the Reset to Defaults button to undo your selections and return them to their defaults. Note: When using a Bluetooth adapter you must select the DTR communications protocol and a bit rate of 19.2K. 2 Click the Set 6820 Configuration button to initiate communication with the printer. The Setting printer parameters . message appears when you initiate communication with the printer. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 49 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 3 The Setting printer parameters . Done message appears when configuration parameters are set. Note: The Unable to set printer parameters message indicates a dropped connection between your PC and your printer. 4 Click OK to close the utility and detach the serial cable. To update 6822 fonts or the 6822 control program Click the Fonts and Control button to update the fonts stored in your printer or to update the printer control program. The Fonts Available for Update list shows font files that are available. The Fonts Selected for Update list show fonts that are to be installed jon the printer. 50 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To learn what fonts are currently installed on your printer Click the Get Printer Fonts button. The installed fonts appear in the text box in the bottom right corner of the dialog. To select font files Highlight the font files you want to download in the Fonts Available for Update list. Click the right arrow pointing to the Fonts Selected for Update list to copy the selected font files to this list. Below is a sample screen. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 51 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer If the fonts you select exceed the space available in printer memory, an error message appears. Click OK to close the error message and not copy the font to the Fonts Selected for Update list. If there are two or more fonts that exceed the space allowed, this message repeats until an error message is displayed for each of the font files that went over the space allowed. The Space Needed information shown beneath the Fonts Available for Update list indicates the total space required (in bytes) for all of the fonts in the list. The Space Remaining information listed below the Fonts Selected for Update list displays the space remaining in the printer, given the fonts in the Selected list. Click Update Printer to update the printer fonts and the control program depending on the options selected on the dialog. If the Selected list is empty and the Include control program update is not checked, a Nothing selected for update message appears in the text box. Formats the printer flash for font updates and writes new font files to the printer for any fonts in the Selected list. Click the top, right arrow to copy selected font files from the Fonts Available for Update list to the Fonts Selected for Update list. Click the bottom, left arrow to remove any selected files from the Fonts Selected for Update list. Click Update Printer to update the fonts in the printer with those in the Fonts Selected for Update list. The Update progress: bar indicates the progress as the control program or fonts are written to the printer. 52 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Check the Include program control update check box to include the printer control program when updating the printer. Note: You only need to update the control program when new versions of the control program are released. Default Printer Settings. Default Printer Settings Settings Zero Print Option Autofeed Configuration CR (carriage return at end of line without Value Print zeros without a slash Protocol Parity Bit Rate line feed) NPCP N/A (for NPCP) 19.2 K (19200) For other printer defaults, see Factory-Installed Printer Defaults on page 175. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 53 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Error Messages There are three instances when the 6822 may not connect to your PC. In the example error messages, an x indicates the assigned COM port number. Timeout Error The timeout error may occur due to either of these situations:
The printer was not reset in the time allowed. The COM port exists on the desktop computer but nothing is connected to the port. Error Message Unable to open COM port x to printer. Printer not reset within the time allowed or printer not connected to COM port x. Port Not Found Error The COM port does not exist. The particular COM port is identified in the error message. Error Message Unable to open COM port x to printer. COM port x cannot be found. Access Denied Error The COM port exists but a connection with the 6822 is not established. The particular COM port is identified in the error message. Error Message Unable to open COM port x to printer. Access to COM port x is denied. Close applications using COM port x or try another port. Connecting to the Bluetooth Adapter If your 6822 has a Bluetooth adapter, be sure to connect this adapter after you finish reconfiguring the 6822 fonts and exit the Printer Configuration Utility (gray cable beneath the printer mechanism). To enable Microsoft ActiveSync serial port based connections 1 Start ActiveSync and select File > Connection Settings. 54 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 Check Allow USB connections and Allow connections to one of the following. 3 Click OK. 4 Close the ActiveSync application. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 55 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 56 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 5 Control Code Definitions This chapter contains a set of control code definitions and specifications for page layout for the 6822 printer. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Understanding control code definitions Using printer control codes Understanding the fanfold paper page layout 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 57 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Understanding Control Code Definitions I/O Buffer All characters and control codes received by the printer are stored in this buffer. Characters and controls codes are read from this buffer and acted upon to form the print buffer. Characters are removed from the I/O buffer as they are processed. Print Image Buffer All characters go through this buffer on their way to the printed page. This buffer contains the graphic image of the dots to print, from which characters are rendered. It is cleared when its contents are printed. Special Notations The following information defines notations included in the format definitions of the escape sequences, throughout this section. Special Notations Notation
(0)
(1)
NUL Description Used in the ASCII column of any of the Format definitions, indicates that its value can only be zero (and not the character 0). For example: Select Top-
Down Printing ESC US (0). Used in the ASCII column of any of the Format definitions, indicates that its value can only be one (and not the character 1). For example: Select Bottom-Up Printing ESC US (1). When a number (at the end of an escape sequence) is marked with an asterisk, then either the value corresponding to that number or the value of the string character can be used for that number. For example, if 1* is shown, then either the value (1), or the value of the string character
(decimal: 49, hex: 31) can be used. The NUL character is represented in the Dec column as 0, in the Hex column as 00, and in the ASCII column as NUL. 58 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Using Printer Control Codes Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions These control code definitions are organized by categories of functions. The following methods assist in locating control codes easily:
Alphabetically organized (complete list)refer to the Control Codes and Escape Sequences table on page 164. Locate the index for the control code, and turn directly to that page. Numeric order (single character codes only)refer to the Single Character Control Code Definitions table on page 180. Locate the index for the control code, and turn directly to that page. Numeric order (complete list)refer to the Escape Sequence Quick Reference table on page 183 and look up control codes by their actual code values. Locate the index for the escape sequence, and turn directly to that page. The print buffer is emptied. The printhead is moved to the left one character space (using the current pitch). This can be performed to, but not beyond, the left margin setting. The backspace is ignored if justification of right, full, or centered is selected. Decimal 8 Hex 08 ASCII BS The backspace control code (BS) is not reliable when text contains different character pitches. For reliable backspacing, use the escape sequence (ESC \), Set Relative Print Position. The printer produces a beep lasting approximately 1/10 of a second Decimal 7 Hex 07 ASCII BEL Backspace Format Beeper Format 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 59 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Line All of the characters currently in the print buffer are discarded. Current print position is set to left margin. Text already printed cannot be canceled Format Decimal 24 Hex 18 ASCII CAN Carriage Return Repositions the printhead at the start of the print line (usually at the left margin), and repositions the pointer to the start of the print buffer, after printing all data in the buffer. Also, all of the one line functions are reset, such as bold, double-strike, double-wide, or unidirectional printing. Decimal 13 Hex 0D ASCII CR Note: You can add an automatic line feed with a configuration item. Deletes the last character in the print buffer. This functions only in left justification. Decimal 127 Hex 7F ASCII DEL Format Delete Format 60 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Prints the contents of the print buffer, clears the print buffer, and advances the paper to the top of the next page (Top of Form), according to the current page length setting. The carriage position is moved to the start of the line Form Feed Format Decimal 12 Hex 0C ASCII FF Select Half-Speed Printing Turns on half-speed mode to provide quiet printing, and more accurate print positioning during text mode printing. Format Decimal 27 115 1*
Hex 1B 73 01*
ASCII ESC s 1*
Cancel Half-Speed Printing Turns off half-speed mode (factory default), and continues with normal speed printing. Format Decimal 27 115 0*
Hex 1B 73 00*
ASCII ESC s 0*
Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Sets the amount of time the printer waits before it goes into low-power mode. The factory default is 10 seconds. Format Decimal 27 122 n Hex 1B 7A n ASCII ESC z n 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 61 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Line Feed Perform Line Feed Prints and then clears the contents of the print buffer, resets the character count to zero; and advances the printhead to the next print line, using the current spacing. The position of the carriage is not affected and a carriage return is not executed. Decimal 10 Hex 0A ASCII LF Perform n/216-inch Line Feed Advances the paper to n/216 of an inch. This does not affect subsequent line feeds. Range of n is 0-255. Decimal 27 74 n Hex 1B 4A n ASCII ESC J n Perform n/216-inch Reverse Line Feed Reverses the line feed by n/216 of an inch. This does not affect subsequent line feeds. Range of n is 0-255. Decimal 27 106 n Hex 1B 6A n ASCII ESC j n Format Format Format Perform Master Reset Initializes the printer and restores factory installed printer defaults, (see Factory-Installed Printer Defaults on page 175 for a complete list of settings that are initialized with this command). Format 62 Decimal 27 64 Hex 1B 40 ASCII ESC @
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Set Print Position (absolute) Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Moves the printhead to an absolute horizontal position on the paper. The distance is specified in dots from the left margin to the new print position
(at which subsequent characters are printed). Each dot represents 1/60 of an inch. The values for n1 and n2 determine the distance, as follows:
number of dots = n1 + (n2 * 256) Maximum position is 480. The previous contents of the current print buffer is printed. If the position specified moves the printhead outside the current margins, the command is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. This command is also ignored in right, center, and full justification modes. Format Decimal 27 36 n1 n2 Hex 1B 24 n1 n2 ASCII ESC $ n1 n2 Set Print Position (relative) Moves the printhead to a horizontal position on the paper, relative to the current printhead position. The distance specified is in dots. To determine n1 and n2, first calculate the displacement required in 1/120ths of an inch. If the displacement is to the left, subtract it from 65536. The values for n1 and n2 determine the distance, as follows:
number of dots = n1 + (n2 * 256) Maximum displacement is 960. If the position specified would place the printhead outside the current margins, this function is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. This function is also ignored in right, center, and full justification modes. Format Decimal 27 92 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5C n1 n2 ASCII ESC \ n1 n2 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 63 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Top-Down Printing Enables top-down printing (factory default). First page is printed first. Format Format Format Format Decimal 27 31 0 Hex 1B 1F 00 ASCII ESC US (0) Select Bottom-Up Printing Enables bottom-up printing. The last page is printed first. Decimal 27 31 1 Hex 1B 1F 01 ASCII ESC US (1) Select Unidirectional Printing Turns on unidirectional printing mode. Unidirectional printing moves the printhead from left-to-right only, allowing for more accurate print positioning during text mode printing. Decimal 27 85 1*
Hex 1B 55 01*
ASCII ESC U 1*
Cancel Unidirectional Printing Turns off unidirectional printing (factory default), allowing the printhead to print in both directions Decimal 27 85 0*
Hex 1B 55 00) ASCII ESC U 0*
64 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Unidirectional (one line) Printing Turns on unidirectional printing for the current line only. The contents of the print buffer is printed, and cleared before setting this mode. This allows more accurate print positioning during text mode printing, for the current line. Format Decimal 27 60 Hex 1B 3C ASCII ESC <
Page Formatting Functions This set of functions consists of control codes that change the formatting of the page. The page length (form length) and margin settings define the printable area on the page. These settings need to conform to the actual size of the paper used in the printer. The line spacing functions set the amount of space from one line to the next, for line feeds. The factory default is 1/6 inch (6 lines per inch). The page length, vertical tab, and skip over perforation functions are also dependent on the line spacing function. Set Page Length (lines) Sets the length of the paper in lines, where the range of n (number of lines) is 1-127 (default = 66). Keep in mind the line spacing and actual length of the paper when specifying this value, since this function is dependent on those parameters. Top-of-Form is reset to the current line and the Skip Over Perforation setting is canceled. Format Decimal 27 67 n Hex 1B 43 n ASCII ESC C n 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 65 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Set Page Length (inches) Sets thee length of the paper in inches, where the range of n (number of inches) is 1-22 (default = 11). Keep in mind the line spacing and actual length of the paper when specifying this value, since this function is dependent on those parameters. Top-of-Form is reset to the current line and the Skip Over Perforation setting is canceled. Decimal 27 67 0 n Hex 1B 43 00 n ASCII ESC C NUL n Select 1/8-inch Line Spacing Sets the line spacing is set to 1/8 of an inch (8 lines per inch), for subsequent lines. Decimal 27 48 Hex 1B 30 ASCII ESC 0 Select 7/72-inch Line Spacing (7 dots) Sets the line spacing to 7/72 of an inch (approximately 9.7 lines per inch), for subsequent lines. Decimal 27 49 Hex 1B 31 ASCII ESC 1 Select 1/6-inch Line Spacing Sets the line spacing to 1/6 of an inch (6 lines per inch), for subsequent lines (factory default). 1/6 inch is equal to 12 dot spacing. Decimal 27 50 Hex 1B 32 ASCII ESC 2 Format Format Format Format 66 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select n/216-inch Line Spacing Sets the line spacing to n/216 of an inch, for subsequent lines. A spacing of 1/216 inch is 1/3 the distance between pins of the printhead
(approximately 1/3 of a dot) and 27/216 is 8 lines per inch. Range of n is 0-255. Decimal 27 51 n Hex 1B 33 n ASCII ESC 33 n Select n/72-inch Line Spacing (n dots) Sets the line spacing to n/72 of an inch, for subsequent lines. A spacing of 1/72 inch (1 point in font size) is the distance between pins on the printhead (approximately 1 dot) and 9/72 is 8 lines per inch. Range of n is 0-85. Decimal 27 59 n Hex 1B 41 n ASCII ESC A n Set Right Margin Clears all text in the print buffer and sets the right margin to n columns, using the current character pitch. This is the number of the characters from column 1 (at the left edge of the paper) to the last column before the right margin (factory default = 80). Minimum space between margins is the width of one double-width pica character. Maximum value for this is the maximum number of characters
(based on the current pitch) that would fit between the left margin and the right edge of the default printable area of the page. Ranges shown below could vary, depending on values of other parameters that affect character width. If the value specified is not within the allowed range, it is ignored. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 67 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Range of n is 2-80 in Pica mode, 2-96 in Elite mode, and 2-136 in Compressed mode. Decimal 27 81 n Hex 1B 51 n ASCII ESC Q n Set Left Margin Clears the print buffer text and sets the left margin, relative to the number of columns to the left of the first column to print
(factory default = 0). Minimum space between margins is the width of one double-width pica character. Maximum value must be less than the right margin. Ranges shown below could vary, pending on other parameter values that affect character width. If the specified value is not within the range, it is ignored. Range of n is 0-78 in Pica mode; 0-93 in Elite mode, and 0-133 in Compressed mode. Decimal 27 108 n Hex 1B 6C n ASCII ESC l n Set Skip Over Perforation Defines the number of lines to skip between the last printed line on the page and the first printed line on the next page is set. If the value specified for this function is greater than the page length, it is ignored. This function is canceled by using one of the Set Page Length functions
(factory default = disabled). This function is valid for continuous paper only. The amount of space left blank at the bottom of the printed page is dependent upon the current Line Spacing. Decimal 27 78 n Hex 1B 4E n ASCII ESC N n 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format Format 68 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Skip Over Perforation Cancels the skip over perforation, which allows the maximum number of lines to print on each page. Format Decimal 27 79 Hex 1B 4F ASCII ESC O Character Style and Text Mode Functions The following set of functions affect the appearance of text on the printed page. This could involve size, typeface, or other characteristics of the text. Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Selects condensed mode which prints characters at approximately 60%
of the normal width. This results in character pitches, as shown below
(for exact pitch values, see Master Select on page 74). Character Pitches Condensed Mode 17 cpi (approximate) Condensed + Expanded 9 cpi (approximate) Condensed + Elite 20 cpi (approximate) This function empties the print buffer and turns compressed mode on, and stays on until canceled by Cancel Compressed Mode, ESC SI or DC2 (factory default = disabled). Note: This function is not supported in Double-Byte Character Sets (DBCS). Format Decimal 27 15 15 Hex 1B 0F 0F ASCII ESC SI SI 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 69 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Condensed Mode Cancels the compressed mode, enabled by Select Compressed Mode, SI or ESC SI (1). Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Format Decimal 27 18 18 Hex 1B 12 12 ASCII DC2 DC2 Select Double-Strike Mode Enables double-strike printing, until Cancel Double-Strike Mode is encountered. Factory default disables double-strike. Text is made bolder by printing each dot twice, with the second dot slightly below the first dot. This mode is not available in NLQ, but is not canceled when you select NLQ. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 71 Hex 1B 47 ASCII ESC G Cancel Double-Strike Mode Cancels Double-Strike Mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 72 Hex 1B 48 ASCII ESC H 70 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Double-Wide Mode Enables expanded print for the current line only. The mode set previously returns on subsequent lines. However, expanded print can be canceled with Cancel Expanded Print, DC4 or ESC W (0), before end of current line, or wrapping of the print buffer. This works with all three pitches (Pica, Elite, Compressed). This mode is also terminated by the execution of a Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed, Vertical Tab or wrapping of the print buffer. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 14 14 Hex 1B 0E 0E ASCII ESC SO SO Cancel Double-Wide Print Cancels expanded print for the current line only. Modes set previously return on subsequent lines. However, it does not cancel expanded mode set by Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode, ESC W (1) or Master Select, ESC !. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 20 20 Hex 1B 14 14 ASCII DC4 DC4 Select Double-Wide Mode Enables expanded print until Cancel Expanded Print is encountered. Factory default disables double-wide mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 71 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Decimal 27 87 1*
Hex 1B 57 01*
ASCII ESC W 1*
Cancel Double-Wide Mode Cancels Double-Wide Print mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 87 0*
Hex 1B 57 00*
ASCII ESC W 0 Select Elite Pitch A character pitch of 12 cpi (characters per inch) is selected. This also cancels Pica Pitch (factory default = Pica). Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 77 Hex 1B 4D ASCII ESC M Select Emphasized Print Mode Enables Emphasized Print mode until Cancel Emphasized Mode is encountered. The text is made bolder by printing each dot twice, with the second dot slightly to the right of the first dot. Factory default disables Emphasized mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. 72 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Decimal 27 69 Hex 1B 4B ASCII ESC E Cancel Emphasized Print Mode Cancels Emphasized Pring mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 70 Hex 1B 46 ASCII ESC F Defining Intercharacter Space Format Format Defines the amount of space to the right of each character, in addition to the space allowed in the character design. The variable n represents the number of units of space, with each unit equal to 1/120 of an inch. Range of values for n is 0-63 with a factory default of 0. Decimal 27 32 n Hex 1B 20 n ASCII ESC SP n Select Italic Mode The text (nongraphic) characters are italicized. Factory default disables Italic mode. Note: This function does not work well with DBCS or alternate Single Byte Character Sets (SBCS). Decimal 27 52 Hex 1B 34 ASCII ESC 4 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 73 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Italic Mode Cancels the Italic mode. Note: This function does not work well with DBCS or alternate Single Byte Character Sets (SBCS). Format Format Decimal 27 53 Hex 1B 35 ASCII ESC 5 Master Select Allows you to specify a combination of print modes. The variable n is determined by combining values for the desired modes, by adding them together. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 33 n Hex 1B 21 n ASCII ESC ! n Valid combinations of the values in the following table include any combinations except that Pica cannot combine with Elite. Example Pica Compressed Italic Underlined, by adding values (00h + 04h + 40h +
80h), which results in C4h for the value of n. Master Select Values Hex Value 00h 01h 04h 08h 10h 20h Mode Pica Elite Condensed (compressed) Emphasized Double-Strike Double-Width (expanded) 74 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Master Select Values (continued) Hex Value 40h 80h Mode Italic Underlined The following print conflicts occur between modes. A mode in any column takes precedence over all modes in the columns to its right. 1 Elite 2 Emphasized 3 Compressed The following print modes can be combined producing different pitches:
Print Conflicts Print Modes Pitch 5 cpi 6 cpi 8.58 cpi 10 cpi 12 cpi 17.16 cpi Mode Expanded Expanded Elite Expanded Compressed Pica Elite Compressed Select Pica Pitch Selecta a character pitch of 10 cpi (characters per inch) (factory default). This also cancels Elite pitch. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 60 Hex 1B 50 ASCII ESC P 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 75 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Superscript Mode Prints all subsequent characters in approximately 2/3 the normal height in the upper part of the character space, until Cancel Subscript/
Superscript is encountered. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Format Decimal 27 83 0*
Hex 1B 53 00*
ASCII ESC S 0*
Select Subscript Mode Prints all subsequent characters in approximately 2/3 the normal height in the lower part of the character space, until Cancel Subscript/
Superscript is encountered. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 83 1*
Hex 1B 53 01*
ASCII ESC S 1*
Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Cancels the effects produced by Select Superscript Mode and Select Subscript Mode. Factory default also disables both of these modes. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 84 Hex 1B 54 ASCII ESC T 76 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Underline Mode Enables the underlining of all subsequent characters (including spaces) until the Cancel Underline mode function is encountered. Decimal 27 45 1*
Hex 1B 2D 01*
ASCII ESC 1*
Cancel Underline Mode Cancels the effect of the Select Underline mode. Factory default also disables the Underline mode. Format Format Decimal 27 45 0*
Hex 1B 2D 00*
ASCII ESC 0*
Tabs and Tab Setting Functions There are control codes for setting horizontal and vertical tabs. Horizontal tabs:
Are not affected by subsequent changes in pitch. May range up to maximum width for character and printer size. All previous tab stops are cleared when new tab stops are set. If the left margin is changed after the horizontal tabs are set, tab stops are cleared. Become absolute positions and are not affected by any subsequent change in character size. Set outside of the printable area are ignored. Vertical tabs:
Tab positions are line numbers, counting from the Top of Form. All tabs set beyond the page length are stored, but are not used. Any tab set within the SOP range (Skip Over Perforation), during the time SOP is active, are stored but not used until SOP is canceled. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 77 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions If a vertical tab, and the next tab stop is outside the printable page area, a form feed is executed placing the printhead at the next Top of Form. Previous tab stops are cleared when new tab stops are set. Are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing. Perform Horizontal Tab Moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. The tab positions, set by ESC D, the Set Horizontal Tabs function, are not affected by any changes in character pitch. The factory default tab settings are at intervals of eight characters, in the currently selected pitch. For the default tabs, the actual distance to each tab position is affected by changes in character pitch. Decimal 9 Hex 09 ASCII HT Set Horizontal Tabs Resets the current horizontal tabs, and new horizontal tabs are set up, based on the current character width (pitch). Format Format Decimal 27 68 n1 n2 ..nk 0 1B 44 n1 n2 .. nk 00 ESC D n1 n2 .. nk NUL ASCII Hex n1 is the first tab (range for tab stops: 1-160), n2 is the second tab (all tabs in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs (maximum tabs: 32), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), NUL is the terminating character. 78 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Clear Horizontal Tabs Clears all horizontal tab stops. It is merely a variant behavior of the Set Horizontal Tabs function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character, as existing tabs normally clear before setting any new tabs. Decimal 27 68 0 Hex 1B 44 00 ASCII ESC D NUL Perform Vertical Tab Prints the contents of the current print buffer, and then moves the print position to the next vertical tab stop. If no channel is selected, then channel 0 is used. The carriage position is changed to the start of the next print line. If the vertical tab is performed beyond the last tab position set or beyond the last line of a form, then a form feed is performed. If no vertical tabs are defined, then the paper advances one line, using the currently selected line spacing, without changing the carriage position. Decimal 11 Hex 0B ASCII VT Set Vertical Tabs Resets the current tabs, and vertical tabs are set up, based on the current line spacing. Tab settings are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing. Format Format Format Decimal 27 66 n1 n2 .. nk 0 1B 42 n1 n2 .. nk 00 ESC B n1 n2 .. nk NUL ASCII Hex n1 is the first tab (range of values for tab stops: 1-255), n2 is the second tab (all tabs must be in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs
(maximum number of tabs: 16), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), NUL is the terminating character. All tab settings with this function are stored in channel 0. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 79 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Format Format Clear Vertical Tabs Clears all vertical tab stops . This is a variant behavior of the Set Vertical Tabs function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character. Decimal 27 66 0 Hex 1B 42 00 ASCII ESC B NUL Set Vertical Tabs in Channel This function works the same as the Set Vertical Tabs function, except that it stores the tabs into a specified channel, as specified by the variable c. This channel is selected for use by the Select Vertical Tab Channel function. Decimal 27 98 c n1 n2 .. nk 0 1B 62 c n1 n2 .. nk 00 ESC b c n1 n2 .. nk NUL ASCII Hex c is the channel number (range: 0-7), n1 is the first tab (range of values for tab stops: 1-255), n2 is the second tab (all tabs must be in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs (maximum number of tabs: 16), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), and NUL is the terminating character. Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Clears all vertical tab stops in the specified channel. This is merely a variant behavior of the Set Vertical Tabs in Channel function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character, since this function normally clears the existing tabs before setting any new tabs. Decimal 27 98 c 0 Hex 1B 62 c 00 ASCII ESC b c NUL 80 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Vertical Tab Channel Selects a specified vertical tab channel. It sets up the current tabs from that channel. Once this function is performed, all subsequent Perform Vertical Tab commands use the tab stops from the list retrieved from the specified channel. At power on, the printer uses the tabs stored in channel 0. Format Decimal 27 47 c Hex 1B 2F c ASCII ESC / c c is the channel number (range: 0-7). Using Character Sets and User-Defined Functions You can install different character sets on the printer. In some cases more than one character set may be present at one time, depending on the amount of available font memory. The 6822 reserves 438K of memory for installing fonts in flash memory. You can install fonts using NPCP or the Printer Configuration Utility. Single-Byte Character Sets Single-byte character sets (SBCS) are supported for MS-DOS, PL/N, and Intermec application compatibility. Nft00000.mod is the default character set (font) for compatibility with the 6822 80-Column Printer. Nft00437.mod is the IBM/Microsoft compatible character set for code page 437. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 81 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Double-Byte Character Sets Double-byte character (DBCS) sets require two bytes to send to the printer to define the character to print. The first byte of the character code sent to the printer is known as a lead-in byte. The second byte of the character code is known as the trailing byte. Different character sets have different requirements for the values of both lead-in and trailing byte. When the lead-in byte does not fall in the range listed for the character set, a character from a SBCS may print. The following double-
byte character sets are supported by the 6822. Double Byte Character Sets Code Page 936 Font Module nft00936.mod nft00950.mod nft00932.mod nft00949.mod 950 932 949 DBCS Languages GB 2312 Chinese
(simplified) big 5 Traditional Chinese Shift JIS Japanese KSC 5601 Korean Lead-in Byte A1hABh B0hF7h A1hC6h C9hF9h 81h9Fh E0hFCh A1hACh B0hC8h CAhFDh Trailing Byte A1hFEh 40hFEh (except 7Fh) 40hFCh (except 7Fh) A1hFEh Multi-Byte Character Sets Double-byte character sets and single-byte character sets can mix when printing a report. This mixture is referred to as a Multi-Byte Character Set (MBCS). When a DBCS is selected, the characters from the SBCS code page currently selected are used for rendering character codes and control codes from 0 to 127. Codes above 127 (that fall within the range of lead-in bytes for the selected character set) treat the byte that follows as a trailing byte for that character set. Otherwise, for character codes above 128, the character code from the selected SBCS is printed. NFT00950.MOD (BIG 5 DBCS) does not allow the MBCS mode. For this character set, only control codes from 0-31 are treated as single byte characters when they are not proceeded by a lead-in byte. All escape sequence character strings are treated as SBCS. 82 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select National Character Set By default, code page 0 is selected by the printer at reset. Use the following escape sequence to select international character support. Escape sequence codes can only be used for code page 0. All other code pages use direct character code mapping to select the appropriate font for rendering. Decimal 27 82 n Hex 1B 52 n ASCII ESC R n n is 0-14 and is the country code, as shown in the International Character Sets table on the next page. The default value for n is zero (USA). A full 256 character set is not provided for these sets. There are 64 international characters stored in ROM, 32 in Roman and 32 in Italic. They are stored as codes 0-31 and 128-255. These are normally not accessible. The ESC R command makes these codes available, but only 12 characters at a time. These 12 are available in these positions of the ASCII character table: 35, 36, 64, 91, 92, 93, 94, 96, 123, 124, 125, and 126, as shown in the International Character Sets table. International Character Sets Country USA France Germany England (UK) Denmark 1 Sweden Italy Spain 1 Japan Norway Denmark 2 Spain 2 Latin America Country Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 35
P
64 92 93
94 36 91
96
123 124 125 126
b
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 83 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions International Character Sets (continued) Country Hebrew Greek Country Number 13 14 96 94 91 64 36 92 93 35 123 124 125 126 Hebrew fonts are available in the supplied font files. See Hebrew Character Fonts below. Greek fonts are available in the supplied font files. See the Greek Character Sets on page 85. Hebrew Character Fonts Hebrew characters represented by decimal values 38 and 65 through 90 are represented by the following 7x7 font descriptions. 70 69 68 67 66 72 71
*.*.*.* ..*...* .....*. *....*. .....* ...*... *....*. *....*. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... *.*.*.. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 65
....... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 73
....... ...... .....* ....... .....* ....... *...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 81 80 75 74 77 78 79 85 88 83 84 82 86 76 87 84 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions
....... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 89 90 91 Greek Character Sets Chr Dec A 97 B 98 99 G D 100 E 101 102 Z H 103 104 q Hex 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Dec 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 Hex 69 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 6f 70 Chr I K L M N X O P Dec 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Hex 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Chr P S T Y F X Y W The selected set stays in effect until the printer is reset and receives a Master Reset command, or a new international character set is selected. Note: This function is only used with the default character set. User Defined Characters This code addresses user-defined characters and selection into memory. Note: RAM-based definition or redefinition of standard characters is only useful when the default SBCS code page is selected. There is no method to redefine characters in the other code pages, since unique code pages can be created and loaded into the printer memory. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 85 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Copy ROM to RAM The characters in ROM are copied into RAM, so a complete user-defined character set is created by editing selected characters. This ensures that all characters are defined when a user-defined character set is selected. This eliminates the need to cancel the selection when printing defined characters. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 58 0 0 0 Hex 1B 3A 00 00 00 ASCII ESC . NUL NUL NUL Define User-Defined Characters Characters are redefined by the user in the currently selected mode. However, they can only be used in draft mode. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Decimal 27 38 0 k1 k2 s1 d1 ... d11 Hex 1B 26 00 k1 k2 s1 d1 ... d11 ASCII ESC & k1 k2 s1 d1.....d11 k1 is the character code of the first character to redefine, k2 is the character code of the last character to redefine (any character between 0-255 can be redefined), and (k1 could equal k2, if only one character is defined). For each character defined, you must supply 12 bytes of data. Bits 0-3 represent the end position in the grid Bits 4-6 represent the start position in the grid Bit 7 determines whether the character uses the top eight pins or the bottom eight pins of the printhead. If bit 7 = 0, the top eight pins are s1 is the first byte that describes the character format 86 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions used. If bit 7 = 1, the bottom eight pins are used. The start and end positions are ignored during character imaging, but must be accurate to redefine the character code. d1...d11 is the data that comprises the dot image pattern of the defined character. When printable code expansion is enabled with ESC I, the Printable Code Area Expansion function, and the user-defined character set is selected with ESC % (1), the Select User-Defined Set function, then the codes (less than 20h and greater than 7Fh) can be defined for use and are printable. When printable code expansion is enabled with the Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 function, and the user-defined character set is selected with the Select User-Defined Set function, then codes (between 80h and 9Fh) can be defined for use and are printable. For a list of these characters, refer to the Printable Code Expansion Characters on page 89 Select User-Defined Character Set A user-defined character set can be selected, after the Define User-Defined Characters function is used to define the character set. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Decimal 27 37 1 Hex 1B 25 01 ASCII ESC % (1) Select Default Character Set If the Select User-Defined Set function was previously set, this function switches back to the default character set. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 37 0 Hex 1B 25 00 ASCII ESC % (0) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 87 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Format Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 All codes (128-159) are treated as printable characters, rather than control codes, with this function. This allows the use of these characters for user-defined characters. A user-defined set must be selected, using the Select User-Defined Set function, before these characters can print. Factory default disables printing of these codes.. Note: This function can only be used when the default SBCS is selected. Decimal 27 54 Hex 1B 36 ASCII ESC 6 Disable Printing of Codes 128-159 Disables the printing of codes 128-159. By default, these codes are disabled. Decimal 27 55 Hex 1B 37 ASCII ESC 7 Expand Printable Code Area This function allows certain ASCII codes (00h to 1Fh) and codes (80h to 9Fh) to print when the variable n is set to the value of 1. This allows the use of these codes for user-defined characters. If n = 0, the function returns these two ranges of characters to non-printable control codes. A user-defined character set must be selected by ESC % (1), the Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 function, before these codes can print. In both ranges, only the following codes can redefine as printable characters. Codes not listed, within the range (00h-1Fh), print as standard control codes. Codes not listed, within the range (80h-9Fh), are converted to a control code in the range of (00h-1Fh), by subtraction of 80h. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. 88 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Decimal 27 73 n Hex 1B 49 n ASCII ESC I n Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Printable Code Expansion Characters ASCII Hex DC1 00 NAK 01 02 SYN ETB 03 FS 04 GS 05 06 RS US 10 ASCII NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK DLE Hex 11 15 16 17 1C 1D 1E 1F Hex 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 90 ASCII none none none none none none none none Hex 91 95 96 97 9C 9D 9E 9F ASCII none none none none none none none none Format Enable Printing of Character Graphics Enables the printing of character graphics, until disabled with the Disable Printing of Character Graphics function. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Decimal 27 116 1 Hex 1B 74 01 ASCII ESC t (1) For character values from 0 to 31 (00h-1Fh):
When the default SBCS code page is selected, the FX-86e IBM character graphics symbol set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the codes (00h-1Fh), listed above in the Printable Code Expansion Characters table are printed. For character values from 32 to 126 (20h-7Eh):
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 89 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions When the default SBCS code page is selected, the selected international character set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the international character set selection is not in effect. For the character value 127 (7Fh):
When the default SBCS code page is selected, a space is printed When other SBCS code pages are selected, the character associated with the code page is printed. For character values from 128 to 255 (80h-FFh), the FX-86e Epson Character Graphics set is printed. Disable Printing of Character Graphics Disables the printing of character graphics. Factory default disables this function. Decimal 27 116 0 Hex 1B 74 00 ASCII ESC t (0) Printing Character Graphics This function allows printing of character graphics from the currently selected SBCS code page, by sending a graphics string to the printer. The values of the graphics data bytes can range between 0-255. Decimal 27 43 n d1 ... dn Hex 1B 2B n d1 ... dn ASCII ESC + n d1 ... dn n is the length of the character graphic string and d1 ... dn are the character graphics data stream. The number of data bytes must be equal to the value of the variable n. The range of values (for the characters in each graphics data byte):
0-255. For character values from 0 to 31 (00h-1Fh):
Format Format 90 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions When the default SBCS code page is selected, the FX-86e IBM character graphics symbol set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, currently selected single byte code page character graphics are printed. For character values from 32 to 126 (20h-7Eh):
When the default SBCS code page is selected, the selected international character set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the character from the currently selected code page are printed. For the character value 127 (7Fh):
When the default SBCS code page is selected, a space is printed When other SBCS code pages are selected, the character graphics symbol is printed. For character values from 128 to 255 (80h-FFh):
When the default SBCS code page is selected, the FX-86e Epson Character Graphics set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the corresponding character is printed. Graphics Functions Eight-Pin Graphics Modes All 8-pin graphics functions require parameters, n1 and n2, which represent the length of the graphics string that follows the Select Graphics Mode command, and are calculated as follows (assuming a temporary variable n):
The simplest calculation, is to divide n (total number of dots needed for the graphics string) by 256. Then n2 is the quotient (the whole number) and n1 is the remainder. If you require less than 256 dots (columns), then n1 indicates the number of dots and n2 is set to zero. n = total number of graphics dots needed for the graphic string n2 = integer of (n divided by 256) n1 = remainder of the n2 calculation 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 91 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Format Select Graphics Mode Enables the Graphics moderepresented by the variable m in the Graphic Modes table. The total number of dot columns to print is represented by n1 and n2. Any graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Decimal 27 42 m n1 n2 Hex 1B 2A m n1 n2 ASCII ESC * m n1 n2 Reassign Graphics Mode Changes Graphic modes. Decimal 27 63 s n Hex 1B 3F s n ASCII ESC ? s n s is one of the K, I, Y, or Z characters and n is one of the 0-7 modes as shown in Graphic Modes table. Graphic Modes Mode Single-density Low Speed Doubledensity
*High Speed Double-density
*Low-Speed Quadruple-density CRT I SingleDensity Plotter CRT II
*Double-Density Plotter
*Adjacent dots in a given row cannot be printed in these modes. m Dots per Inch / Dots per 8 in Line 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 60 dots per inch, 480 dots per 8 in line 120 dots per inch, 960 dots per 8 in line 120 dots per inch, 920 dots per 8 in line 240 dots per inch, 1920 dots per 8 in line 60 dots per inch, 480 dots per 8 in line 72 dots per inch, 576 dots per 8 in line 90 dots per inch, 720 dots per 8 in line 144 dots per inch, 1152 dots per 8 in line 92 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Single Density Graphics Mode This is a simple method of printing graphics. The resolution is 60 dots per inch. Each 8 in line can accommodate 480 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. Decimal 27 75 n1 n2 Hex 1B 4B n1 n2 ASCII ESC K n1 n2 Select Low-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode If Single Density graphics does not produce high enough density, try this mode. The number of dots per inch is doubled. However, the speed is reduced to half of what it would be with single density. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. This is 8-pin single density graphics. The resolution is now 120 dots per inch. Each 8-inch line can accommodate 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Decimal 27 76 n1 n2 Hex 1B 4C n1 n2 ASCII ESC L n1 n2 Select High-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode This 8-pin graphics mode produces the same density as the Low-Speed Double Density mode, however, the speed is doubled. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. Decimal 27 89 n1 n2 Hex 1B 59 n1 n2 ASCII ESC Y n1 n2 The resolution is still 120 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Make sure adjacent dots in a given dot row are not printed. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 93 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Graphics Mode With this 8-pin graphics mode, the number of dots per inch has gone up to 4x what it was in single density. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. Decimal 27 90 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5A n1 n2 ASCII ESC Z n1 n2 The resolution is now 240 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 1920 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Make sure adjacent dots in a given dot row are not printed. Nine-Pin Graphics Modes These 9-pin graphics functions also require two parameters, n1 and n2. However, they are calculated slightly different than in the 8-pin graphics modes. Since two data bytes represent each dot column to print, first divide the total length of the graphic string (following the Select ... Graphics Mode command) by two. These parameters are calculated as follows (assuming a temporary variable n):
First, divide n (the total number of dots needed for the graphics string) by 2, then divide the result by 256. Then n2 is the quotient (the whole number) and n1 is the remainder. If you require less than 256 dots
(columns), then n1 indicates the number of dots and n2 is set to zero. Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode Enables Single Density 9-pin Graphics mode. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described previously under Nine-Pin Graphics Modes. n = total number of dots needed, divided by 2 n2 = integer of (n divided by 256) n1 = remainder of the n2 calculation Decimal 27 94 0 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5E 00 n1 n2 ASCII ESC ^ (0) n1 n2 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format 94 Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions The resolution is 60 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 480 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode Enables Double Density, 9-pin graphics Mode. The parameters, n1 and n2, is described previously under Nine-Pin Graphics Modes Decimal 27 94 1 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5E 01 n1 n2 ASCII ESC ^ (1) n1 n2 The resolution is now 120 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 95 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions 96 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual
1 2 3 4 | User Manual part 3 | Users Manual | 1.34 MiB |
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6 Troubleshooting This chapter helps you correct printing problems that may occur. If you experience a printing problem, you can perform several tests to find and possibly correct the problem. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Checking the power source Aligning the printer mechanism Troubleshooting system components Communications pin-out configurations 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 97 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Checking the Power Source Press any button on the printer control panel. If there is power, the power indicator (green LED) turns on and the printhead moves to its starting position. If the printer emits beeps and any of the other indicators light up or flash, observe the number of beeps and indicator flashes and see Printer Failure Indicators on page 102 If there is no reaction from the printer after you press a key on the control panel, or only the green power light blinks, verify that the power cables are properly connected between the printer mechanism and its power source (internal battery, vehicle cable, or ac). If none of these steps wake up the printer with the problem, then you need to return the printer for service. Internal battery Check the battery and its cable by installing into another known-
good printer. Vehicle cable Attach the printer in question to another vehicle power cable. AC power Plug the printer into another outlet. Aligning the Printer Mechanism If head jams occur, you may need to align the printer mechanism. To align the printer mechanism 1 Open the printer top cover, then install a ribbon cartridge (see page 15) and position the printhead to the far left toward the green thumb wheel. 98 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 2 Check the area between the printhead and the printer cavity. If the ribbon cartridge touches the pivot frame, the printer mechanism needs realignment. Pivot frame Printhead at far left in the printer 3 Loosen the four screws that hold the mechanism in place using a Phillips screwdriver (see the following illustration). 4 Push the printer mechanism to the right away from the green thumb wheel. 5 Press on the right side of the printer mechanism to the back as far as it will go. Note: In this position, the right back edge of the printer mechanism may touch the pivot frame. The left side must not touch the pivot frame. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 99 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6 Hold the printer mechanism in place and tighten the screws in the sequence shown below. 3 Top left 1 Top right 2 Bottom left 4 Bottom right Four screws hold down the printer mechanism Troubleshooting System Components The printing system is composed of four basic components: printer, computer, power source, and communications. Any one of these components can prevent the printer from functioning properly. Verifying the Printer Components Power Source Verification Start by verifying that power is available at the printer. Visually inspect the control panel to verify that the power indicator (green LED) is lit. If it is not, press the Set Page button and note if the power indicator lights up. If it does, the power system is all right. If it does not, press the printer reset button. If the power indicator still does not light, check the power cable, by connecting it to a different printer. If the power indicator works on the new printer, then the cable is all right, and the printer that was originally connected is suspect. If it does not light, then the problem is most likely the cable or the power source. Depending on the results, either replace the cable or return the printer for service. 100 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Printer Verification If the power indicator works properly and the printer still does not print, then printer errors are noted. If any indicators light when you press the Set Page button, or the printer beeps, refer to the Printer Failure Indicators table on page 102 to determine the problem. If none of the listed conditions are indicated by the beep codes and LEDs, yet the printer does not perform properly, then perform a printer self-test. Press and hold (for several seconds) both Form Feed and the Set Page buttons at the same time, until the printer beeps and all indicator lights come on. The lights change throughout the test, as it progresses. At the end of the self-test, the printer generates a report. This report verifies the following: errors detected during self-test, the error history, and the communication configuration. If the printer self-test report does not print, then reset the printer. If the report does print after resetting, then the printer is all right and the reason the printer does not respond to PC print requests is probably communications or PC related. If the report is partially completed, and a printer error occurs during the printing of self-test, refer to the Printer Failure Indicators table on page 102 for the cause of the printer failure. Perform a power-on-self-test (POST) to test for errors either by resetting the printer or powering it up. If errors occur, audible error codes, along with indicator light status, are produced during POST (see the POST Error Codes table on page 104). If the POST completes without error, try the printer self-test again. If the self-test prints correctly, but the printer does not respond to the PC, then the problem may be related to communications or PC problems. Communications / PC Verification Use the self-test report to verify that the communications protocol options, selected at the printer, match those expected by the host. If they do not match the expected results, reconfigure the printer using the control panel configuration modes described below in the Configuration part of this chapter. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 101 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting If the protocol options match, then the communications cable may be defective. To determine if the cable is working, substitute a new cable. If the PC is suspect, substitute a different PC. A defective computer dock might be another possibility. Understanding Printer Errors Printer Errors are divided into classes:
Runtime errors POST errors, Fatal errors (consisting of flash write errors and EEPROM block errors). Runtime Errors Runtime errors can occur during the course of printing. These errors are displayed on the LEDs, along with beep sequences. This causes the printer to stop printing and enter an error state. Then beep sequences are emitted, LED codes are displayed, the error status may be sent to the host (depending on the protocol), and the printer goes into suspend mode. The printer exits from the suspend mode when the user presses one of the keyboard keys or communications is resumed from the host. The printer also places the printhead in its home position and attempts to recover from the error condition. Until the error condition is corrected, the error procedure does not end, and the error state is not removed. For paper out errors, load paper and press the Set Page button before printing begins. Press the Form Feed button to load the paper to the top of form. The following table provides a listing of printer failure indicators and describes what they mean. Printer Failure Indicators Sets of Beeps 1 beep 1 set of 2 beeps Paper Out Head Jam Low Batt Off Off On 2 blinks Off Off 1 set of 3 beeps Off Off 3 blinks Meaning 12 V under voltage fault (Low Battery) 12 V over voltage fault (Input Voltage too high) 24 V under voltage fault (internal power supply failure) 102 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Printer Failure Indicators (continued) Sets of Beeps 1 set of 4 beeps Paper Out Head Jam Low Batt Off 4 blinks Off 1 set of 13 beeps 2 sets of 2 beeps 2 sets of 3 beeps 2 sets of 4 beeps 5 sets of 2 beeps Off Off On Off 5 blinks Off 2 blinks Off On 5 blinks Off 2 blinks Off Off 5 blinks 3 sets of 2 beeps 3 blinks Off 3 blinks 3 sets of 4 beeps 4 sets of 2 beeps 12 sets of 12 beeps Off Off 4 blinks 3 blinks 4 blinks Off Off Off Off Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Meaning 24 V over voltage fault (internal power supply failure) Configuration error printhead over temperature Paper Out Head Jam Paper feed current fault
(Possible paper jam or feed motor failure) printhead over current (printhead failure) Home switch failure printhead short (printhead failure) Operating System software failure Note: The most common errors are Paper Out, Low Battery, and Head Jam. Status indicators on the front panel alert you to these errors. For a description see Understanding the Status Indicators on page 3 Power-On-Self-Test (POST) Errors When you reset the printer, a POST runs to determine why the printer might be failing. Audible error codes, along with indicator light status, are produced during POST if an error occurs. See on POST Error Codes on page 104. To perform a POST 1 Open the printer case. 2 Insert the printer diagnostic cable into the phone jack on the printer and then connect the 9-pin D-Sub plug to your PC. The cable is used during POST to configure the printer, access printer diagnostics, update software, and install new fonts. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 103 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 3 Press the Reset button to start the POST. When the POST starts, green Power LED will come on followed by a single beep indicating that the printer is active. Note: After the test is completed, all LEDs turn off and the printhead moves to the home position. Only runtime errors or fatal errors are reported until the next time the printer is reset and POST is performed. The printer emits beeps and flashes the LEDs to indicate the cause of any POST errors. POST error codes are described in the following table. POST Error Codes Long Beep 0 0 0 Short Beep 1 0 0 Paper Out Off Off Off Head Jam Off Off Off Low Batt Off Off Off Power Meaning On Off On 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 2 4 4 0 5 5 0 Off Off Off Off On On On On On On Off Off Off Off On On Off On Off On Off On Off On On On On On On On On On Operational No Power Control program Initial Program Load (IPL) successful Invalid CRC on boot block Invalid CRC on control program or program not found Upper 192K RAM failure Upper 64K RAM failure Diagnostic mode command check Diagnostic flash memory check failed or is not initialized Diagnostic memory write failure Control program IPL Fatal Errors There are two types of fatal errors, flash write errors and EEPROM configuration block errors. These errors are extremely rare, but measures are built into the printer diagnostics to track possible occurrences. Flash Write Errors Errors related to writing or erasing flash are critical errors. These errors cause the printer to stop all processing and produce an LED code and a sequence of beeps. The LED code indicates the address of the segment where the error occurred in octal notation. 104 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting The octal digit changes every four beeps until four octal digits are output. Only four octal digits are output since blocks are 256 bytes in size and flash can be addressed with a total of 0x7ff blocks. The segment address output is the runtime address of the flash block and not the offset of the block within flash. To obtain the block offset within the flash Subtract 0x800 from the address output to determine the block offset. The printer suspends after the processing the error code. When the printer resumes, an error again and the printer suspends again. Reset the printer to correct the error. If a reset does not correct the error, have the printer checked by a qualified service technician. Note: Flash write errors may be unrecoverable. EEPROM Configuration Block Errors Errors related to an invalid configuration block (diagnostic block) produce 13 beeps, and then the printer suspends. It continues to produce this symptom until the configuration block error is corrected. Configuration block errors may be caused by a flash write error or an incorrect printer configuration. Reset the printer to correct the error. If a reset does not correct the error, have the printer checked by a qualified service technician. Self-Test Function Descriptions The self-test performs the following functions. Boot Block Program Verification A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is performed on the boot block program. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC embedded in the program module. Control Program Verification A CRC is performed on the control program, which is loaded into writable flash program memory. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC embedded in the program module. The results of this test are printed on the self-test report. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 105 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Font Module Verification A CRC is performed on the font modules, which are loaded into writable flash font memory. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC embedded in the program module. Results are printed on the self-test report. A2D Check Current reading of the A2D sources are performed, and the results are printed on the self-test report. Nonvolatile Diagnostic Memory Verification A CRC is performed on the area of the nonvolatile diagnostic memory that has a CRC over it. Results are printed on the self-test report. Nonvolatile Diagnostic Memory Update The nonvolatile diagnostic memory is updated from the nonvolatile diagnostic memory data shadowed in memory. Detailed Printer Self-Test Perform a self-test to verify printer functions, and provide reporting of printer diagnostics. The self-test performs a series of internal diagnostics and prints the results. When the self-test begins, the beeper sounds for half a second and all LEDs turn on for half a second. Initiating Self-Test While the printer is idle or in Suspend mode, press the Line Feed and Set Page buttons simultaneously to initiate a self-test. Terminating Self-Test Press the Line Feed and Set Page buttons simultaneously to manually terminate a self-test. Self-Test Report Note: This method is recommended to determine printer functionality. 106 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting A self-test is equivalent to a warm start. Both are performed when you simultaneously press Form Feed and Set Page buttons on the control panel for a few seconds. Release the buttons when the printer beeps and all indicators are lit. If you press the buttons for too long, the self-test will not happen and the printer will form-feed one page. As the self-test progresses, the indicator lights change. Internal tests are performed and the two page report is printed. This report provides helpful information in diagnosing and troubleshooting printer problems. When you perform a self-test, the following actions occur:
All LEDs are turned on to verify the lights work A 600 ms beep is emitted to verify the beeper works LEDs flash individually to show progress during internal tests Current voltage and ambient temperature are obtained Validity of diagnostic block program is checked Validity of boot block program is checked Validity of control program is checked Validity of loaded fonts is checked LEDs turn off Self-test report is printed Printer capability is diagnosed by printing the report. Device errors are displayed on the LEDs and emitted by the beeper. The printer then does a warm reset (soft reboot) when an error is encountered or when the self-
test report prints. Understanding the Self-Test Report The self-test report is divided into sections. Refer to page 110 and page 111 for a sample printout. All other values are informational only. Remember that these values are cleared after the self-test. The printer model number is given on line 1 (first line). This identifies the printer type used, in this case the 6822. The 8-digit serial number of the printer is listed on line 4 under the Serial# heading on line 3. The serial number is also on the inside of the printer. In portable printers, raise the printer mechanism to look for the number on the inside back wall. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 107 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Battery Voltage, (line 13) Indicates the input voltage sampled at the beginning of the self-test. The input range must be between 7.5 and 15 V. The input voltage must be greater than 10.5 V to charge the internal battery. At 7.5 V or less, the Low Batt LED comes on and the printer enters Sleep mode. At 10.5 V or less, the Low Batt comes on but the printer still prints. Auto Feed (line 16) Auto feed is a configurable item. Carriage Return (CR) means no auto linefeed. This is the most common setting for applications using NPCP CR+LF means a line feed will be added to each CR. This setting can produce double-spacing of reports. See Setting the Autofeed on page 29 Interface Mode (line 17) Interface mode lists the interface protocol for the printer. The typical setting is NPCP. Others include DTR with no, odd, or even parity, and IrDA. See Protocol Selection Mode on page 29 Bit Rate (line 18) Bit rate is commonly set to 19200 (19.2K) or 9600 bps. See Selecting the Bit Rate on page 29 A2D History (lines 21 through 25) Shows the recorded history for voltage measurements and temperature measurements. Head Jam History (lines 26 through 29) Provides information on head jams. If the printer is having frequent head jams, these lines can assist in determining the problem. Head Jam History Information Heading Home Command Direction Speed Description Err indicates the home position LED sensor has failed. Indicates which printer command was executed when the head jammed. Indicates which way the head was moving, left is toward the home position and right is away from the home position. Home position is at the extreme left, toward the green thumb wheel. Indicates the acceleration speed of the printhead when the jam occurred. 108 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Head Jam History Information (continued) Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Heading Step Temp Position Description The acceleration step at the jam. 0 means no steps were taken, 15 means all steps were taken. 1-14 indicates the printer jammed during acceleration or deceleration. The ambient temperature at the last head jam. The temperature is listed in Celsius. Position of carriage at the time of the jam in 1/720 in = 12 *
step position. Divide the number by 12 to get the step position. There are 512 steps across the page. If it is jammed at position 0, check the printer mechanism alignment. If it is jamming in the middle, it is more likely a dirty ribbon or obstruction in the printheads path. Head Dot Pattern (line 37) Is used to verify the individual dot wires. There should be nine dots. If some dots are missing, it could be a printhead failure or a circuit board failure. Error Log information appears on lines 38-43. This information is cleared after every self-test. Error Log Information Heading PE HJ 12Vu 12Vo 24Vu 24Vo Home Temp OverC HeadS Fault Description Number of paper jams while feeding paper Number of head jams while printhead is moving Number of 12 V under-voltage Number of 12 V over-voltage Number of 24 V under-voltage (head/motor voltage) Number of 24 V over-voltage Number of home detect errors (typically caused by paper scraps or circuit failures) Unused Number of head over-current errors (typically caused by a bad printhead) Number of head driver short errors (typically caused by circuit failures) Number of paper feed motor over current errors (excess current in paper feed motor could indicate circuit failure) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 109 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Error Log Information (continued) Heading ADErr EEErr Dlink Llink Description Number of A2D conversion failures Number of EEPROM write failures to diagnostic block Number of software memory errors (corruption in internal memory) Number of software memory errors Sample First Page of the Self-Test Note: Lines 15-18 are factory default printer settings. Take note of these lines when reading the self-test report.
------------------------------------------- 1NP6822 2 Copyright 1997, 1998, Intermec Technologies Corporation. All Rights Reserved. 3Serial# MFG Date Hardware Check Repairs Svc Date 412345678 yy/mm/dd ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (TOP) GO/NG 00 yy/mm/dd 5 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (MLB) 6 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (PS) 7 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (IOB) 8Revisions:..........0000000000303100 9Bootblock: NPBB6822.MOD - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 10Control Program: npfl6822.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 11Font Module: nftxxxxx.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 12Font Module: nftxxxxx.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 13Battery Voltage: 012.34 Low...../....High 14Total Pages: 123456 15Zero Font Style: O 16Auto Feed: CR 17Interface mode: NPCP 18Bit Rate: 19200 19Cold Starts: 00024 20Warm Starts: 00050 21A2D History 22 Curr Low High Min Max Error Page Count 2324v: 024.00 023.21 023.91 023.21 024.51 027.21 00401 00021 2412v: 012.55 010.91 013.51 010.90 014.50 8.71 00401 00021 25Temp: 023 -020 055 -021 060 000 00401 00021 26Head Jam History 27Total Head Jams: 00186 28Home Command Direction Speed Step Temp Position Page 29 Print Left Const 010 -010 01440 12345 30NPCP History 31Disc Addr Parity IFTS Seq CRC Frame Bind IPLDU 3212345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 33IRDA History 34 FramesOk BroadCasts CRC/TMO DISCARD 35rx 1234567890 1234567890 0123456789 0000000000 36tx 1234567890 1234567890 0123456789 0000000000 37HEAD DOT PATTERN 38 Error Log 39PE HJ 12Vu 12Vo 24Vu 24Vo Home Temp OverC HeadS Fault ADErr EEErr 40Dlink Llink 4112345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 4212345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 4312345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 110 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Sample Second Page of the Self-Test Page 2 of the self-test contains the print pattern used to diagnose printer mechanical behavior. The pattern continuously prints the ASCII characters between 33 and 126 decimal inclusive for the entire page, or until you cancel the print by pressing a button on the printer. An example of that rotating pattern is shown below.
0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%
0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%
0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%
0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL Self-Test Failure For help, see Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips on page 111. Check the power source (internal battery, charge cable, or ac adaptor) for a possible power failure. Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips The following table lists actual printing problems, possible causes, and actions you should take to correct a problem. Possible Printer Problems Symptom Printer does not communicate with the mobile computer. Bluetooth unable to connect. Make sure you are in range
(10 cm to 10 m) Double-spacing on application reports but single-
spacing on self-test. Zero prints incorrectly (with or without slash). Solution Test or Cause Incorrect protocol selection. Check lines 17 and 18 on the self-test report for correct bit rate and protocol selection. Change protocol settings through configuration process. Make sure the Bluetooth shutdown timer has not expired Make sure your device is configured to be discoverable and/or connectable. For help, see Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications on page 133. Check line 16 on the self-test report. CR+LF indicates an incorrect configuration for NPCP. Check line 15 on the selftest report for the Zero Font Style setting. For help, see Cleaning the Mask Spring on page 22. If incorrect, adjust the zero print option, see Cleaning the Mask Spring on page 22 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 111 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Possible Printer Problems (continued) Symptom Test or Cause Check line 11 or 12 on the Does not print extended character set missing font. selftest report to see if the NFT0000.MOD file is listed after Font Module. Printer mechanism does not have adequate power for printing. The 12 V may be under or over voltage fault.
(Note: Error lights do not flash if voltage is too high) If power supply, adjust supply voltage to 7.5 to 15 V. Printer emits 1 or 2 beeps or blinking green light is the only indicator. If battery, recharge or replace
(see Installing the Internal Battery on page 10 Printer emits 2 sets of 3 beeps Printer out of paper Printer works but some or all LEDs do not work. Printer does not print Gray ribbon cable connecting control panel board to pivot frame assembly is loose. No voltage No data input Test: Pull paper toward roller. Cause: If paper is resistant:
Paper wrinkled, creased, moist, or perforations missing Adjust supply voltage to 7.5-15 V Tighten computer connections. Paper tray too full White ribbon cables obstructing paper Ensure fewer than 200 3-ply sheets in the deep paper tray and fewer than 50 3-ply sheets in the shallow paper tray. Solution Use the 6820 Printer Tool Kit to reload the font file or send the printer in for hardware repair. Check battery or power supply. Check the printers internal battery, if installed. Check the vehicle charge cable (see 6822 Printer Installation Instructions P/N 931-052-001). Reload paper into printer mechanism. For help, see Loading the Paper Tray on page 13. Call Customer Support
(800-755-5505) or send printer for hardware repair. Voltage too high or low. Check line 13 on the selftest report, under the Battery Voltage heading No paper feed (paper jam or head jam) Torn paper perforation Head Jams due to carriage alignment. Check line 29 on self-test report, under Position heading, for value. Remove torn paper, load and center new paper, readjust pinfeed holders. 112 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Possible Printer Problems (continued) Symptom Test or Cause Straighten the white ribbon Replace the paper. cables. No paper feed (paper jam or head jam) Move the printhead manually from side to side. Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Solution If 0, realign mechanism in pivot tray. See Aligning the Printer Mechanism on page 98 Remove ribbon cartridge, move printhead. If smooth, ribbon is jammed. Remove ribbon cartridge, move printhead. If still resistant, mask spring is bent or damaged. Cause: printhead gap adjuster too tight. Cause: Paper scraps found in printer mechanism or around platen. Printer mechanism unlatched
(unlocked). (portable, fixed mount printers) Remove ribbon cartridge and turn knob. If ribbon resists, replace ribbon cartridge (see Installing the Ribbon Cartridge on page 11 Replace the mask spring see Cleaning the Mask Spring on page 22 Set the head gap adjuster to the fifth notch away from the paper see Adjusting the Printhead Gap on page 12 If ribbon cartridge bumps against inside of printer, check white ribbon cable, home position sensor, and four screws. Remove any paper scraps, do a cleaning. Latch (lock) the printer mechanism into place. Perform a self-test. Note: In paper jams or head jams, press the Set Page button to clear the printer before printing can resume. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 113 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Compatibility Issues Use the following information to determine some compatibility issues that come up relative to the 6822:I Compatibility Issues and Conclusions Issue Does a 6820 ribbon work on the 6822?
Do 6820 applications work on the 6822?
Conclusion Yes. Yes. Applications that work on the 6820 also work on the 6822. Yes. The downloadable character set feature is the same for both the 6820 and 6822. Does the 6822 work with an application that downloads some custom characters to the printer?
Can 6820 printers be replaced with 6822s? Yes. 6822s can be installed on existing 6820 mounting brackets. Understanding Diagnostic Information Diagnostic information is stored in flash to support the hardware configuration, both at time of manufacture and in the field. This includes recording the initial configuration changes to hardware and software, and various environmental statistics helpful in determining why failures are occurring in the field. The flash is provided for storage of critical data that must remain in the unit after power to the unit is lost. The data in the flash is used for diagnostic information for a catastrophic failure, or over the phone with a customer. Diagnostic information is updated and maintained by the printer. All diagnostic information is shadowed in RAM. At the end of every 50 forms, the flash information is updated from the RAM. The printer also updates the diagnostic information for nonrecoverable error, printer resets, printer self-test, and remote polling of diagnostic information. Fields are stored with ID first, then length, then data. The details of the data and the length of the entire field, including ID and Length bytes, are shown in the Diagnostic Information table on page 115. The amount of flash memory reserved for nonvolatile diagnostic memory is 16 K bytes. Printer self-test prints most of the information contained in the diagnostic memory for remote and end-user diagnostic access. 114 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Diagnostic Information Field Id 01 Length Description 4 3 Serial Number Date of Manufacture, yy/mm/dd Hardware Configuration ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (top level P/N) ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (control board) ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (power supply) ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (I/O board) CRC of preceding fields Hardware Revisions: ECNs. applied. 64 ECNs can record separately by number 1-64. Service Repairs: a two-digit field indicating number of times serviced Date of last repair, yy/mm/dd Cold starts since MFG or last repair Warm starts since last cold start Pages printed over life Last high and low voltage extremes on 24 V input over last 50 reports. Extremes stored as 8-bit A2D conversions Voltage extreme history stores min/max 24 V A2D conversions over printer life 24 V voltage error. Voltages greater than 10%
considered errors. A2D error count Form number at last voltage error 24 V error count Last high and low voltage extremes on 12 V input over last 50 reports. Extremes stored as 8-bit A2D conversions Voltage extreme stores min/max 12 V A2D conversions over printer life 12 V error. Voltages less than 10.5 V and greater than 14.5 V are considered errors. A2D value is recorded Page number at last 12 V error 12 V error count Temperature, maximum and minimum over last 50 reports. Set A2D value 7 7 7 7 2 8 1 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 08 09 10 20 30 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Total Length Stored as 7 digit BCD set at MFG 39 bytes 6 digit BCD set at MFG 52 digit BCD set at MFG 2 byte binary set at MFG 8 byte bit field 11 bytes 2 BCD digits 6 BCD digits binary digits binary digits binary digits 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 8 bytes 11 bytes 11 bytes 11 bytes 115 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Information (continued) Field Id Length Description 2 Temperature, min/max over printer life. Set A2D value Temperature error. Last A2D conversion below -10 or above 60C recorded Page number at last temperature error Total number of temperature errors Total number of head jams Command 0 = Stop 2 = Print 4 = Print/LF 6 = Seek 8 = Slow Seek 10 = Change Speed 12 = Feed 14 = Wait Speed 00 = Init 01 = Low 10 = High Direction 1 = Left 0 = Right Home Switch 0 = No Error 1 = High Error Acceleration or deceleration stop motor value when jam occurred Ambient temperature when had jam occurred. Set A2D value Form number where head jam occurred Carriage position where head jam occurred IrDA rxFramesOK total frames received OK Total Length 11 bytes Stored as 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes binary bits 0-3 bits 4-5 bit 6 bit 7 1 byte binary 1 byte 2 bytes binary 2 bytes binary in 1/720 in 4 bytes 46 bytes 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 4 40 60 116 Diagnostic Information (continued) Field Id Length Description 4 Stored as 4 bytes Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Total Length 74 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes IrDA rxFrameCrcErr total frames received with CRC error IrDA rxTotalBytes total bytes received OK 4 bytes IrDA rxFramesDiscardBuf total frames 4 bytes discarded due to no buffer space IrDA rxBroadcastFrames total broadcast frames received OK IrDA rxFramesDiscardHwErr total received frames discarded due to hardware error IrDA txFramesOK total frames transmitted OK IrDA txTotalBytes total bytes transmitted OK IrDA txBroadcastFrames total broadcast frames transmitted OK IrDA txFramesNotTxTimeout total frames not transmitted due to time out IrDA txFramesNotTxHwErr total frames not transmitted due to a hardware error Paper out count Head jam count 12 V low count 12 V high count 24 V low count 24 V high count Home switch error count Unused Over current error count Head short error count Paper fault error count A2D conv. error count EEPROM write error count Double link error count Lost link error count 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 70 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 117 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Information (continued) Field Id Length Description 2 2 Out of buffers error count Unused Total Length Stored as 2 bytes 20 * 2 bytes 118 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Communications Pin-Out Configurations Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This section shows common cable configurations between a mobile computer or a dock and the printer. Mobile Computer Signal Name Pin #
Pin #
Chassis Ground Charge Input SG (Signal Ground) DSR (Data Set Ready) DTR (Data Terminal Ready) CTS (Clear To Send) RTS (Ready To Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) Dock_A/B_SW shell 8 9 7 2 6 3 5 4 NC shield 1 9 7 6 20 5 4 3 2 12 Wall Mount Printer or Remote Mount Terminal Holder Signal Name NC (No Connection) HHC_CHARGE GND DTR NC RTS CTS TXD RXD Term A/B 8 1 15 9 13 1 25 14 15-Pin DSUB Male 15-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-605-1XX) 15-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-605-1XX) 25-Pin DSUB Male 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 119 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting PC Wall Mount Printer Signal Name Pin #
Pin #
Signal Name DTR (Data Terminal Ready)*
RC (Receive Carrier) TC (Transmit Carrier) DCD (Data Carrier Detect) SG (Signal Ground) DSR (Data Set Ready)*
CTS (Clear to Send) RTS (Ready to Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) 20 17 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
* Signals are not available on the 6100 Dock 20 17 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 NC (No Connection) NC NC NC GND DTR RTS CTS TXD RXD 1 13 14 25 13 1 25 14 25-Pin DSUB Female 25-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-771-XXX) 25-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-771-XXX) 25-Pin DSUB Male 120 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting PC Printer Signal Name Pin #
Pin #
Signal Name TXD (Transmit Data) RXD (Receive Data) RTS (Ready to Send) CTS (Clear to Send) DSR (Data Set Ready) SG (Signal Ground) Chassis Ground 3 2 7 8 6 5 4 5 3 6 7 9 RCT TXD CTS RTS DTR (Data Terminal Ready) GND shield shell shell 8 Chassis Ground Terminal Charge out to computer 1 5 6 9 1 8 9 15 9-Pin DSUB Female 9-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-016-XXX) 15-Pin DSUB Female 9-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-016-XXX) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 121 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Dock Printer w/6210 Terminal Holder Signal Name Pin #
Pin #
Signal Name TXD (Transmit Data) DTR (Data Terminal Ready) RTS (Ready to Send) RXD (Receive Data) CTS (Clear to Send) DSR (Data Set Ready)*
SG (Signal Ground) 2 20 4 3 5 6 7 4 2 3 5 6 7 9 RXD NC (No Connection) CTS TXD RTS DTR GND open shield shell
* Signal is not available on the 6100 Dock 13 1 25 14 8 1 15 9 25-Pin DSUB Male 25-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-162-XXX) 25-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-162-XXX) 15-Pin DSUB Female 122 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting PC Printer Pin #
Pin #
7 5 3 2 8 6 5 3 2 1 5 1 9 6 1 6 9-Pin DSUB Male Data Communications Cable (P/N 226-270-XXX) RJ-11 Jack Data Communications Cable (P/N 226-270-XXX) The printer has a 25-pin connector with the following pinout designations and signal mnemonics:
Printer Communications Connector 15-Pin DSub 1 2 3 4 5 6 25Pin DSub Signal Name NC 20 4 2 3 5 NC DSR (Data Set Ready) CTS (Clear To Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) RTS (Ready To Send) Type RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 I/O IN IN IN OUT OUT Description NC (No Connection) Printers DSR Wake up Printers RxD Printers TxD Printers RTS 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 123 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Printer Communications Connector (continued) 15-Pin DSub 7 25Pin DSub Signal Name 6 Type RS-232 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) HHC_CHARGE GND 8 9 9 7 I/O OUT OUT Description Printers DTR 11-13 V, 2 A maximum SG (Signal Ground) POWER POWER 124 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual A Specifications This appendix provides physical specifications for the 6822 printer models as well as specifications for the media used with the printers. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 125 Appendix A Specifications Specifications Print Speed 230 cps Note: Various print fonts do affect the print speed. Weight Fixed Mount Printers6.55 kg (14.41 lbs) Portable Printers w/ 4000 or 61XX terminal holder5.80 kg (12.75 lbs) w/ 62XX, 600 series, 700 series, or CK60 holder5.67 kg (12.25 lbs) Mounting plate1.93 kg (4.25 lbs) Flat paper tray2.45 kg (5.40 lbs) Compact paper tray2.05 kg (4.50 lbs) Temperature DC Operating -20C to 60C (-4F to 140F) AC Operating -20C to 45C (-4F to 113F) Storage -30C to 70C (-22F to 158F) Humidity Operating10 to 85% noncondensing Storage5 to 95% noncondensing Altitude Operating100 to 5000 m Storage15,000 m Electrical Voltage13.8 VDC (nominal) Current10 mA (idle, sleep mode not charging batteries);
3.5 A (average while printing);
450 mA (charging internal battery);
Up to 1.5 A (charging computer battery) Vibration 12 g RMS for 4 hours 126 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications ESD 15 kV noncontact and 8 kV contact Battery Shelf Life 1 year at 25C (77 F) 2.3 Ah 12 V sealed lead-acid) Note: The battery goes dead within two weeks when connected to the printer and with no external charge source. Note: A printer and a computer, using the supplied serial cable, can operate up to 9 m (30 ft) apart. Printer Dimensions Listed below are the dimensions of the fixed mount and portable printers. Fixed Mount Printer The base of the fixed mount printer is 32.5 cm (12.75 in) wide by 35.5 cm (14.0 in) front to back. The upper portion varies according to the configurations shown in the following table. Fixed Mount Printer Dimensions Configuration
(with deep paper tray) with 61XX Holder Side Mount with 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Side Mount with 61XX Holder Top Mount with 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount Width 51.4 cm
(20.25 in) 47.0 cm
(18.5 in) 42.5 cm
(16.75 in) 38.1 cm
(15.0 in) Length 36.8 cm
(14.5 in) 36.8 cm
(14.5 in) 42.6 cm
(16.75 in) 42.6 cm
(16.75 in) Depth 19.1 cm
(7.5 in) 20.3 cm
(8.0 in) 19.1 cm
(7.5 in) 20.3 cm
(8.0 in) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 127 Appendix A Specifications Portable Printer The portable printer may come with a handle, an AC foot, or with a terminal holder top mount. Portable Printer Dimensions Width Configuration 41.9 cm with handle, 61XX Holder Top Mount, and Deep Paper Tray
(16.5 in) with handle, 61XX Holder Top Mount, Shallow Paper Tray 42.5 cm
(16.8 in) 38.1 cm
(15.0 in) 41.9 cm
(16.5 in) with handle, 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount, and Deep Paper Tray with handle, 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, or 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount or Fill Plate, and Shallow Paper Tray Length 42.6 cm
(16.8 in) 42.6 cm
(16.8 in) 42.6 cm
(16.8 in) 38.1 cm
(15.0 in) Depth 20.3 cm
(8.0 in) 19.1 cm
(7.5 in) 20.3 cm
(8.0 in) 13.0 cm
(5.1 in) Note: The AC foot adds 6.35 cm (2.5 in) to the length of the printer. Media Specifications Using paper that matches the following specifications ensures optimum 6822 performance. Variation from these specifications, use of aged paper, or use of paper exposed to elements such as dirt or humidity may cause printing problems. The printer works with 1-3 ply carbonless paper that is single-edge glued and designed for sprocket feed. Standard paper size is 8.5 x 11 in or 241 x 305 mm international (8.5 x 12 in). Use 3-ply forms up to a maximum of 0.23 mm (0.009 in) thick. A soft, flexible, rubber type cement applied to one perforation strip only is preferred. The paper should wrap around a 1 1/4 in diameter roll without curl or wrinkle. 128 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Material Breakdown The following tables show the material broken down per ply:
14# CBF (Carbonless Back and Front) Appendix A Specifications Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness (RS) Smoothness (CB) Brightness (Wht) Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Under 13.3 lb 2.6 4.0 110 220 86 Over 14.7 lb 3.2 6.0 230 320 90 Target 14 lb 2.9 5.0 165 270 88 15# CF (Carbonless Front) Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness (RS) Smoothness (CB) Brightness (Wht) Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Under 14.43 lb 2.5 4.0 100 100 84 Over 15.8 lb 3.2 6.0 180 180 86 Target 15 lb 3.0 5.0 140 140 85 16# CB (Carbonless Back) Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness (RS) Smoothness (CB) Brightness (Wht) Opacity (Wht) Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Under 15.2 lb 2.8 4.2 120 220 84 78.5 Over 16.8 lb 3.8 6.7 270 320 88 82 Target 16 lb 3.3 5.7 180 270 86 81 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 129 Appendix A Specifications 20# OCR Laser Bond Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness Brightness (Wht) Opacity (Wht) Target 20 lb 4.0 3.8 140 94 85 Under 15.2 lb 3.8 4.7 100 82 84 Over 16.8 lb 4.2 5.0 170 N/A N/A Caliper Breakdown The following table shows the caliper of forms broken down by ply:
Caliper Breakdown 1-Ply (20 lb) 2-Ply (15 lb and 16 lb) 3-Ply (14 lb, 15 lb, and 16 lb) Target 4.0 6.3 9.2 Maximum 4.2 7.0 10.2 130 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Understanding the Fanfold Paper Page Layout Appendix A Specifications The following illustration shows the printable area of the lower section of a page of fanfold paper and the upper section of the next page. The Assured Print Area is the best area to use for printing. Page width Assured Print Area 8 inches Max. Assured Print Area 55 lines max
(at 1/16 line spacing)
(area 2) 0.75 inch
(or more) Paper End Detection Position Perforation
...Xyz Abcdef...
(area 1) 1 inch 1 inch
(area 1) Abcdef... ..Xyz
(area 2) 0.75 inch
(or more)
(area 3) 1.833 inches
(11 lines) Printable Area of Fanfold Page You should leave a 1 in margin at both the top and the bottom of the page. This provides for a margin of six lines at 1/6 in line spacing. Even though printing in Area 1 (before or after the perforation) may be possible, you should keep in mind that paper feed precision is reliable only within the Assured Print Area. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 131 Appendix A Specifications The top and bottom margins are represented by Area 1, as shown in the previous illustration. The top margin is defined as the distance between the top edge of the paper and the first row of printed characters. The bottom margin is defined as the distance between the last row of printed characters and the bottom edge of the paper. There is a possibility that printing can start within one line below the perforation and printing could continue beyond the Assured Print Area, however paper feed precision is only reliable with top and bottom margins of approximately one inch. Basically, you should consider there are only 55 lines available for reliable printing. The left and right margins are represented by Area 2. For reliable printing, use a margin of at least 0.75 in for the left and right margins. The Paper End Detection line indicates the point where the Paper Out sensor detects the bottom edge of the paper. Area 3 represents the distance between the Paper End Detection position and the bottom edge of the page. Once the last page of the fanfold paper stack is in the printer, and the printhead has advanced past this Paper End Detection line, printing is no longer reliable. When the bottom end of the last page has advanced through the printer, past the spring plate along the front of the platen, the paper should not reverse back through the printer, because the printer could jam and cause paper feed problems. 132 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual
1 2 3 4 | User Manual part 4 | Users Manual | 1.07 MiB |
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Configuration of the Bluetooth radio and software is accomplished using the Bluetooth Configuration Commands listed in this appendix. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 133 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Using Configuration Commands an h suffix are in hexadecimal a 0x prefix are in hexadecimal a b suffix are in binary All printable characters can be entered directly via the keyboard. Any non-printable characters are entered in binary data format. Numbers are in decimal format except numbers with:
Binary data format is any non seven-bit ASCII data to transmit to the module is encoded in the Internet percent notation. Any hex byte to transmit is preceded by the % sign and encoded in hex ASCII. To send the value 0xF5, the %F5 bytes are transmitted. The %character is always transmitted as %25. Thus, a Bluetooth address could transmit as %00%E0%03%45%F4%6D. Generic format:
<command character><command type><command payload><CR>
<command character> is one character from the set: [A-Z]
<command type> is one character for the set: [0-9]
<command payload> is variable in length.
<CR> is the command terminator. The <command payload> is formed from printable ASCII characters from the code range 0x20 to 0x7E. Codes outside of this range are escaped using the percent (%) character followed by two hexadecimal digits. The percent character is always represented by the three characters %25. The command terminator is character code 0x13 (carriage return), or character code 0x10 (line feed), or character codes 0x13, 0x10 (carriage return, line feed). An example command to set the friendly name to Lens 100% serial module:
F0Lens 100%25 serial module<CR>
Character codes outside of the range of 0x20 to 0x7E are ignored. When using percent (%) to form hexadecimal character codes there must be exactly two hex digits using characters: [0-9, A-F, a-f]. Characters outside of this range cause the command to fail. 134 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Commands that fail return the four character sequence NAK<CR>
Commands that are accepted return the four character sequence ACK<CR>
Commands that return payload data use the format:
<command character><command type><command payload><CR>
<command character> is one character from the set: [a-z]
<command type> is one character for the set: [0-9]
<command payload> is variable in length.
<CR> is the command terminator. The command character is the lower case version of the local host command. Operating Modes The module interface has two modes:
Bluetooth Link Active State In this case the Serial Interface looks like a raw serial port (TxD, RxD, CTS, etc. and GND). There is no intelligence in the Bluetooth module from the serial interface perspective. This mode does not support the command and control modes described below. Bluetooth Link Inactive State This mode exists when a Bluetooth link does not exist. In this case, the serial interface looks like a serial port that supports a number of command and control modes. On reset, the unit comes up in Bluetooth Link Inactive state. After the first Bluetooth connection, the unit goes into Bluetooth Link Active state. It stays in this state until the link is lost because the Master shuts it down or there is an out-of-range condition, it then returns to the Bluetooth Link Inactive state. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 135 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Command and Control Modes Query Mode Commands Example Commands Command
?<CR>
?F0<CR>
?L<CR>
?C0<CR>
?C1<CR>
?D0<CR>
?D1<CR>
?S1<CR>
?S2<CR>
?S4<CR>
?T0<CR>
?B0<CR>
Command
?<CR>
?F0<CR>
?L<CR>
?C0<CR>
?C1<CR>
?D0<CR>
?D1<CR>
?S1<CR>
?S2<CR>
?S4<CR>
?T0<CR>
?B0<CR>
Function Read ACK Read Friendly Name Read Security Mode Read Connectable Mode Read Page Scan Timing Read Discoverable Mode Read Inquiry Scan Timing Read Class of Device Read Service Name Read PIN Code Read Shutdown Timeout in minutes Read Bluetooth Addresses of all the paired devices Reply ACK<CR>
f0MyFriendlyName<CR>
10<CR> Turn off Encryption, Authentication, and Exclusion 11<CR> Authentication 12<CR> Encryption and Authentication 13<CR> Encryption, Authentication, and Exclusive c0ON<CR>
c11024,512<CR>
d0ON<CR>
d11024,512<CR>
s1001F00<CR>
s2MyServiceName<CR>
s4MyPinCode<CR>
t0Shutdown Timer = 5 minutes<CR>
b0No Devices PairedCR>
136 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Note: These commands are only available over the serial link, not over the air and are not available when the device is in the Bluetooth Link Active State. Set Local Bluetooth Device Name Command Definition Default Example F0<Device Friendly Name><CR>
Device Name String up to 254 bytes long 6822-DDEEFF where DDEEFF is from the
(AABBCCDDEEFF) Bluetooth device address F01Lens 100%25 serial module<CR>
This sets the name to Lens 100% serial module. Set Class of Device/Service Field Command Description Example S1< Class of Device/Service field >
The Class of Device/Service (CoD) field is a 24-bit field defined in the Bluetooth Assigned Numbers document. This field is sent in a HEX ASCII format, most significant byte first. S1001F00<CR> is a common Class of Device value for a basic serial device. Set Service Name Command Description Definition Default Example S2<Service Name>
Sets the service friendly name to send to the remote Bluetooth device in response to a service discovery request. The length of the service name is limited to 32 bytes. Profile Name text name entered into the SDP record for the serial port profile Wireless Printer S3Acme Printer<CR>
Connectable On/Off Command Description C0 <ON|OFF><CR>
Sets the device into connectable mode 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 137 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Example C0OFF<CR> Become non-connectable C0ON<CR> Become connectable Specify Page Scan Timing Command Description Default Example C1<Page_Scan_Interval>,<Page_Scan_Window><
CR>
Sets the Page Scan timing parameters 4096,18 C11024,512<CR>
Note: To enable scanning, the values for Interval and Window must be in the range of 18 to 4096. The Window value must be less than the Interval value. Both values must be zero to disable scanning. Note: Modifying Page Scan Timing can improve connection times, but may adversely affect battery performance. Enable Discoverable Command Description Example D0 <ON|OFF><CR>
Sets the device into discoverable mode D0OFF<CR> Become non-discoverable D0ON<CR> Become discoverable Specify Inquiry Scan Timing Command Description Default Example D1<Inquiry_Scan_Interval>,<
Inquiry_Scan_Window><CR>
Sets the Inquiry Scan timing parameters 4096,18 D11024,512<CR>
138 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Set Encryption/Authentication: PIN CODE Command Description Default Example S4<PIN code>
PIN Code Pin code can be NULL and as long as 16 characters S4%00 NULL PIN code S4MyPinCode <CR>
Manage Security Modes This command controls the security access mode and device pairing. The modes available are:
L0 Disable encryption, authentication and exclusion L1 Enable authentication L2 Enable encryption and authentication L3 Enable encryption, authentication and exclusive Mode L0 allows any remote device to connect. Mode L1 require the remote device to be authenticated by a PIN request. The PIN code for the module is set to a userspecified value with the S4 command. Currently the default PIN is the NULL string. Mode L2 adds encryption to the Bluetooth link. Mode L3 adds exclusive connection to one specific Bluetooth device. In this mode only connection requests from the initial device are allowed. Connections from other devices are rejected even if they supply the correct PIN code. Device pairing and bonding are associated with this command and works as follows:
After an L command is executed the current device pairing and bonding is deleted. The next device to connect becomes paired and bonded to the module. In Modes L1 and L2, other devices are allowed to connect but only the first device to connect is paired and bonded. Other devices are always required to supply a PIN code to complete the connection. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 139 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications In Mode L3, only one device is allowed to connect. This device is paired and bonded and needs to supply the PIN code only on the initial connection. Note: Some of the Bluetooth user interfaces cannot supply a NULL string as a PIN code. Use the S4 command to specify a PIN code that is not NULL. Read Module Version Command Description V0<CR>
Displays the firmware build version currently running V0<CR>
Returns: v1yyyymmddHHMM<CR>
Note: This command responds with the requested data, only not the ACK<CR>. Example Read Local Device Address Command Description Returns V1<CR>
Displays the local device address v1%xx%xx%xx%xx%xx%xx<CR>
Note: This command responds with the requested data, only not the ACK<CR>. Example:
Sent: V1<CR>
Received: v1%00%2C%C6%03%45%39 140 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Set Shutdown Timing Command Description Range Default Example T0<Time in Minutes><CR>
Time Integer value 0 implies never expire the timer 0-270 minutes 120 T0120<CR> This sets the shutdown timer to 120 minutes. Clear Link Key Table Command Description Default Example B0<CLR><CR>
Clear Pair or Bonding command cleans up all of the link key and Bluetooth address combination PSKEYs. None B0CLR<CR> This clears all saved link keys. Understanding Adapter States or Modes The Bluetooth adapter connects to an internal serial port of the 6822, providing serial print data over a transparent Bluetooth link, running a Serial Port Profile (SPP). Printing is primarily accomplished over a Bluetooth link using the SPP protocol with a 700 Series or CK60 Mobile Computer. If the relevant printer configuration allows it, a 700 Series or CK60 in a terminal holder charges normally. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 141 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications The Bluetooth adapter allows for four states or modes to be available. Each state is dependent upon either the pin states on the terminal holder connector or the programming connector on the adapter described later. Bluetooth Adapter States or Modes State State/mode 1 2 Bluetooth Printing Passthrough printing HHC_A/B pin 0 0 HHC_DTR pin 0 1 3 4 Bluetooth Reconfiguration Bluetooth programming cabled 1 X 0 X Comments Bluetooth printing/Bluetooth self-test Printing from 700 Series or CK60s allowed to pass through the Bluetooth adapter transparently. Reconfiguring Bluetooth module via 700 Series or CK60s. Programming Bluetooth module via programming cable State 1 - In addition to allowing normal Bluetooth printing, this state also allows for a 700 Series or CK60 in the terminal holder to perform a Bluetooth self-test. State 2 is a Transparent Pass Through mode available for all 700 Series and CK60s. During this mode, the Bluetooth module is shut down and does not communicate. State 3 (Bluetooth reconfiguring using a 700 Color (730, 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, 761) or CK60). This state is unavailable when a 700 Monochrome (705, 710, 720) is used, since the A/B pin is unavailable. State 4 allows for programming the Bluetooth module via its SPI pins. This state is also used for manufacturing tests. To be in this state, the 700 Series or CK60 must not have an open terminal holder COM port and the specially designed programming adapter must be engaged. The interfaces on the Bluetooth adapter that allow for the different modes are detailed below:
142 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications 700 Series or CK60 to 6822 Pass Through Note: Pass through printing requires shutting down the Bluetooth portion of the adapter. To reenable Bluetooth functionality after you finish pass through printing, press a button on the control panel to wake the printer. When DTR on the 700 Series or CK60 is set, the adapter board automatically opens a path between the 700 Series of CK60 and the 6822 Transition/DC Board and powers down the Bluetooth module. Testing the DSR pin to reflect DTR allows the mobile computer to differentiate between a Bluetooth-equipped terminal holder and a non-Bluetooth equipped terminal holder. 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 to Bluetooth Module Communication Interface The Bluetooth adapter allows a 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 to communicate directly with the Bluetooth module under two circumstances. When the configuration settings of the Bluetooth module are to print. When the Bluetooth module requires reconfiguration. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 143 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Power Management Flow Diagram Bluetooth Power Management Flow Diagram 144 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Radio Power On/Off Mechanism Note: The shutdown timer configuration is addressed in Appendix A Bluetooth Configuration Commands. As stated earlier, the Bluetooth adapter, including the Bluetooth radio shuts down after a configurable time (default is two hours of idle time). To wake the Bluetooth adapter, the 6822 is powered on by any button push on the printer control panel. There are two ways to shutdown the Bluetooth module power:
A 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 initiates a pass through mode, or The Bluetooth module sends a shutdown signal after a configurable amount of time. Default is two hours of idle time. Note: The adapter complies with Bluetooth 1.1 specification, including bonding for authentication and enabling encryption. Persistent Storage These settings do not reset after a coldboot is performed on the printer:
Bluetooth Bonding Enable/Disable Bluetooth Encryption Enable/Disable Bluetooth Passkey Bluetooth Bonding List (Link Keys) Bluetooth Device Name Bluetooth Class of Device Discoverable setting Connectable setting Radio Shutdown Timer Timeout (default two hours of idle time) System Behavior/Software Considerations Discoverability The default mode is Discoverable. When configured to be discoverable, the adapter is discoverable at all times, except when:
an active Bluetooth connection exists 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 145 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications you have just completed a pass-through printing print job the shutdown time has elapsed (default shutdown time is two hours). Connectability The default mode is connectable. When configured to be connectable, the printer is connectable at all times, except when:
an active Bluetooth connection exists you have just completed a pass-through printing print job the shutdown time has elapsed (default is two hours). Link Loss The 6822 Bluetooth adapter is able to recover from broken Bluetooth connections, including out-of-range, interference, power failure, or other conditions resulting in a broken connection. It returns to its previous Discoverable/Connectable state after a lost connection. Master/Slave Printer participates in a Bluetooth connection as the slave device. The Class of Device is 0x040680 which translates to a Service Class of Rendering, a Major Device Class of Imaging, and a Minor Device Class of Printer. The 6822 Bluetooth includes an SDP record that allows the printer to report an SPP instance with a service name of Wireless Printer. The default Bluetooth device name is 6822-DDEEFF, where DDEEFF matches the respective portion of the Bluetooth device address (AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF). If the printer the adapter is connecting to is known, the service name is changed to 6822-SN, where SN is replaced with the serial number of the 6822. The 6822 Bluetooth adapter can save 16 link keys across cold boots. Link keys are saved in a circular list. The 17th link key replaces the first, the 18th replaces the 2nd, and so on. Remote Configuration You can query the following items:
Discoverable State [Get/Set]
Connectable State [Get/Set]
146 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Bondable State [Get/Set] (Authentication) Encryption State [Get/Set]
Device Name [Get/Set]
Device Address[Get]
Class of Device[Get/Set]
Service Name [Get/Set]
Bluetooth Profile [Get]
Bluetooth Passkey [Set] (Get the fact that it is set) Radio Shutdown Timeout Bluetooth Performance Range Operating range is expected to range from a minimum separation of 10 cm to over 10 m with a 700 Color or CK60. Link Loss can occur when going in or out of range while communicating with other Bluetooth devices. Diagnostics Capabilities The Bluetooth radio settings are available to a user. The 6822 Bluetooth adapter sends a printout of Bluetooth information to the printer upon receiving a message from a 700 Series or CK60 in a terminal holder. An example self-test is shown below:
6822 Bluetooth Adapter Firmware:Version YYYY MMDD HHMM Bluetooth Configuration:
Device Address:0002371A0FD3 Device Name:6822-9843252 Discoverable:Yes Connectable:Yes Authentication:No Encryption:No Passkey:Not Applicable (or Key present if Authentication is enabled) Stored Link Keys:2 of 16 Power Management:
Shut Off Timer:120 minutes 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 147 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications The Passkey entry either states Not Applicable or Key Present depending on the Authentication state. Applications A 6822 Bluetooth Information application that prints the Bluetooth self-
test information on the 6822 can be installed on your 700 Series or CK60. To use the Bluetooth Information application 1 Insert the 700 Series or CK60 in the terminal holder on the 6822. 2 Tap the Start > Programs > the 6822 BT Information icon on your 700 Series or CK60 computer. 3 Press the Set Page button on the printer control panel to wake the printer. 4 From the 6822 Bluetooth Self-Test screen, tap the Trigger Self Test button to print the information. 148 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications System Qualification Operation Resilience Normal operation of the Bluetooth system is available in environments with radio backbones, including 802.11b, Spectrum 24, and OpenAir technologies. Environmental Specifications Temperature Operating Temperature -20 to 60C (-4 to 140F) Storage Temperature -30 to 70C (-22 to 158F). Temperature Test Results Test Operating Cold to Hot Transition Operating Hot to Cold Transition Humidity Operating Storage Range
-20C to 50C
(-4F to 122F) 50C to 20C
(122F to -4F) Comments External condensation allowed, internal prohibited Speed shall not degrade 5% to 95% RH non-condensing 90% 25 to 60C (48 to 140F) no condensation 90% 25 to 60C (48 to 140F) no condensation Altitude
-100 to 5000 meters Vibration Test Results Test Quasi-Random 3 axis Dynamic Induced Shock Operating Storage When packed Frequency Acceleration Comments 12 g RMS, for 4 hours 20 g on 3 axis 1 G 5 Hz to 80 Hz 3 G 5 Hz to 80 Hz 5 to 55 Hz 2 G 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 149 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Vibration Test Results (continued) Test Sweep Duration Directions Comments 10 minutes (half cycle) 1 hour x, y, and z No external or internal damage should be found after the vibration test, and the unit should operate normally. Unpackaged Drop 2 feet to concrete Terminal Inspection Minimum of 30,000 insertions for the terminal holder. Safety/Regulatory/Agency Requirements The Bluetooth adaptor must meet the electrical safety requirements for Information Technology Equipment. The test configuration must include a portable computer connected to the 6822, continuously printing the letter H. At least 6dB of margin below the relevant limits must be demonstrated. Safety, Regulatory, Agency Requirements Option Product Safety Requirement UL Listed per UL 1950 / UL 60950 (printer and AC power supply) CSA C22.2, No. 950 TUV/GS License per EN 60950 (printer, AC power supply) CB Report for EN 60950 covering all country deviations (Printer, ac power supply) UL 2089 (for cigarette lighter-style adapters) SAE J1113 or ISO 7637 FCC Class B (US); Industry Canada ICES-003 Class B (Canada) CISPR 22 Class B, including telecom port conducted (Europe) AS/NZS 3548 (Australia/New Zealand); CNS 13438 (Taiwan) IEC 61000-4-2Electrostatic Discharge IEC 61000-4-3Radiated RF Field Vehicle Power Interfaces EMC Digital device radiated and conducted emissions EN 55024 Immunity
(Europe) 150 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Safety, Regulatory, Agency Requirements (continued) Option EMC (continued) Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Requirement IEC 61000-4-4Electrical Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-5Surge IEC 61000-4-6Conducted RF IEC 61000-4-8Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-11Voltage Dips and Interrupts (AC printers only). IEC 61000-3-2 (per Amendment 14) Class A if under 70 Watts loaded to 90% of rated value, Class D if over 70 Watts loaded to 90% of rated value IEC 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker. Bluetooth Radio - Modular radio approval is required. BT SIG approval is not mandatory but BT SIG GAP and SPP conformance is a prerequisite. FCC Part 15.247 (US) RSS-210 (Canada - indoor operation, unlicensed. Outdoor operation IF restricted to 2.450-2.4835 GHz) RSS-139 (Canada - indoor/outdoor operation, licensed. 2.400-
2.4835GHz) RSS-102 (Canada) - RF Exposure/SAR. Keep antennas more than 8 inches from operator to avoid SAR testing EN 300 328-1 & -2; EN 300 489-1 & 17 (Europe). SCT (Mexico) IEC950 2nd Edition, 4th Amendment or IEC 60950 3rd Edition, resulting in a GS Mark and a CB Report addressing all country deviations S Mark for Argentina for any device connecting directly to the AC mains CCIB Approval for China for any device connecting directly to the AC mains Mexico NOM 19 as applicable AC power supply
(Europe) Radio Type Approval Additional Approvals 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 151 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Default Configuration Default Configurations Setting Bluetooth Authentication Discoverable Connectable Class of Device Service Name Device Name Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Handshaking Radio Shutdown Timeout Default Off True True 0x040680 Wireless Printer 6822-DDEEFF 19,200 8 1 None Hardware 120 minutes 152 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual C Cross-Reference Tables A set of cross-reference tables are provided to assist you in locating control codes and escape sequences. The default settings are also included. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 153 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences The following table contains a complete alphabetized list of control codes, including single character control codes and escape sequences, as an aid to locating the control codes defined in Chapter 5 Control Code Definitionsor detailed definitions of these control codes, refer to the pages shown in the Page column of this table. Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index Description A Absolute Print Position, Set B Backspace Beeper Category General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control Bottom-Up Printing, Select General Printer Control Byte:
Double Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined Multi-Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined Single Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined C Cancel Line Carriage Return Channel:
General Printer Control General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 62
<Hyper link10>
page 63
<Hyper link10>
page 66
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 63
<Hyper link10>
page 63 154 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Category Tabs and Tab Setting Select Vertical Tab Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 81 Character:
Define Intercharacter Space Define User-Defined Characters Disable Printing of Character Graphics Double Byte Character Sets Enable Printing of Character Graphics Multi-Byte Character Sets Print Character Graphics Select Default Character Set Select National Character Set Select User-Defined Character Set Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74
<Hyper link10>
page 86
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 89
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 87
<Hyper link10>
page 83
<Hyper link10>
page 87 Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 155 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Single Byte Character Sets Category Char. Sets, User Defined User Defined Characters Char. Sets, User Defined Code Code page Selection Char. Sets, User Defined Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Expand Printable Code Area Char. Sets, User Defined Page
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 86
<Hyper link10>
page 83
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 88 156 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Description Condensed (compressed):
Cancel Condensed Mode Copy ROM to RAM Select Condensed Mode D Default Character Set, Select Define Intercharacter Space Define User-Defined Characters Delete Double:
Cancel Double Strike Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Double Byte Character Sets Select Double Strike Mode Category Page Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 71
<Hyper link10>
page 86 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 71
<Hyper link10>
page 87 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74
<Hyper link10>
page 86
<Hyper link10>
page 63 Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73
<Hyper link10>
page 82 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Sets, User Defined 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 157 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Select Double Wide Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) E Elite Pitch, Select Emphasized Mode, Cancel Emphasized Mode, Select Expand:
Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Expand Printable Code Area Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) F Form Feed G General Printer Control Functions Graphics:
158 Page Category Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73
<Hyper link10>
page 88 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 62 General Printer Control General Printer Control 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Disable Printing of Character Graphics Category Char. Sets, User Defined Eight-Pin Graphics Modes Graphics Functions Reassign Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Select Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Select High-Speed Double Density Mode Graphics Functions Select Low-Speed Double Density Mode Graphics Functions Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Mode Graphics Functions Select Single Density Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Enable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Nine-Pin Graphics Modes Graphics Functions Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Print Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Page
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 91
<Hyper link10>
page 91
<Hyper link10>
page 91
<Hyper link10>
page 92
<Hyper link10>
page 92
<Hyper link10>
page 92
<Hyper link10>
page 92
<Hyper link10>
page 89
<Hyper link10>
page 93
<Hyper link10>
page 93
<Hyper link10>
page 93
<Hyper link10>
page 90 H Half Speed:
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 159 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Cancel Half-Speed Printing Category General Printer Control Select Half-Speed Printing General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 64 Horizontal:
Clear Horizontal Tabs Perform Horizontal Tab Set Horizontal Tabs I Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode, Set Intercharacter Space, Define Italic:
Cancel Italic Mode Select Italic Mode L Left Margin, Set Length:
Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting
<Hyper link10>
page 79
<Hyper link10>
page 78
<Hyper link10>
page 79
<Hyper link10>
page 64 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 75 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 75
<Hyper link10>
page 70 Page Formatting Set Page Length (inches) Page Formatting Set Page Length (lines) Page Formatting
<Hyper link10>
page 68
<Hyper link10>
page 68 160 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Description Line, Cancel Line Feed:
Perform Line Feed Category General Printer Control General Printer Control Perform n/216 inch Line Feed General Printer Control Perform n/216 inch Reverse Line Feed General Printer Control Line Spacing:
Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 63
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 68
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 69 M Margin:
Set Left Margin Set Right Margin Master Select Page Formatting Page Formatting
<Hyper link10>
page 70
<Hyper link10>
page 69 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 75 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 161 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Master Reset, Perform Mode:
Cancel Condensed Mode (compressed) Cancel Double Strike Mode Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Cancel Emphasized Mode Cancel Italic Mode Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Cancel Underline Mode Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Select Double Strike Mode Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Category General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 65 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 71 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 75 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 71 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 162 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Description Select Emphasized Mode Select Elite Pitch Select Italic Mode Select Pica Pitch Select Subscript Mode Select Superscript Mode Select Underline Mode Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Multi-Byte Character Sets N National Character Set, Select O One Line Only:
Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) Page Category Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 75 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 83 Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72
<Hyper link10>
page 67 General Printer Control 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 163 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description P Page:
Category Set Page Length (inches) Page Formatting Set Page Length (lines) Page Formatting Perforation:
Cancel Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Set Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 68
<Hyper link10>
page 68
<Hyper link10>
page 71
<Hyper link10>
page 70 Pitch:
Select Elite Pitch Select Pica Pitch Position:
Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 Set Print Position (absolute) General Printer Control Set Print Position (relative) General Printer Control Print:
Cancel Half-Speed Printing General Printer Control Cancel Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Disable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 66
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 90 164 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Category Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Expand Printable Code Area Char. Sets, User Defined Print Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Select Bottom-Up Printing General Printer Control Select Half-Speed Printing General Printer Control Select Top-Down Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) General Printer Control Set Print Position (absolute) General Printer Control Set Print Position (relative) General Printer Control R Reset, Perform Master General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 89
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 66
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 66
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 66
<Hyper link10>
page 65 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 165 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Reverse n/216 inch Line Feed, Perform Category General Printer Control Right Margin, Set Page Formatting ROM to RAM, Copy Char. Sets, User Defined S Single Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined Skip:
Cancel Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Set Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Sleep Mode, Set Inactivity Time for General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 86
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 71
<Hyper link10>
page 70
<Hyper link10>
page 64 Space:
Define Intercharacter Space Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Page Formatting Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 68
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 69 Page Formatting Page Formatting 166 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Category Page Formatting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 69 Strike:
Cancel Double Strike Mode Select Double Strike Mode Subscript/Superscript:
Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Select Subscript Mode Select Superscript Mode Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 T Tab:
Clear Horizontal Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Clear Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Perform Horizontal Tab Tabs and Tab Setting Perform Vertical Tab Tabs and Tab Setting Select Vertical Tab Channel Tabs and Tab Setting
<Hyper link10>
page 79
<Hyper link10>
page 80
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 78
<Hyper link10>
page 80
<Hyper link10>
page 81 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 167 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Set Horizontal Tabs Category Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Time for Sleep Mode, Set Inactivity General Printer Control Top-Down Printing, Select General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 79
<Hyper link10>
page 80
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 66 U Underline:
Cancel Underline Mode Select Underline Mode Unidirectional:
Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78 Cancel Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) General Printer Control User Defined Characters:
Copy ROM to RAM Char. Sets, User Defined Define User-Defined Characters Char. Sets, User Defined
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 86
<Hyper link10>
page 86 168 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Disable Printing of Character Graphics Category Char. Sets, User Defined Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Expand Printable Code Area Char. Sets, User Defined Print Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Select Default Character Set Char. Sets, User Defined Select User-Defined Character Set Char. Sets, User Defined V Vertical:
Clear Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Perform Vertical Tab Tabs and Tab Setting Select Vertical Tab Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 89
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 87
<Hyper link10>
page 87
<Hyper link10>
page 80
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 80
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 80 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 169 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Category Tabs and Tab Setting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 81 W Wide:
Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Single Character Control Code Definitions This table contains control codes between 00h and 7Fh, and provides definitions for the ASCII symbols as used in the table on the next page and in format definitions in Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions. Single Character Control Code Definitions Used as a terminator for several escape sequences. ASCII Description NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL Hex 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Dec 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 170 Beeper: sounds buzzer for 1/10 of a second. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Page
<Hyper link10>
page 63 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Single Character Control Code Definitions (continued) Dec 8 Hex 08 ASCII Description BS Backspace: moves printhead one space to left. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 09 0A 0B HT Horizontal Tab: moves printhead to next tab stop. LF Line Feed: moves paper to next line. VT Vertical Tab: moves paper to next vertical tab stop 0C FF Form Feed: advances paper to top of next page. 0D CR Carriage Return: moves printhead to left margin. SO Shift Out: selects double-wide mode (one-line-only) SI Shift In: selects condensed (compressed) mode DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 Device Control 1: sets printer online (not currently used) Device Control 2: cancels condensed mode (compressed) <Hyper link10>
page 71 Device Control 3: sets printer offline (not currently used) Device Control 4: cancels double-wide mode (one line only) NAK SYN ETB CAN Cancel Line: clears all characters out of print buffer. Page
<Hyper link10>
page 62
<Hyper link10>
page 78
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 79
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 63
<Hyper link10>
page 72
<Hyper link10>
page 71
<Hyper link10>
page 73
<Hyper link10>
page 63 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 171 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Single Character Control Code Definitions (continued) Dec 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 127 Hex 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 7F ASCII Description EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US SP DEL Escape: defines start of escape sequence. Space Character Delete: deletes last character in print buffer. Page
<Hyper link10>
page 63 172 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Escape Sequence Quick Reference The following table is a quick reference between the escape sequences listed in ascending order, according to numeric values. For detailed definitions, see Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions. Escape Sequence Quick Reference Decimal ESC SO ESC SI ESC US (0) ESC US (1) ESC SP n ESC ! n ESC $ n1 n2 ESC % (0) ESC % (1) ESC & NUL k1 k2 s1 d1...d11 ESC * m n1 n2 ESC + n d1...dn ESC - 0*
ESC - 1*
ESC / c ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3 n ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC 6 ESC 7 ESC <
ESC : NUL NUL NUL ESC ? s n Description Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode (one line only) Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Select Top-Down Printing Select Bottom-Up Printing Define Inter-Character Space Master Select Set Print Position (absolute) Select Default Character Set Select User-Defined Character Set Define User-Defined Characters Select Graphics Mode Print Character Graphics Cancel Underline Mode Select Underline Mode Select Vertical Tab Channel Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Select Italic Mode Cancel Italic Mode Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) Copy ROM to RAM Reassign Graphics Mode 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 173 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Escape Sequence Quick Reference (continued) Decimal ESC @
ESC A n ESC B NUL ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC C n ESC C NUL n ESC D NUL ESC D n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC E ESC F ESC G ESC H ESC I n ESC J n ESC K n1 n2 ESC L n1 n2 ESC M ESC N n ESC O ESC P ESC Q n ESC R n0 n1 n2 ESC R n ESC S 0*
ESC S 1*
ESC T ESC U 0*
ESC U 1*
ESC W 0*
ESC W 1*
ESC Y n1 n2 ESC Z n1 n2 Description Perform Master Reset Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Clear Vertical Tabs Set Vertical Tabs Set Page Length (lines) Set Page Length (inches) Clear Horizontal Tabs Set Horizontal Tabs Select Emphasized Mode Cancel Emphasized Mode Select Double-Strike Mode Cancel Double-Strike Mode Expand Printable Code Area Perform n/216 inch Line Feed Select Single-Density Graphics Mode Select Low-Speed Double-Density Graphics Mode Select Elite Pitch Set Skip Over Perforation Cancel Skip Over Perforation Select Pica Pitch Set Right Margin Code page Selection Select National Character Set Select Superscript Mode Select Subscript Mode Cancel Superscript/Subscript Mode Cancel Unidirectional Printing Select Unidirectional Printing Cancel Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Select High-Speed Double-Density Graphics Mode Select Low-Speed Quadruple-Density Graphics Mode 174 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Escape Sequence Quick Reference (continued) Decimal ESC ^ (0) n1 n2 ESC ^ (1) n1 n2 ESC b c NUL ESC b c n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC j n ESC l n ESC s 0*
ESC s 1*
ESC t (0) ESC t (1) ESC z n ESC \ n1 n2 Description Select 9-pin Single Density Graphics Mode Select 9-pin Double Density Graphics Mode Clear Vertical Tab Channel Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Perform n/216 inch Reverse Line Feed Set Left Margin Cancel Half-Speed Printing Select Half-Speed Printing Disable Printing of Character Graphics Enable Printing of Character Graphics Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Set Print Position (relative) Factory-Installed Printer Defaults Factory-Installed Printer Defaults Function Carriage position Character set Code page Codes 128-255 Condensed (compressed) Double-Strike Double-Wide Emphasized Graphics mode Half-Speed printing Intercharacter space International character sets Italic Justification Default Value At left margin Normal (not user defined) 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Not selected Disabled Zero (0) Disabled Disabled Left justification 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 175 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Factory-Installed Printer Defaults (continued) Function Keyboard, printer Language Line Spacing Margin, left Margin, right MSB control NLQ Page length Default Value Enabled USA 1/6 inch 0 80 Disabled Disabled 11 inch (66 lines with Pica pitch) Enabled Pica (10 characters per inch) 10 seconds Top-down, bidirectional Paper end sensor Pitch Power off sleep timer Printer Code Area Expansion Disabled Printing direction Redefinition of graphic modes Disabled Skip over perforation Disabled Disabled Subscript/Superscript Tabs, horizontal Set to default tabs (every 8 column) 1 line feed each tab, channel = 0 Set to current line Disabled Disabled (bidirectional) Removed Tabs, vertical Top of form Underline Unidirectional printing User defined character set The settings in the previous table are installed in the printer at the factory. To restore the printer to these defaults, see Reset Button on page 4 for instructions. The default settings listed below can be restored to the printer, as described in Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility. 176 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Printer Default Settings Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Function Zero print option Autofeed configuration Protocol Parity Bit Rate Default Value Zeros are printed with a slash CR (carriage return added at end of line without line feed) NPCP (NORAND Portable Communications Protocol) N/A (for NPCP) 19.2K 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 177 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables 178 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual D Printer Font Test Jobs This appendix contains a sample print job for each font available on your 6822 printer. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 179 Appendix D Printer Font Test Jobs About the Printer Font Jobs You can perform these tests yourselves. Load the font of choice from the Toolkit CD into flash memory. After downloading the desired font, use any of the sample print jobs to reveal the character locations within the printer memory. The sample test print jobs are formatted as a memory mapped and could be referenced to select a desired character. These test print jobs originated from running a C program by a person with specific knowledge of how to generate such a report (print job). The C program demonstrates how a programmer could access the printer font modules within flash memory to select desired character. You do not need more than one font module loaded. Any ONE of:
nft00932.mod, nft00936.mod, nft00949.mod, or even nft00950.mod Asian fonts can be used. These are distributed via the NPTK6822 toolkit
(including the source code). These print jobs are in this appendix:
BIG5.C which creates BIG5950.TXT CHINA.C which creates GB2312.TXT IBM437.C which creates IBM437.TXT JAPAN.C which creates JIS932.TXT KOREA.C which creates KOREA.TXT NATION.C which creates NATION.TXT Big 5 Traditional Chinese Character Set This program generates a text file, big5950.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the BIG 5 traditional Chinese character set. Install the BIG 5 character font (nft00950.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have big5950.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl big5.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run big5.exe to create big5950.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. 180 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manuall Simplified Chinese Character Set Appendix D Printer Font Test Jobs This program generates a text file, gb2312.txt, that to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the Simplified Chinese character set. Install the Simplified Chinese character font (nft00936.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have gb2312.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl china.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run china.exe to create gb2312.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. IBM 437 Code Page Character Set This program generates a text file, ibm437.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the IBM 437 code page character set. Install the IBM 437 character font (nft00437.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have ibm437.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl ibm437.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run ibm437.exe to create ibm437.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. Japanese (Shift JIS) Character Set This program generates a text file, jis932.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the JIS character set. Install the JIS character font (nft00932.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have jis932.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl japan.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run japan.exe to create jis932.txt. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 181 Appendix D Printer Font Test Jobs 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. Korean Character Set This program generates a text file, korea.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the KSC5601 character set. Install the KSC5601 character font (nft00949.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have korea.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl korea.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run korea.exe to create korea.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. International Character Set This program generates a text file, nation.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the international character sets available for use in the default character set. Install the default character set font (nft00000.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have nation.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl nation.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run nation.exe to create nation.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. 182 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manuall I Index 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 183 Index Numerics 4000 Series Terminal Holder 2 61XX Terminal Holder 2 62XX Terminal Holder 2 700 series computer pinout configuration 122 inserting in terminal holder 17 A ActiveSync disabling 54 enabling 46 Alpha keyboard Windows 95/98 38 B Big 5 traditional Chinese character set 82 Bluetooth adapter applications 148 class of device 146 default device name 146 link keys 146 link loss 146, 147 master/slave 146 performance range 147 query items 146 SDP record 146 self-test 147 Bluetooth Configuration Commands connectable on/off 137 manage security modes 139 query mode commands 136 specify inquiry scan timing 138 specify page scan timing 138 BM0_1_DI7ZVP_ZBNA0B_7SKU RH_2 2 Buffers I/O buffer 58 print (image) buffer 58 C Cables 15pin to 25pin 25pin to 15pin 25pin to 25pin 120 9pin to 15pin 121 Change configuration parameters error messages 54 Windows 95/98 37 Chinese Character sets Big 5 traditional 82 GB 2312 82 Code page file Class of device Greek 85 Hebrew 83 international 83 Japanese, shift JIS 82 Korean, KSC5601 82 Bluetooth adapter 146 NFT00932.MOD, 932 file 82 NFT00936.MOD, 936 file 82 NFT00949.MOD, 949 file 82 NFT00950.MOD, 950 file 82 connectable on/off 137 manage security modes 139 query mode 136 specify inquiry scan timing 138 specify page scan timing 138 Communications connector pinouts Commands 123 Configuration ActiveSync installation setting 6820 printer configuration enabling 46, 54 Windows 95/98 28 overview of operation Windows 2000/XP 46 Windows 2000/XP 49 Windows 2000/XP 46 Windows 95/98 29 Connectable on/off 137 Control code/escape sequence table working memory 154 Control codes crossreference tables control codes & escape sequences index 154 Copy fonts 184 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Windows 95/98 35 Crossreference tables index 154 control codes & escape sequences configuration file, default.pcf D Default printer settings Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 default.pcf default configuration Windows 95/98 Bluetooth adapter Device name E Error messages printer settings Windows 2000/XP Escape sequence/control code table Escape sequences crossreference (to definitions) F Factory defaults Windows 95/98 Fixed mount printer description Flash space available Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 Fonts copy Windows 95/98 Chinese character set G GB 2312 Greek character sets H Hebrew character sets Horizontal tabs Index perform perform horizontal tab I I/O buffer Image buffer Inactivity time set inactivity time for sleep mode Windows 95/98 Installation (configuration utility) International character set J Japanese character set (Shift JIS) K Korean character set (KSC5601) KSC5601 Korean character set L Line feed (LF) Line spacing perform line feed LINE FEED button setting paper for printing select 1/8inch line spacing Bluetooth adapter Bluetooth adapter Link keys Link loss
, M Manage security modes Master/slave Modes Bluetooth adapter inactivity time for sleep mode N nft00932.mod nft00936.mod code page 932 code page 936 code page 949 code page 950 nft00949.mod nft00950.mod 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 185 Index nptk6820.exe toolkit self-extracting Windows 95/98 O Operation pinfeed holders
, P Parameters Windows 95/98 Portable printer description Print (image) buffer Print head printer alignment set to third notch Windows 95/98 Printer descriptions fixed mount portable Print head gap Printer default settings Printer mechanism alignment Printer problems Printer, get from (load configuration) Printer, save configuration to Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 Programs, selftest control program verification Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 Bluetooth adapter Q Query items Query mode commands R Range Bluetooth adapter Reset button portable Windows 95/98 install Ribbon cartridge Restore defaults to printer rpgpconf.exe configuration utility, application Windows 95/98 rpgpconf.ini installation file Windows 95/98 S Save (update working configuration) SDP record Save to printer Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 Bluetooth adapter Bluetooth adapter setting paper for printing SET PAGE button Setting 6820 printer configuration Selftest Windows 95/98 Settings, default Shift JIS, Japanese character set Sleep mode set inactivity time for sleep mode Sleep mode, set activity time for Space remaining in flash Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 Spacing, line select 1/8inch line spacing Specify inquiry scan timing Specify page scan timing T Tabs and tab setting functions perform horizontal tab horizontal tabs Terminal holder Time inserting 700 series computer set inactivity time for sleep mode Tool kit self-extracting archive file Windows 95/98 186 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Traditional, Bit 5, Chinese character set Troubleshooting Bluetooth adapter diagnostics possible printer problems POST error codes selftest U Utility, configuration Windows 95/98 installation operation Index Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 V Verifications Visible moving parts in mechanism printer components W Wall mount printer Working configuration Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 187 Index 188 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2008 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Guide
*935-013-001*
P/N 935-013-001
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2008-04-30 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2008-03-21 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
3 | 2008-03-12 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
4 | 2007-09-05 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 | Effective |
2008-04-30
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
2008-03-21
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2008-03-12
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2007-09-05
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Intermec Technologies Corporation
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0022970339
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
9680 Old Bailes Rd.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Fort Mill, South Carolina 29707
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Application Email Address |
d******@nwemc.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
c******@curtis-straus.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
d******@nwemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Grantee Code |
EHA
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Product Code |
06CN3
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
B**** R******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Title |
VP & GC, Honeywell Scanning & Mobility
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
803-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
803-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
b******@honeywell.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
Advance Data Technology Corporation (Hwa Ya)
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
G****** C********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
No. 19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Kwei Shan Hsiang
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Taoyuan Hsien, 333
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
G******@adt.com.tw
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
Advance Data Technology Corporation
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
E****** W****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
No. 19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Kwei Shan Hsiang
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Taoyuan Hsien, 333
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
e******@adt.com.tw
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | CN3 | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Grant Comments | Grant conditions from original and subsequent filings if any under this FCC ID are applicable, also the following concerning this Class II permissive change: Output power is peak conducted. Collocated transmitter operating configurations have been evaluated as described in this filing with optional FCC ID: EHABTS080-1 (mobile printer-Model 6820). Other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. For mobile operating configurations, the antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter not described in this application. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Collocated body-worn operating configurations have been evaluated as described in previous filings; other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. Body-worn operations are restricted to the specific belt-clips/accessories tested for in previous filings. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are: Part 15 head 0.651 W/kg, body-worn 0.065 W/kg. | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Output power is peak conducted. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Body-worn operations are restricted to the specific belt-clips/accessories tested for this filing. The highest reported SAR values are: Part 15 head 0.651 W/kg, body-worn 0.065 W/kg. Class II Permissive Change for adding a new collocation configuration with Intermec printer, model PW50, FCC ID: EHA-RN41A, as described in this filing. Other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Output power is peak conducted. Collocated transmitter operating configurations have been evaluated as described in this filing with optional FCC IDs EHAIM4 (mobile-Model IP30) and EHA-BTM4 (mobile -Model IP30). Other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. For mobile operating configurations, the antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 23 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter not described in this application. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Body-worn operations are restricted to the specific belt-clips/accessories tested for this filing. The highest reported SAR values are: Part 15 head 0.651 W/kg, body-worn 0.065 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Output power is peak conducted. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Body-worn operations are restricted to the specific belt-clips/accessories tested for this filing. The highest reported SAR values are: Part 15 head 0.651 W/kg, body-worn 0.065 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
Northwest EMC, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
G**** K******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
R******** C****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
503-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
886-3******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
503-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
886-3********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
g******@nwemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
r******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0043 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.1064 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.1064 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15C | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0043 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.1064 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15C | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0043 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.1064 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 15C | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0043 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC